Owner’s manual

Ghibli

Owner's Manual
 Dear Customer,
Thank you for choosing a Maserati.
This vehicle represents the result of Maserati's great experience in the design and production of sports, touring and
racing vehicles.
The purpose of this manual is to provide an understanding of the equipment, systems and controls of the vehicle and
how they work.
With this manual you will acquaint yourself with the equipment and options of your Maserati in order to take advantage
of its full potential.
Before driving your vehicle for the first time, we suggest reading the printed Quick Guide carefully in order to quickly
acquaint with commands and functions of your vehicle. You can consult this Owner's Manual and the Maserati Touch
Control guide comprised in the DVD directly from the display of your vehicle or on your pc. In additional to these, on the
DVD you can find the “Other Documentation” folder with a pdf copy of the certifications and other documents.
In a dedicated section of this manual you will also find instructions for basic maintenance procedures, in order to ensure
steady levels of performance, quality and safe driving.
Keep in mind that proper maintenance is an essential factor to help preserve the value of the vehicle over time and
protect the environment.
For “Scheduled Maintenance” or any other operation, please contact your Authorized Maserati Dealer: Our trained
technical staff is constantly providing the latest updates in order to ensure your vehicle is serviced properly.
The Quick guide and the DVD are integral part of the vehicle and should always be kept on board.
If you are the first owner of this vehicle, you can require a printed copy of the documents available on the DVD directly
at the Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Maserati is committed to protecting the environment and natural resources; which is why we chose to develop Owner’s
documentation in digital format instead of printing paper, thus reducing consumption of materials deriving from wood.

2
3
4
 Introduction 1

Before Starting 2

Understanding the Vehicle 3

Dashboard Instruments and Controls 4

Driving 5

In an Emergency 6

Maintenance and Care 7

Features and Specifications 8

Index 9

5
6
1 – Introduction

Consulting the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Service and Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Suggestions for Obtaining Service for Your Vehicle. . . . 10
If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Parts Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Aftermarket Parts & Accessories Statement . . . . . . . . . 13
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Warnings when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Maserati Roadside Assistance Program
(available for USA and Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Vehicle Identification Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

7
 Introduction

Consulting the Manual NOTE: Abbreviations

1 Additional information regarding the
For an easy identification of the topics, subject and/or the operation Some descriptions and terms with
this Manual is divided into sections described. particular meanings are found in this
and chapters: each chapter can have manual in abbreviated form.
more paragraphs. • “Left” and “right” in this manual, A/C AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM.
Within the text, important warnings always refer to the driving direction.
and notes are also easily identifiable ABS ANTI-LOCK BRAKING
• All indications and images in this SYSTEM.
through icons.
Manual refer to a vehicle with
AFS ADVANCED FRONTLIGHTING
left-hand drive. On right-hand drive
SYSTEM.
vehicles, some controls are ordered
WARNING! differently than shown in the ALR AUTOMATIC LOCKING
Failure to comply with the instructions illustrations. RETRACTOR.
could cause HAZARDOUS SITUATIONS ATC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
involving personal and vehicle safety. CONTROL.
AWD ALL-WHEEL DRIVE.
BAS BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM.
ENVIRONMENTAL!
CAN CONTROLLER AREA
This note indicates the correct
NETWORK.
behavior when using the vehicle to
protect the environment. DRL DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS.
EBD ELECTRONIC BRAKE-FORCE
DISTRIBUTION.
CAUTION! ECU ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT.
Aimed at preventing any damage to EDR EVENT DATA RECORDER.
the vehicle and thus hazards involving
EPB ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE.
the safety of persons.
ESC ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL.
ETC ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
CONTROL.

8
 Introduction

HBA HYDRAULIC BRAKE Updating Service and Warranty

ASSISTANCE. Constant improvements are being The information provided in this 1
HSA HILL START ASSIST. performed to maintain this vehicle's manual is limited to instructions and
ICE INCREASE CONTROL high level of quality. Therefore, there indications that are strictly required
EFFICIENCY. may be differences between this for vehicle use and proper
manual and your vehicle. maintenance.
LATCH LOWER ANCHORS AND
Maserati reserves the right to carry By following these instructions
TETHER FOR CHILDREN.
out design and functional changes carefully, the vehicle will meet the
MIL MALFUNCTION INDICATOR and to provide updates or owner's satisfaction and best results.
LIGHT. improvements. We advise to have all service and
MTC MASERATI TOUCH This Owner's Manual illustrates and inspections completed only by an
CONTROL. describes all versions of the current Authorized Maserati Dealer, where
OBD ON BOARD DIAGNOSTICS. vehicle model. Therefore, some of the you will find a specially trained staff
equipment and accessories in this and the proper equipment to repair
RAB READY ALERT BRAKING.
publication may not appear on your your vehicle.
RBS RAIN BRAKE SUPPORT. vehicle; please only consider the Please visit the www.maserati.com to
RHD RIGHT-HAND DRIVE. information related to your vehicle. find the nearest Authorized Maserati
RKE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY. All specifications and illustrations Dealer.
contained in this manual are as of the All features and accessories installed
RWD REAR-WHEEL DRIVE. Manual publishing date. on the vehicle have been designed by
SBR SEAT BELT REMINDER. Maserati engineers and have
NOTE:
SRS SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT successfully passed rigorous tests,
SYSTEM. The updated version of the on-board submitted in all conditions of use.
documentation can also be consulted Installing aftermarket components or
TCS TRACTION CONTROL by accessing the section “SERVICES” accessories not approved by Maserati
SYSTEM. on the website www.maserati.com or may interfere with the vehicle
TFT THIN FILM TRANSISTOR. by using the specific apps developed electronics and compromise driving
TPMS TIRE PRESSURE for the more common Tablet and safety, voiding the warranty coverage.
MONITORING SYSTEM. Smartphone.
VIN VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER.

9
 Introduction
Nor do the warranties cover the costs Suggestions for Obtaining At many Authorized Dealers/Service
of repairing damage or conditions Centers, it is possible to obtain a
1 caused by any changes to your vehicle Service for Your Vehicle loaner vehicle or a rental vehicle at a
that do not comply with Maserati’s minimal daily charge. If you need a
specifications.
Prepare for the Appointment rental vehicle, it is advisable to make
An Authorized Maserati Dealer is at If warranty work is required, be sure to these arrangements prior to the visit,
your complete disposal for any have the right papers with you and for example when you call to set the
information and questions you may take your warranty folder. Not all work appointment.
have. being performed may be covered by
the warranty: therefore discuss
additional charges with the service
WARNING! manager. It is advisable to keep a
maintenance log of your vehicle’s
CALIFORNIA proposition 65.
service history, as this can often
Engine exhaust, some of its
provide a clue to the current problem.
constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain or emit chemicals Prepare a List
known to the state of California to
Make a written list of your vehicle’s
cause cancer, and birth defects or
problems or the specific work you wish
other reproductive harm. In addition,
to be performed. If the vehicle has had
certain fluids contained in vehicles and
an accident or work done that is not
certain products of component wear
indicated on the maintenance log,
contain or emit chemicals known to
please communicate this to the service
the State of California to cause cancer,
advisor.
and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Optimize the Requests
If there are a number of items needing
attention, it is advisable to discuss this
with your service advisor to agree on
the order of priorities.

10
 Introduction

If You Need Assistance Contact: Warranty Information

MASERATI North America, Inc.
The manufacturer/Maserati and its 250 Sylvan Avenue Please refer to the Warranty booklet, 1
Authorized Dealers/Service Network Englewood Cliffs included in the Owner’s
set highest priority to the client’s NJ 07632 documentation kit and on the DVD,
satisfaction with the products and Phone: (201) 816–2600 for the terms and provisions of
services. Maserati warranties applicable to this
Warranty service must be performed vehicle and market.
by an Authorized Maserati
Dealer/Service Center.
Should there be any issues, please
keep in mind that most matters can be
resolved with the following process.
• If for some reason you are still not
satisfied, please contact the general
manager or owner of the Service
Center, it is their responsibility to
assist you.
• If a Service Center is unable to
resolve the issue, you may contact
Maserati Customer Center.
Any communication to the Maserati
Consumer Affairs should include the
following information:
• Owner’s name and address.
• Owner’s telephone number (home
and office).
• Maserati Service Center name.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage.

11
 Introduction

Reporting Safety Defects in addition to notifying Maserati North In Canada

America, Inc.
1 If you believe that your vehicle has a
NHTSA’s Toll-free Auto Safety Transport Canada can be contacted at: safety defect, contact the Customer
Hotline 1-800-333-0510 Service Department immediately.
Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 Canadian customers who wish to
If you believe that your vehicle has a
Fax: 1-819-994-3372 report a safety defect to the Canadian
defect which could cause a crash,
Mailing Address: Transport Canada - government should contact Transport
injury or death, immediately inform
Road Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
the National Highway Traffic Safety
(Quebec) J8Z 0A1. Investigations and Recalls at
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Maserati North America, Inc. 1-800-333-0510 or go to
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Maserati North America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting safety defects in Canada
If you believe your vehicle has a defect
that could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should
immediately inform Transport Canada

12
 Introduction

Parts Service Aftermarket Parts & Non-genuine Maserati Parts

Genuine parts keep the reliability, Accessories Statement Non-genuine Maserati Parts (while 1
you may elect to use non-genuine
comfort and performance of your new Modification of the vehicle or Maserati parts for maintenance or
car unchanged throughout its life. installation of any accessory or repair services), Maserati North
For service and scheduled components attached to the vehicle America, Inc. is not obligated to pay
maintenance Maserati suggests which alters the original engineering for repairs that include non-genuine
requesting genuine parts since they and/or vehicle operating Maserati parts or for any damage
are the result of constant research, specifications, or which result in resulting from the use of non-genuine
development, and reliability. damage to the other original parts.
For the above mentioned reasons and components, electrical interference, Maserati will not accept any liability
because they are specifically designed electrical short(s), radio static, water for any parts and accessories not
for this vehicle, rely on genuine parts. leaks and wind noise may result in approved by Maserati, including
Always ask for genuine parts and damage to genuine components, Dealer-installed accessories not
make sure they are used for all compromise the safety of the vehicle distributed by Maserati North
services. and affect the validity of the new car America, Inc.
warranty on the vehicle.

13
 Introduction

Symbols Coolant expansion Battery - jack

1 There are specific colored plates on or reservoir Refer to the owner manual.
near some of the components on your Do not open cap with
Maserati designed to attract user’s engine warm.
attention. Important warnings Coil - headlights Warning Symbols
concerning all specific devices that the High voltage.
Engine - Engine Oil Filler
user must consider, are reported on Cap
the internal lid cover central label (see Belts and pulleys
Engine oil. We recommend
“Vehicle Identification Data” in this Moving parts, keep body
using an oil with the
section). and clothing clear.
characteristics indicated in
All symbols reported on the plate and Air-conditioning lines chapter “Refillings” in
inside the vehicle, as well as the High pressure gas, do not Section 8.
component for which the symbols open.
stand, are summarized in the Hydraulic steering reservoir
following list. These symbols are Power steering fluid. Do
divided into categories according to
Symbols of Prohibitions and not exceed max. level. We
their meaning. Compulsory Measures recommend using a liquid
with the characteristics
Danger Symbols Battery indicated in chapter
Keep away from flames. “Refillings” in Section 8.
Battery
Corrosive liquid. Battery Brake fluid reservoir
Keep out of children’s Brake fluid type DOT 4. Do
Battery reach. not exceed max. level. We
Explosion. recommend using a fluid
Heat guards - belts - with the characteristics
pulleys - fans indicated in chapter
Blower Do not touch.
May start automatically “Refillings” in Section 8.
Battery
even with engine off.
Wear eye protection.

14
 Introduction

Radiator coolant expansion Warnings when driving

reservoir Always comply with local traffic WARNING! 1
Use antifreeze liquid for regulations wherever you drive. • It is the driver’s responsibility to
radiators. We recommend Failure to operate this vehicle correctly operate the vehicle in a safe way: if
using a liquid with the may result in loss of control or a you are distracted while driving you
characteristics indicated in collision. can lose control and cause serious
chapter “Refillings” in Operating this vehicle at excessive accidents.
Section 8. speed or in an altered state or while • Maserati strongly recommends you
Windshield washer fluid intoxicated may result in loss of use particular care when operating
reservoir control, going off the road, or the features and tools that may
Windshield washer. We overturning. In all these situations a distract you.
recommend using a liquid collision with other vehicles or objects
• Mobile phones, PC, portable audio
with the characteristics is more likely to happen with the risk
device or other features operated
indicated in chapter to cause an accident that may lead to
while the vehicle is moving can be
“Refillings” in Section 8. serious injury.
very dangerous and can cause
In case of an accident, failure to use
serious accidents.
seat belts causes the driver and
passengers a greater risk of injury or • It is very dangerous to send text
death. Use your seat belt at all times. messages while driving; do so only
This Owner's Manual contains when the vehicle is not moving.
warnings against operating • In some Countries the use of mobile
procedures that could result in a phone when driving is forbidden: it
collision, injury or damage to the is the driver’s sole responsibility to
environment. It also contains cautions respect local regulations.
against procedures that could damage
the vehicle.
Important information may be missed
for not reading this manual in its
entirely. Carefully consider all
warnings and cautions.

15
 Introduction

Maserati Roadside Summary of Program Benefits telephone number, VIN, rental dates
and Services and the corresponding warranty
1 Assistance Program repair order.
• Towing of a disabled registered
(available for USA and Maserati vehicle. In the event a Maserati Roadside Assistance ATTN:
Canada only) registered vehicle becomes disabled Maserati Rental Car Claims Dept.
in connection to a warranty related P.O. Box 8140 Ft.
Welcome to Maserati and the benefits Washington, PA 19034
concern it will be transported to the
and security of the Maserati Roadside
nearest Authorized Maserati NOTE:
Assistance Program. Please take a
Dealership. You may request that the
moment to review the benefits listed An authorized licensed driver must be
vehicle be taken to a different
below and available to you through driving at the time of the disablement.
Authorized Maserati Dealer, as long
the Maserati Roadside Assistance
as it is no more than 50 miles further Items excluded from coverage:
Program.
away from the nearest authorized
• Parts, labor, tire repair, rental of
Emergency Roadside Services dealer (one tow per disablement).
towing equipment, storage fees, or
In the event you require Roadside • Battery jump start. any labor performed at the service
Assistance, please call 1-888-371-1802, • Flat tire change providing the vehicle facility.
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. You is equipped with a spare tire. • Any form of impound towing, or
will be connected with a Roadside • Fuel delivery (up to 2 gallons). towing by someone other than a
Assistance representative who will • Lockout Services. licensed service station or garage.
dispatch a local towing vendor.
• Rental Car allowance: in the event • Assistance from a private citizen.
Information needed for when your vehicle is disabled due to a
you call warranty related concern, we will
reimburse you up to $50 per day. A
When you call, please be prepared to five (5) day or $250 maximum
provide the following information: applies. In order to receive
• Your Name. reimbursement, you must supply the
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). following information within 20 days
• Location of your vehicle. of the rental car transaction to the
address listed below; the original
• Nature of your call (for example; you
pre-printed rental car receipt, which
require a tow, vehicle will not start,
must include your name, address,
out of gas, tire service, etc.).

16
 Introduction
NOTE: • NEW VEHICLES: Your membership Address Inquiries to
Membership is intended to cover begins on the date the Registered General Inquiries:
Vehicle was originally sold (in service
1
emergencies and is not intended to be Maserati Roadside Assistance
a substitute for proper vehicle date) and continues until the P.O. Box 968008
maintenance or repair. Repeated calls expiration date of the New Car Schaumburg, IL 60173
which are considered by Maserati Limited Warranty or unless
Rental Car Reimbursements:
North America, Inc. Signature Motor terminated by Maserati North
Within 20 days of your rental car
Club, Inc. or Signature Motor Club of America, Inc. for cause.
transaction, the original pre-printed
California, Inc. to be excessive may, at • PRE OWNED VEHICLES: Your rental car receipt, which must include
our discretion, result in cancellation of membership begins on the date the your name, address, telephone
the membership. registered vehicle was sold (in service number, VIN, rental dates and the
date) and continues until the corresponding warranty repair order
Emergency road service providers are expiration date of the Maserati
independent contractors and are not should be submitted to:
Certified Pre-Owned Limited
employees, agents or representatives Warranty or unless terminated by Maserati Roadside Assistance ATTN:
of Maserati North America, Inc. Maserati North America, Inc for Maserati Rental Car Claims Dept.
Signature Motor Club, Inc. or cause. P.O. Box 8140
Signature Motor Club of California, Ft. Washington, PA 19034
Inc.
Under this Agreement
• You will not be required to pay any
sum for services up to the mileage
limit on towing.
• Your registered Maserati vehicle is
the vehicle covered. The Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) that
appears on the vehicle represents
your identification number with
Signature Motor Club, Inc. or
Signature Motor Club of California,
Inc.

17
 Introduction

Vehicle Identification Data The VIN Number is also visible from Labels
the outside through the windshield on
1 the front left corner of the dashboard.
Overview label with cautions and
Vehicle Identification Number warning notes
The vehicle's identification number The centrally attached label placed
(VIN) is punched on the foot platform, inside the engine lid cover displays
in front of the passenger front seat. cautions, warnings, and symbols.
For further information refer to
“Symbols” in this section.

NOTE:
When ordering spare parts or making
inquiries, always note the vehicle
To read the number, lift the mat and identification number.
slide the guard.

18
 Introduction
Passenger Air bag Labels Vehicle Emission Control Information Tire and Loading Information Label
The labels are applied on the external Label This paper label is applied on the 1
side of passenger's sun visor and This label applied on the lower right driver's side rear door pillar.
behind it, on the dome. side of the engine compartment lid
shows the Vehicle Emission Control
Information (VECI).

NOTE:
Vehicle Homologation Label For further informations see “Tire
This label applied on the driver's side Safety Information” in section 5.
rear door pillar attests the compliance Paint Identification Label
with safety standards. This label is applied onto the trunk lid. Fuel Warning Label
The label is applied inside the fuel
filler door.

19
 Introduction

20
2 – Before Starting

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Sentry Key Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Illuminated Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Unlock Power Doors and Trunk Lid with Key fob . . . . . 32
Requiring and Setting Additional Key fobs . . . . . . . . . 33
Remote Start System (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Doors Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Passive Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Trunk Compartment Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Trunk Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Engine Lid Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Occupants Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air bags . . . . . 57
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
ParkSense Park Assist (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
ParkView Rear View Camera (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

21
 Before Starting

Keys Keyless Ignition Device

This vehicle is equipped with a Remote This device allows the driver to
Keyless Entry transmitter and a Keyless operate the ignition switch with the
Ignition Node, to enter, start and push of a button, as long as the
protect the vehicle. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
2 is inside the vehicle.

In case the ignition switch does not

change by pushing the button, the
RKE transmitter (key fob) may have a
low or discharged battery. If this occurs
it is necessary to replace the battery in
order to operate the ignition switch
(see “Requiring and Setting Additional
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has Key fobs” in this section).
three operating setups indicated on
the outer ring. Pressing and releasing
the middle button, you can switch
from one setup to the next without
starting the engine, the “switched on”
indication will turn amber.
The engine will start by pushing the
center button START/STOP with the
brake pedal pressed and the device set
in any of the three operating setups.

22
 Before Starting
It is still possible to operate the To remove the emergency key: Shift Ignition Device to OFF
ignition device using the key fob RKE • hold the mechanical latch on the Alert
transmitter with discharged battery by back of the key fob sideways; Opening the driver's door to exit the
pressing the nose side (side opposite
• simultaneously remove the vehicle when the ignition device is set
of the emergency key) of the key fob
emergency key by sliding laterally in ACC or RUN (engine not running), a
on the START/STOP button.
towards the end of the remote beep will remind you to cycle the 2
Key fob control. ignition to OFF.
The audio sound is followed by a
This vehicle is provided with two
dedicated message displayed on the
programmed key fobs.
instrument cluster.
The key fob contains a Remote Keyless
With the MTC System, the power
Entry (RKE) transmitter and an
window switches, radio, power
emergency key that is inserted in to
sunroof, and power outlets will
the remote.
remain active for up to 10 minutes
The emergency key allows you to
after the ignition switch is cycled to
open the vehicle by inserting into the
the OFF position. Opening either front
lock of the opening handle on the
door will cancel this feature, it is
driver's door, in case the battery of the
possible to set the timing of this
vehicle or the key fob go dead. NOTE: feature.
You can insert either side of the
emergency key into the lock cylinder. NOTE:
Refer to “MTC Settings” in Section 4
for further information.

You can keep the emergency when

using valet parking.

23
 Before Starting
• An unlocked car is an invitation to Sentry Key® Immobilizer
thieves. Always remove the key fob
WARNING! from vehicle, cycle the ignition System
• When leaving the vehicle, always switch to OFF and lock all doors The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System
remove the key fob and lock your when leaving the vehicle prevents unauthorized vehicle
2 vehicle. unattended. operation by disabling the engine. The
• Never leave children alone in a system does not need to be armed or
vehicle, or with access to an activated. Operation is automatic,
unlocked vehicle. regardless of whether the vehicle is
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle locked or unlocked.
unattended is dangerous for a The system uses a key fob with Remote
number of reasons. A child or others Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, an
could be seriously or fatally injured. ignition switch and a RF (Radio
Children should be warned not to Frequency) receiver to prevent
touch the parking brake switch, unauthorized vehicle operation.
brake pedal or the shift lever, Therefore, only key fobs expressly
causing the vehicle to roll away. programmed can be used to start and
• Do not leave the key fob in or near operate the vehicle.
the vehicle, and do not leave the After placing the ignition in the RUN
ignition switch in the ACC or RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light (see
mode. A child could operate power picture) will light up for a three
windows, other controls, or move seconds bulb check.
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals
inside parked vehicles in hot
weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.

24
 Before Starting
If the light remains on after the bulb General Information Duplication of key fobs may be
check, it indicates that there is a performed by an Authorized Maserati
This device complies with Part 15 of
problem with the electronics: this Dealer only.
the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry
condition will result in the engine This procedure consists of
Canada.
being shut off after two seconds. programming a key fob that has never
Operation is subject to the following
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on
conditions:
been programmed to the vehicle’s 2
during normal vehicle operation electronics.
(engine running for longer than 10 • This device may not cause harmful
interference. NOTE:
seconds), an electronic fault is
detected. Should this occur, contact • This device must accept any • When having the Sentry Key®
the Authorized Maserati Dealer as interference that may be received, Immobilizer System serviced, bring
soon as possible for assistance. including interference that may all key fobs provided with the
cause undesired operation. vehicle with you to the Maserati
Service Center.
CAUTION! Replacement Key fobs • When selling the vehicle, it is
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is necessary to provide the new owner
NOTE:
not compatible with some remote with all key fobs.
starting systems that can be installed Only key fobs that are updated with
in after-market. the vehicle electronics can be used to
start and operate the vehicle. Once a
Use of these systems may result in
key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
vehicle starting problems and loss of
cannot be programmed to any other
security protection.
vehicle.
All key fobs provided with the new
vehicle have been updated with the
vehicle electronics and are therefore
able to guarantee correct functioning WARNING!
and protection. • Always remove the key fobs from
the vehicle and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to cycle the
ignition switch to OFF.

25
 Before Starting

Vehicle Security Alarm Arming the System

Follow these steps to arm the vehicle
The vehicle security alarm monitors the
security alarm.
vehicle doors and trunk lid for
unauthorized entry and the • Make sure the vehicle ignition switch
2 START/STOP button for unauthorized is OFF.
operations. • Perform one of the following
The system also includes a dual methods to lock the vehicle:
function anti-intrusion sensor and
• Press the lock button on the
vehicle anti-lift sensor. The
interior power door lock switch
anti-intrusion sensor monitors the
vehicle interior for motion. The vehicle
Rearming the System located on the driver door trim
panel with the driver and/or
anti-lift sensor monitors the vehicle for If something triggers the security
passenger door open.
any lifting or tilting actions (tow away, alarm, and no quick action is taken to
tire removal, ferry transport, etc). A disarm it, the vehicle security alarm
siren with battery backup which senses will turn off the beeper after 29
interruptions of power and seconds, and turn off all of the visual
communications is also included. signals after 31 more seconds; the
While the vehicle security alarm is vehicle security alarm will then rearm
enabled, interior door locks switches, itself.
trunk lid and fuel filler door release
are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the vehicle security alarm will
provide the following audible and
visible signals: intermittent buzzer,
park lights and/or turn signals and the
vehicle security light on the dashboard
will flash.
This light will fast flash for
approximately 15 seconds, when the
vehicle security alarm is being armed,
and will then flash slowly until the
vehicle is disarmed.

26
 Before Starting
• Grasp the Passive Entry unlock door
handle (see “Passive Entry System” in
this section for further information).
• Press the START/STOP button so as
to release the OFF position.
NOTE:
2
When the vehicle security alarm is
armed, the interior power door lock
switch will not allow unlocking of the
• Press the button on the exterior • If any door is open, close it. doors.
Passive Entry door handle having a In any of these situations, if one or The vehicle security alarm is designed
valid key fob RKE transmitter in more windows are open, will remain to protect your vehicle; however, you
the same exterior zone (see open. To close the windows press can create conditions where the
“Passive Entry System” in this again the lock button and hold it system will give you a false alarm. If
section for further information). until their closure. one of the previously described
Each time the vehicle security alarm is arming sequences has occurred, the
armed, the anti-intrusion and anti-lift vehicle security alarm will arm
sensors actively monitor the vehicle. regardless of whether you are in the
When arming the security alarm, it is vehicle or not. If you remain in the
possible to disable these sensors by vehicle and open a door, the alarm
pressing the button on the remote will activate. If this occurs, disarm the
control three times within 5 seconds vehicle security alarm.
from the moment the system has been If the vehicle security alarm is armed
armed (meanwhile the security alarm and the battery becomes
telltale flashes rapidly). disconnected, the vehicle security
• Press the lock button on the key To disarm the System alarm will remain armed when the
fob RKE transmitter. battery is reconnected; the exterior
Use any of the following steps to lights will flash, the buzzer will
disarm the vehicle security alarm. activate. If this occurs, disarm the
• Press the button on key fob RKE vehicle security alarm.
transmitter.

27
 Before Starting

Using the Panic Alarm Tamper Alert Illuminated Entry/Exit

To turn the panic alarm feature on or If something has triggered the vehicle
Lights will turn on and off when you
off, press and hold the button on security alarm in your absence, the
enter/exit the vehicle and operate the
the key fob RKE transmitter for at least horn will sound three times when you
buttons on the key fob RKE
one second and release. When the disarm the vehicle security alarm.
2 transmitter and/or on the Passive Entry
panic alarm is on, the headlights will Check the vehicle for tampering.
system as follows:
turn on, the park lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the • If the lock command is enabled by
courtesy & dimmable lights will turn pressing the specific button on the
on. key fob RKE transmitter or by the
The panic alarm will remain activated Passive Entry system, the
for three minutes unless you turn it off “illuminated entry” mode will
by either: activate. Courtesy & dimmable
internal lighting, night front seats
• pressing the button a second lighting, and approach lighting will
time; stay on for 27 seconds.
• or drive the vehicle at a speed of
5 mph (8 km/h) or faster.
In both situations the panic alarm will
immediately turn off.

28
 Before Starting
• If the lock command of the car is
enabled by pressing the specific
button on the key fob RKE
transmitter or by the Passive Entry
system, when the key fob RKE
transmitter is moved out of range, 2
all the lights will turn off within 3
seconds, if they were previously on.

• If the trunk lid command is enabled

by the specific button on the key
fob RKE transmitter or, with vehicle
unlocked, pressing the trunk lid
external button in between the
license plate lights, the inner trunk
light will turn on and will stay on for
10 minutes before turning off. Light
will immediately turn off when
closing the lid.

29
 Before Starting

• If the button is pressed on the

key fob RKE transmitter, the
headlights, park lights and the
courtesy & dimmable lights will turn
on. Refer to “Using the Panic Alarm”
in this section for further
information.

30
 Before Starting

Vehicle Lighting with Vehicle Headlight Switch • If the headlight switch is in the “0”
Open/Closed Doors Function (OFF) mode all switch backlights and
the front seats lighting will turn off.
• If one or more doors are open, the Vehicle lighting can be operated from
central light, front/rear domelights the key fob RKE transmitter, the • If the headlight switch is in the
(main and spot light), the instrument Passive Entry system and from the position (Park mode) and the
panel, the MTC display and the night headlight switch on the left side of ignition switch is in OFF or ACC 2
front seats lighting and the ignition the dashboard (refer to “Lights” in position, only the front low intensity
switch backlight will turn on and section 3 for further information). LEDs of the external headlight will
remain lit for 27 seconds. turn on.
• If the doors are closed, all lights will • If the headlight switch is in
turn off (within 3 seconds) with the position (Park mode) and the
exception of the console display and ignition switch is in RUN position, no
the ignition switch backlight, which lighting feature will be available.
will turn off after 27 seconds. • If the headlight switch is in
position (Low beam mode) the
front domelight LED (if enabled), the
switch backlights, the instrument
panel’s display and the night front
seats lighting will turn on. The front
domelight LED and the night
lighting of the front seats will light
up with the intensity set by the
right-hand regulator. If the regulator
is to "0" (OFF) position, the night
lighting will turn off.
• If the headlight is switched to
“AUTO” position (on/off AUTO
mode) and the ignition is switched
to RUN position, as in “low beam
mode”, all lights turn on either in
“DAY” or “NIGHT” mode according
to the twilight sensor.

31
 Before Starting
In “DAY” mode the switch backlights Unlock Power Doors and Unlock the Doors and Fuel Filler
will be at 100% intensity, in “NIGHT” Door
mode they will be as set by the left Trunk Lid with Key fob
Press and release the unlock button
dimmer control switch. The RKE system allows you to lock or on the key fob RKE transmitter once
NOTE: unlock the doors and the fuel filler to unlock the driver's door or twice
2 door, open the trunk, turn the within five seconds to unlock all doors
In “DAY” mode, the switches are not
approach and courtesy lights on from and the fuel filler door. The turn signal
backlit, except the windows and
a distance up to approximately 33 ft lights will flash for the unlock signal
steering switches.
(10 m). The key fob RKE transmitter recognition. The illuminated entry/exit
does not need to be pointed at the system will also turn on. See “Passive
Light Dimmer Controls vehicle to activate the system. See Entry System” in this section for
The light dimmer controls are part of “Illuminated Entry/Exit” in this section further information.
the headlight switch and are for further information.
Unlock Driver Door/All Doors with
positioned beside the switcher itself
Remote Key 1st Press
(see “Lights” in section 3 for further
information). This feature allows you to program the
system to unlock either the driver's door
or all doors and the fuel filler door by
the first press of the unlock button
on the key fob RKE transmitter. To
change the current setting, see “MTC
Settings” in section 4.
Lock/Unlock Doors Flash Lights
NOTE: This feature will cause a flash of the
Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and turn signal lights when the doors are
above disables the system from locked or unlocked with the key fob
responding to all key fobs RKE RKE transmitter. This feature can be
transmitter buttons. turned on or off. To change the
current setting, see “MTC Settings” in
section 4.

32
 Before Starting
Turn Headlights On with Remote key Steering Lock (for Requiring and Setting
This feature activates the headlights versions/markets, where Additional Key fobs
for up to 90 seconds when the doors provided)
are unlocked with the key fob RKE Provide your Authorized Maserati
The vehicle can be equipped with an
transmitter. The duration can be set as Dealer the following when ordering
electric steering lock that is
desired. To change the current setting,
automatically activated when the
additional key fob RKE transmitters: 2
see “MTC Settings” in section 4. • all key fobs RKE transmitters in your
ignition device is switched to OFF. To
Locking Doors and Fuel Filler check activation, turn the steering possession;
Door wheel until it stops. • a personal ID;
When the ignition device is switched • the identification and registration
Press and release the lock button on to RUN, the steering lock documents proving ownership of the
the key fob RKE transmitter to lock all automatically deactivates vehicle.
doors and the fuel filler door. The turn
Setting new key fobs or re-setting the
signal lights will flash for signal
original ones can only be performed
recognition.
at an Authorized Maserati Dealer.
Refer to “Passive Entry System” in this
section for further information. NOTE:
Locking Doors Sound Alarm Codes of any key fob RKE transmitters
that are not present when the new
This feature will cause the alarm to setting procedure is done will be
activate when the doors are locked deleted from the memory to prevent
with the key fob RKE transmitter. This lost or stolen key fobs transmitters
feature can be enabled or disabled. To being used to disarm the electronic
change the current setting, see “MTC alarm system.
Settings” in section 4.

To Unlatch the Trunk

Press the button on the key fob
RKE transmitter two times within five
seconds to unlatch the trunk.
See “Passive Entry System” in this
section for further information.

33
 Before Starting

Key fob Battery Replacement • Separate the two lateral covers from • Separate both parts of the remote
the remote control case. control case.
NOTE:
A low charge level of the key fob
battery will be indicated on the
2 instrument cluster display.

The recommended replacement

battery type is: CR2032.
To replace the battery proceed as
follows:
• Remove the emergency key as
indicated in “Keys” chapter of the
• Remove the card with PCB (Printed
current section.
Circuit Board).
• Loosen the lateral screw that
connects the two side covers with a
small screwdriver.

34
 Before Starting
• Remove the battery from its seat and In addition, certain fluids contained in Radio Frequency RKE
replace with a new recommended vehicles and certain products of Transmitter - General
type of battery. component wear contain or emit Information
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, and birth This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry
defects or other reproductive harm.
Canada.
2
NOTE: The current device feature is subject to
following conditions:
Avoid touching the new battery with
your fingers. Skin oils may cause • This device may not cause harmful
battery deterioration. If you touch a interference.
battery, clean with alcohol. • This device must accept any
interference received, including
• Match the + sign on the battery to interference that may cause
the + sign on the inside of the undesired operation.
battery clip, located on the back If your key fob RKE transmitter fails to
ENVIRONMENTAL!
cover. operate from a normal distance, check
Batteries contain dangerous materials for these two conditions:
• Replace the printed circuit board by
that could harm the environment.
using the indicated pin for the • A weak battery in the key fob RKE
Please dispose of them according to
sealing of the two covers. transmitter. The expected life of the
local regulations or at the Authorized
Maserati Dealer. • Assemble the key fob case and battery in normal use is a minimum
reassemble the two lateral covers: a of three years.
click will indicate successful sealing. • Closeness to a radio transmitter such
• Combine the disassembled parts as a radio station tower, airport
WARNING! with clamping screw and reassemble transmitter, and some mobile or CB
CALIFORNIA proposition 65. the emergency key. radios.
Engine exhaust, some of its
constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain or emit chemicals
known to the state of California to
cause cancer, and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.

35
 Before Starting

Remote Start System • A weak battery in the RKE Exhaust gas contains Carbon
transmitter. The expected life of the Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
(optional) battery is a minimum of three years. colorless.
This system enables the key fob RKE • Closeness to a radio transmitter such • Keep key fobs RKE transmitter away
transmitter to start the engine as a radio station tower, airport from children. Operation of the
2 conveniently from outside the vehicle transmitter, and some mobile or CB Remote Start System, windows, door
while still maintaining security. The radio. locks or other controls could cause
system has a range of approximately • Obstructions between the vehicle serious injury or death.
300 ft (91 m). Obstructions between and the Key Fob.
the vehicle and the key fob may Engine Remote Start Abort
reduce this range. How to use Remote Start
Message on Instrument Cluster
General Information All of the following conditions must be
The following messages will display on
This device complies with Part 15 of met before the engine will remote
the instrument cluster if the vehicle
the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry start:
fails to remote start or exits remote
Canada. Operation is subject to the • System not disabled from previous start prematurely:
following conditions: remote start event.
• “Remote Start Cancelled Door
• This device may not cause harmful • Vehicle Security alarm not active. Open”.
interference. • Doors closed. • “Remote Start Cancelled Hood
• This device must accept any • Engine lid closed. Open”.
interference received, including • Trunk lid closed. • “Remote Start Cancelled Trunk
interference that may cause
• Hazard lights switch off. Open”.
undesired operation.
• Brake pedal not pressed by any • “Remote Start Cancelled Fuel Low”.
NOTE: passenger remaining in the vehicle. • “Remote Start Cancelled Time
Changes or modifications not expressly • Battery at an acceptable charge level. Expired”.
approved by the party responsible for • “Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle
compliance could void the user's to Reset”.
authority to operate the equipment. WARNING! The message on the instrument cluster
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate • Do not start or run an engine in a stays active as long as the ignition
from a normal distance, check for closed garage or confined area. switch is in RUN position.
these conditions:

36
 Before Starting

To enter Remote Start Mode • The park lamps will turn on and To exit Remote Start Mode and
remain lit during “Remote Start” Drive the Vehicle
NOTE: mode.
On the remote control of vehicles with Before the end of 15 minute cycle,
• For security reasons, power window press and release the button on the
this feature, the button is and power sunroof operation (if
replaced by the remote start button key fob RKE transmitter to unlock the
equipped) are disabled when the doors and disarm the vehicle security 2
. vehicle is in the “Remote Start” alarm. Then, prior to the end of the 15
mode. minute cycle, press and release the
Press and release the button on the
• The engine can be started two START/STOP button.
key fob RKE transmitter twice within
consecutive times (two 15-minute
five seconds. The vehicle doors will NOTE:
cycles) with the key fob RKE
lock, parking lights will flash and the
transmitter. However, the ignition The message “Push Start Button” will
horn will ring twice (if set). Then, the
must be cycled to the RUN position display in the instrument cluster until
engine will start and the vehicle will
before you can repeat the start you push the START/STOP button.
remain in the “Remote Start” mode
sequence for a third cycle.
for a 15-minute cycle.
Auto-On Comfort with Remote
To exit Remote Start Mode Start
without Driving the Vehicle The driver's heated and ventilated
Press and release the button one seat and the heated steering wheel (if
time or allow the engine to run for equipped) can be programmed to
the entire 15 minute cycle. come on during a remote start. Refer
to “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
NOTE:
function in chapter “MTC Setting”,
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the section 4, for further information.
system will disable the one time press
of the button for two seconds after
NOTE: receiving a valid “Remote Start”
• In case of an engine fault or low fuel request.
level, the vehicle will start and then
shut down in 10 seconds.

37
 Before Starting

Doors Locking Doors Manual Lock Therefore, make sure the key fob RKE
transmitter is not inside the vehicle
To lock each door, push the door lock
before closing the door.
knob on each door trim panel
WARNING! downward. Power Doors Locking/
2 • For personal security and safety in Unlocking
the event of an accident, or robbery A power door lock switch and a
lock the vehicle doors before you power door unlock switch are
drive as well as when parking and positioned on the front door trim
leaving the vehicle unattended. panel. Use this switches to lock or
• When leaving the vehicle, always unlock the doors.
remove the key fob RKE transmitter
and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a
vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake trigger,
brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, and do not leave
ignition switch in the ACC or RUN
mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or start the To unlock the rear doors, pull the door
engine and the vehicle. lock knob on the door trim panel
upward.
If the door lock knob is down when
you shut the door, the door will lock.

38
 Before Starting
If the vehicle has been locked from Automatic Door Unlock on Exit Child-Protection Door Lock
inside with the above figured The doors will unlock automatically on System — Rear Doors
switches, the fuel filler flap remains vehicles with power door locks if:
unlocked. To provide a safer environment for
The doors can also be locked and • The automatic unlock doors on exit small children sitting in the rear seats,
feature is enabled. the rear doors are equipped with a
unlocked with the Passive Entry
child-protection door lock system.
2
system. For further information, see • The transmission is in gear and the
“Passive Entry System” in this section. vehicle speed is 0 mph (km/h). Engage or Disengage the
If you press the power door lock • The transmission is in N (Neutral) or Child-Protection Door Lock
switch while the ignition switch is in P (Park). • Open the rear door.
the ACC or RUN position, and any • The driver door is open. • Insert the tip of the emergency key
front door is open, the power locks • The doors were not previously into the lock and rotate to the lock
will not operate. This prevents you unlocked. or unlock position.
from accidentally locking the key fob
• The vehicle speed is 0 mph (km/h). • Repeat the first two steps on the
RKE transmitter in the vehicle.
Set Automatic Door Unlock on Exit opposite rear door.
Cycling the ignition to the OFF
position or closing the door will allow To change the current setting, see
the locks of the doors and fuel filler “MTC Settings” in section 4.
door to operate. If a door is open with
the key fob RKE transmitter inside the NOTE:
cabin and the ignition is in the ACC or Use the automatic unlock doors on
RUN position, a beep will draw the exit feature in accordance with local
driver’s attention. regulations.
Automatic Locking Doors
The auto door lock feature default
condition is disabled. When enabled,
the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock
feature can be enabled or disabled by
an Authorized Maserati Dealer only
which can also service the vehicle.

39
 Before Starting

Passive Entry System

WARNING! The Passive Entry system is an
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote
a collision. Remember that the rear Keyless Entry (RKE) system. This
2 doors can only be opened from the feature allows you to lock and unlock
outside when the child-protection the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
locks are engaged (locked). press the key fob RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
NOTE:
For emergency exit from the rear seats
• Passive Entry may be programmed to
when the child-protection door lock
on/off; see “MTC Settings” in section
system is engaged, manually raise the
4 for further information.
door lock knob to the unlocked
position, roll down the window, and • If wearing gloves, or if it has been
open the door using the outside door raining on the Passive Entry door
handle. handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower
response time.

Unlock Door from the Driver

Side NOTE:
With a valid key fob RKE transmitter If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's door programmed all doors will unlock
handle, grip the driver’s door outside when you grip the front driver’s door
handle to unlock the door handle. To select between “Unlock
automatically. The interior door panel Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
lock knob will rise when the door is Doors 1st Press”, see “MTC Settings” in
unlocked. section 4.

40
 Before Starting

Unlock Door from the Preventing Inadvertent Locking NOTE:

Passenger Side of the Key fob RKE Transmitter The vehicle unlocks the doors under
With a valid key fob RKE transmitter inside the Vehicle any of the following conditions:
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger To minimize the possibility of • the doors are manually locked using
door handle, grip the front passenger unintentionally locking a key fob RKE the door lock knob positioned on
outside door handle to unlock all four transmitter inside your vehicle, the the door panel; 2
doors automatically. Passive Entry system is equipped with
The interior door panel lock knob will an automatic door unlock feature
rise when the door is unlocked. which will function if the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and
the door panel switch is used to
lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the system checks
the inside and outside of the vehicle
for any valid key fobs RKE transmitter.
If one of the vehicle's key fobs RKE
• there is a valid key fob RKE
transmitter is detected inside the
transmitter inside the vehicle;
vehicle, and no other valid key fobs
RKE transmitter are detected outside • there is a not valid key fob RKE
NOTE: transmitter outside the vehicle.
the vehicle, the Passive Entry system
All doors will unlock when you grip automatically unlocks all vehicle doors
the front passenger door handle and chirps the horn three times (on NOTE:
regardless of the driver’s door unlock the third attempt ALL doors will lock The vehicle will not unlock the doors
preference setting (“Unlock Driver and the key fob RKE transmitter will under any of the following conditions:
Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors be locked in the vehicle). • the doors are locked using the key
1st Press”).
fob RKE transmitter;
• the doors are locked using the
button on the Passive Entry front
door handles;
(Continued)

41
 Before Starting
NOTE:
• After pressing the outside door
handle button, you must wait two
seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors using this door
2 handle. By pulling the outside door
handle, you can check if the car
remains locked, without Passive Entry
system reacting and unlocking the
doors.
(Continued) • The Passive Entry system will not
• there is a valid key fob RKE operate if the key fob RKE
transmitter outside the vehicle and transmitter battery is dead.
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry front door handle;
• three attempts are made to lock the
doors using the door panel switch
and then close the doors.

Manual Door Lock from

Outside
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs RKE
transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver or passenger front door handles,
press the outside door handle button The vehicle doors can also be locked by
to lock all four doors. using the key fob RKE transmitter lock
button or the lock button located
on the vehicle’s inner door panel.

42
 Before Starting

Power Windows NOTE: activated, posing a risk to passengers

• The power window switches will remaining onboard.
The window controls on the driver's remain active for up to 10 minutes
door panel governs all the door after the ignition switch is cycled to Auto-Down Feature
windows. the OFF position. Opening either The driver door power window switch
front door will cancel this feature. has an auto-down feature. Some
2
The time lapse can be set. See “MTC models feature a passenger
Settings” in section 4 for further auto-down feature as well.
information. Press the window switch to the second
• Frequent activations of the power detent, release, and the window will
windows could result in a temporary go completely down automatically.
lock of their starters. In this case, To open the window part way, press
wait a moment before a new the window switch to the first detent
activation. and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the
way down during the auto-down
WARNING! operation, pull up on the switch
Improper use of the power windows briefly.
and the sunroof can be dangerous,
even with the anti-pinch prevention Auto-Up Feature with
system. Before and during activation Anti-Pinch Protection
of the power window, always check
Lift the window switch to the second
that the passengers are not exposed
detent, release, and the window will
to the risk of injury both by the
go all the way up automatically.
moving window and by personal
To stop the window from going all the
There are single window controls on objects that could be dragged or hit
way up during the auto-up operation,
each passenger door trim panel, which by it. Do not leave unattended
push down on the switch briefly.
operate the corresponding window. children in a vehicle with a key fob
To close the window part way, lift the
The window controls will operate only RKE transmitter inside. When getting
window switch to the first detent and
when the ignition switch is in the ACC out the vehicle, always remove the
release it when you want the window
or RUN position. key fob RKE transmitter to prevent
to stop.
the windows being accidentally
43
 Before Starting
NOTE: Reset Auto-Up/Down NOTE:
• If the window runs into an obstacle Should the auto-up/down feature stop If the sunroof was open, it will close
during auto-closure, it will reverse working, the window probably needs completely when performing the
direction and then go back down. to be reset. above indicated “Closing” procedure.
Remove the obstacle and use the To reset auto-up/down, pull the However, if it was closed, when
2 window switch again to close the window switch up to close the window performing the “Opening” procedure
window. completely and push the window it will still remain closed (refer to
• Any impact due to rough road switch down to open the window “Power Sunroof with Sunshade” in
conditions may trigger the auto completely. Section 3 for further information).
reverse function unexpectedly during
auto-closure. If this happens, pull the Open and Close the Windows
switch lightly to the first detent and with RKE Transmitter and
hold to close the window manually. Ignition Off
• Frequent activations of the When the ignition switch in is OFF
anti-pinch function could disable the position, windows can be opened or
auto-down and auto-up function of closed by pressing the buttons on the
the windows. In order to re-activate RKE transmitter.
this function proceed with a reset
Opening:
cycle as described in the next
paragraph. • press the button and release it;
• press a second time the button
and keep it pressed until complete
opening of the window.
WARNING!
Closing:
There is no anti-pinch protection when
the window is almost closed. Be sure • press the button and release it;
to clear all objects from the area • press a second time the button
before closing the window. and keep it pressed until complete
closure of the window.

44
 Before Starting

Rear Window and Sunshade Wind Buffeting Rear Window

Lockout Button Wind buffeting can be described as
The window lockout button on the the perception of pressure or a Rear Window Defroster
driver's door trim panel allows to helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle The rear window defroster button is
disable the window control on the may exhibit wind buffeting with the located on the climate control panel.
rear passenger doors and the rear windows down, or the sunroof in See “Air Conditioning Controls” in
2
window sunshade control at the rear open or partially open positions. This section 4.
of the central console, by pressing the is a normal occurrence and can be
window lockout button (setting it in minimized. If the buffeting occurs Power Sunshade (optional)
the down position). with the rear windows open, open the Your vehicle can be equipped on
front and rear windows together to request with a power sunshade that
minimize the buffeting. If the will reduce the amount of sunlight
buffeting occurs with the sunroof that will enter through the rear
open, then adjust the sunroof opening window.
to minimize the buffeting. The sunshade is rolled in and stored
inside the cover behind the rear seats;
when activated, it rolls out upwards.
The power sunshade can be operated
using the MTC System.
• Press the “Controls” soft-key.
To enable the controls previously
described, press the window lockout
button again (setting it in the up
position).

45
 Before Starting
• Within 15 seconds, press the “Rear Trunk Compartment
Sunshade” soft-key to raise the
power sunshade. Operation
• Within 15 seconds, press the “Rear The trunk lid can be released from
Sunshade” soft-key a second time to inside the vehicle by pressing the
2 lower the sunshade. release button on the door trim panel.
NOTE:
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before the button can operate.
• Press the button to raise the
sunshade.
• Press the button a second time to
lower the sunshade.

If the sunshade is in the raised position

and the gear lever is positioned in R
(Reverse), the sunshade will
automatically fully lower.
When the gear lever is shifted out of R
(Reverse) the sunshade will The trunk lid can be released from
automatically return to the fully raised outside the vehicle by pressing the
position after approximately five button on the key fob with RKE
seconds. transmitter twice within five seconds
On versions equipped with heated rear or by using the external release button
seats is available the trigger button of located on the lower side of the trunk
the rear sunshade, positioned at the ledge, between the license plate lights,
rear of the central console, which can when the vehicle has been unlocked
be operated by the rear passengers. using the key fob or the Passive Entry
system.

46
 Before Starting
With the ignition device in the OFF
position, the trunk open symbol and
message will display until closure.
See “Passive Entry System” in this
section for more information on trunk
operation with the Passive Entry 2
feature.

Trunk Lid Emergency Release

If accessing the trunk from the rear
With the ignition switch in RUN seats, operate the emergency release
position, the red symbol will lever (see the chapter "Trunk Safety"
display on the instrument panel with in this section) in order to lower the
the message indicating that the trunk rear seat backrest (see "Cargo Area"
is open. Once the trunk is closed both in section 3). If the power release
symbol and message will disappear control operated by pressing the
from the display. button on the door trim panel fails,
which may occur when the battery is
low on voltage, it is possible to
temporarily power the system by using
the battery remote poles located
To close the trunk lid use the handle as inside the engine compartment (see
indicated beside the closing device. “Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure” in
section 6). Thus it is possible to
normally open the trunk lid by using
the RKE remote control. Have the
vehicle checked by an Authorized
Maserati Dealer center in order to
solve the failure.

47
 Before Starting

Trunk Safety Engine Lid Operation

Opening
WARNING! Two latches must be released to open
Do not allow children to have access the lid.
2
to the trunk. Always close the trunk • From inside the vehicle, pull the
lid when your vehicle is unattended. engine lid release lever located
Once in the trunk, young children may under the left lower side of the
not be able to escape. If trapped in the dashboard.
trunk, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.

Trunk Lid Emergency Release

from inside the Trunk
As a security measure, an internal
trunk emergency release lever is built
into the trunk latching mechanism. In
the event of a person trapped inside
the trunk, the trunk lid can be simply
opened by pulling on the • Move to the outside and stand in
phosphorescent handle attached to front of the vehicle front grille.
the trunk latching mechanism.

48
 Before Starting
• Slightly lift the engine lid and push Closing Occupants Restraint
the safety catch as indicated by the
arrow. The safety catch is located in
Lower the engine lid, and then drop Systems
it. This should secure the inclusion of
the center of the lid. Occupants restraint systems are some
both latches.
of the most important safety features
in your vehicle: 2
CAUTION!
• Three-point seat belts (also called lap
To prevent possible damage, do not and shoulder belts) for the driver
slam the engine lid to close it. and all passengers.
• Advanced front air bags for driver
and passenger.
WARNING! • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
• Be sure the engine lid is fully latched Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and
before driving away. If the lid is not passengers seated next to a window.
• Lift the engine lid completely: this
fully latched, it could open when the • Supplemental driver side knee air
operation is facilitated by two gas
vehicle is in motion and block your bag.
struts keeping the fully open
vision. Failure to follow this warning • Supplemental seat-mounted side air
position.
could result in serious injury or bags.
With the ignition switch in RUN
death. • An energy-absorbing steering
position, the red symbol will
display on the instrument panel with • Gear shifting is always active and column and steering wheel.
the message indicating that the may be performed even when one • Front seat belts incorporate dual
engine lid is open. or more doors, the engine or the pretensioners that may enhance
trunk lids are open. Therefore, in occupant protection by managing
these conditions, take great care to the energy created during an
avoid moving the gearshift lever impact.
and so accidentally engage gears.
• All seat belt systems (except the
driver’s) include Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR), which lock the seat
belt webbing into position by
extending the belt all the way out
and then adjusting the belt to the

49
 Before Starting
desired length to restrain a child seat wounds or other injuries in an passenger seat must never sit on the
or secure a large item in a seat. accident. Additionally, in an accident, edge of the seat, leaning toward the
Please pay close attention to the the lower section of the belt could dashboard or otherwise sit out of
information in this section. It tells you press against the upper part of your position. The occupants’ back must be
how to use your restraint system stomach rather than the pelvic area, as upright as comfort allows, and
2 properly, to keep you and your causing serious internal injuries. must rest against the seatback with
passengers as safe as possible. the seat belt properly fastened. Feet
If you are carrying children too small NOTE: must be on the floor (i.e. not on the
for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts The advanced air bags have a multi dashboard, seat or out of the
or the Lower Anchors and Tether for stage inflator. This allows the air bag window).
CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be to have different stages of inflation Children that are not big enough to
used to hold infant and child restraint based on the severity and type of wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see
systems. For more information on collision. “Child Restraints System” in this
LATCH, refer to “Lower Anchors and
Here are some simple steps you can section) should be secured in the rear
Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” in this
take to minimize the risk of harm from seat in child restraints seats or
section.
a deploying air bag: belt-positioning booster seats. Older
children who do not use child
• Children 12 years old and under restraints seats or belt-positioning
WARNING! should always ride buckled up in a booster seats should ride properly
To help provide maximum protection, rear seat. buckled up in the rear seat. Never
you are advised to keep the seatback allow children to slide the shoulder
in the most upright position possible belt behind them or under their arm.
and the seat belt close to your chest WARNING! If children 1 to 12 years old (not in a
and pelvis. If the seat belt is loose, in Infants in rear facing child restraints rear facing child seat) must ride in the
the event of an accident you could should never ride in the front seat of a front passenger seat, move the seat as
move too far forward and could be vehicle with a passenger Advanced far back as possible and use the proper
injured. Travelling with the seatback Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment child restraint (Refer to “Child
too far reclined could also be can cause severe or fatal injury to Restraints System” in this section).
dangerous: even if the seat belts are infants in that position. You should read the instructions
fastened, they may not work correctly. Do not use child seats or child booster provided with your child restraint
In fact, the belt itself may not be close cushions/backrests in the front system to make sure that you are using
enough to your body and, if it is in passenger seat. Occupants in the front it properly.
front of you, it could cause neck
50
 Before Starting
• All occupants should always wear excellent driver, even on short trips. The driver is responsible for
their lap and shoulder belts Someone on the road may be a poor respecting, and ensuring that all the
properly. driver and cause an accident that other occupants of the car also
• The driver and front passenger seats includes you. This can happen far observe the local regulations
should be moved back as far as away from home or on your own concerning the use of seat belts.
possible to allow the Advanced street. Always fasten the seat belts before 2
Front Air Bags room to inflate. starting the vehicle.
Statistics report that seat belts save
• Do not lean against the door or Seat belts are designed to be used by
lives and reduce the seriousness of
window. Your vehicle has persons whose physical characteristics
injuries in an accident. Some of the
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable (age, height, weight) are provided for
worst injuries happen when people
Curtains (SABIC) and Supplemental by established legislation in each
are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), country. Anyone who does comply
belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and if deployment occurs, the SABIC with these provisions may not travel in
and the risk of injury caused by
and SAB air bags will inflate the front passenger seat. This also
striking the inside of the vehicle.
forcefully into the space between applies to children. Their heads are
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
you and the door. proportionally heavier and larger than
belted at all times.
those of adults, while their bones and
• If the air bag system in this vehicle
Three-Point Seat Belts muscles are relatively undeveloped. To
needs to be modified to
help protect them in case of a
accommodate a disabled person, All seating positions in your vehicle collision, they must use special
contact an Authorized Maserati are equipped with combination lap restraint or safety systems, even in the
Dealer. and shoulder belts. rear seat area.
The belt retractor is designed to lock
during very sudden stops or impacts.
WARNING! This feature allows the shoulder part
of the belt to move freely with you WARNING!
In an accident, all occupants can suffer
under normal conditions, conforming • It is forbidden and dangerous to ride
much greater injuries not properly
to the body of the occupants. in a cargo area. In an accident,
buckled up. You can strike the interior
However, in an accident, the belt will people riding in these areas are
of your vehicle or other occupants or
lock and reduce your risk of striking more likely to be seriously injured or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
the inside of the vehicle or being killed.
Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly. thrown out. (Continued)
Buckle up even though you are an

51
 Before Starting
(Continued) • Hold the latch plate and pull the belt • A belt that is latched into the wrong
• Do not allow any person to ride in across you, make the belt go around buckle will not protect you properly.
any area of your vehicle that is not your body and when the belt is long The lap portion of the belt could ride
equipped with seats and seat belts. enough to fit, insert the latch plate too high on your body, possibly
• Be sure all passengers are in a seat into the buckle until you hear a causing internal injuries. Always
2 and using a seat belt properly. “click.” latch your belt into the
• Wearing your belt improperly could corresponding buckle.
make your injuries in an accident • A belt that is too loose will not
much worse. You might suffer protect you properly. In a sudden
internal injuries, or you could even stop, you could move too far
slide out of part of the belt. Follow forward, increasing the possibility of
these instructions to wear your seat injury. Wear your seat belt
belt properly and to keep your comfortably.
passengers safe, too. • A belt that is worn under your arm is
• Two people should never be belted dangerous. Your body could strike
into a single seat belt. People belted the inside surfaces of the vehicle in
together can crash into one another an accident, increasing head and
in an accident, hurting one another neck injury. A belt worn under the
severely. Never use a lap/shoulder WARNING! arm can also cause internal injuries.
belt for more than one person. • The seat belts height must be
• The lower part must adhere to the
• Remember that, in the event of an adjusted only with the vehicle
pelvis rather than the abdomen of
accident, the rear seat passengers stationary.
the occupant. To fasten the lap belt
not wearing the seat belts are not • Do not bring sharp edges in contact pull slightly up the diagonal portion
only subject to personal injuries but with a seat belt. This could reduce of the shoulder belt. To loosen the
also represent a serious danger for their initial strength and cause them lap belt if too tight, tilt the latch
the front seat occupants. to tear in the event of a crash. plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
Three-Point Seat Belts Use Instructions • If a seat belt has been brought in belt reduces the risk of sliding under
contact with a sharp edge, or has the belt in an accident.
• Enter the vehicle and close the door. been used to pin something to it,
Sit back and adjust the seat. have it immediately replaced by our
• The seat belt latch plate is above Authorized Maserati Dealer.
your seat on the external side.
52
 Before Starting
position. If necessary, guide the seat Adjust the guide so the shoulder
belt with your hand while it is portion of the belt is on the shoulder
WARNING! rewinding, to prevent it from and not falling off of it. The belt
• A lap belt worn too high can twisting. should be close to, but not contacting,
increase the risk of internal injury in the neck. Push the indicated button
an accident. The belt forces won't above the shoulder belt guide to 2
impact on the strong hip and pelvic release the anchorage, then move the
WARNING!
bones, but across your abdomen. belt slider up or down to the position
A frayed or torn belt could break in an
Always wear the lap belt as low as that fits you best.
accident and leave you with no
possible and keep it comfortable.
protection. Inspect the belt system
• A twisted belt will not protect you periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
properly. In a collision, it could even or loose parts. Damaged parts must WARNING!
cut into you. Be sure the belt is be replaced immediately. After the adjustment, always check
straight. If you can't straighten a Do not disassemble or modify the that the slider to which the oscillating
belt in your vehicle, take it to a system. Seat belt/retractor assemblies ring is fixed, is locked into one of the
Maserati Service Center must be replaced by the Authorized positions provided. With the handgrip
immediately. Maserati Dealer after an accident if released, push again downward to
• Do not use devices (clips, fastenings they have been damaged (bent allow the anchoring device to click
etc.) that prevent the seat belts from retractor, torn belt, etc.). into place, in the event that it has not
laying close to the occupants bodies. been released in one of the positions
• Do not carry children on a Three-Point Seat Belt Height provided.
Adjustment
passenger’s lap using only one seat
belt for protecting both.

• Position the shoulder belt on your WARNING!

chest so that it is comfortable and The seat belts height must only be
not resting on your neck. The adjusted when the vehicle is
retractor will withdraw any slack in stationary.
the belt.
• To release the belt, push the red The vehicle has a shoulder belt height
button on the buckle. The belt will adjuster for the driver and right front
automatically retract to its stowed passenger seating positions.

53
 Before Starting
When you release the anchorage try to If the passenger belt with ALR is used against the structures of the
move the belt slider up and down to for normal usage: only pull the belt passenger compartment or out of
make sure that it is locked in position. out far enough to comfortably wrap the vehicle.
around the occupant so as to not • The air bags are designed to work
Three-Point Seat Belt activate the ALR. If the ALR is together with the seat belts, not to
2 Untwisting Procedure activated, you will hear a ratcheting substitute them. The front air bags
Use the following procedure to sound as the belt retracts. In this case, only deploy in the event of certain
untwist a twisted three point belt. allow the belt to retract completely head-on collisions of sufficient
and then carefully pull out only the intensity. They may not be activated
• Position the latch plate as close as
amount of belt necessary to if the vehicle rolls over, or in the
possible to the anchor point.
comfortably wrap around the seat event of rear bumps or minor frontal
• At about 0.5 to 1 ft (15 to 30 cm) occupant. collisions, or non-frontal collisions.
above the latch plate, grasp and Slide the latch plate into the buckle
twist the belt 180 degrees to create a until you hear a "click". Seat belt for rear center seat
fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate. The rear central seat belt has two
buckles and two metal latch plates; in
• Slide the latch plate upward over the WARNING! this way it is possible to release it from
folded belt. The folded belt must
• Remember that, in the event of a the seat and fold down the long part
enter the slot at the top of the latch
violent impact, the passengers on (60) of the seatback (refer to “Cargo
plate.
the rear seats that are not wearing Area” in section 3 for further
• Continue to slide the latch plate up the seat belts are not only subject to information). To buckle the seat belt
until it clears the folded belt. personal injury but they also proceed as follows:
Passengers Seat Belts represent a danger for passengers
• Take place in the central seat and
sitting in the front seats.
All passengers seat belts are equipped pull out the belt from the upper
• Always fasten the seat belts. retractor in a normal manner,
with Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) and can be used to secure a child • Travelling without the seat belts without twisting it.
restraint system. For additional fastened significantly increases the • Insert the first latch plate located at
information, see “Installing Child risk of serious injury in the event of the end of the shoulder portion of
Restraint Systems using the Vehicle a collision, even with the air bags. the belt inside the left buckle (this is
Seat Belt equipped with ALR” under • In the event of a collision, the seat the one without the red unlatch
“Child Restraint Systems” in this belts help reduce the possibility of button on the top of the slot).
section. the vehicle’s occupants being thrown

54
 Before Starting
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt the occupants bodies before the
retracts, you will hear a clicking restraining action begins.
sound. This indicates the safety belt This car is also equipped with a second
is now in the automatic locking pretensioner in the kick plate area. Its
mode. activation is signalled by the
Automatic Locking Mode Unsetting shortening of the metal cable and 2
curling of its protective sheath.
Unbuckle the three point seat belt and
allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking
mode and activate the vehicle
• Insert the latch plate located at the emergency locking mode.
end of the lap portion of the belt
inside the right buckle.
To unlatch the seat belt, release the
right plate of the lap portion by WARNING!
clicking on the red button. • The belt and retractor assembly
must be checked by the Authorized
Using Seat Belt in Automatic Maserati Dealer and must be
Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode replaced if the Automatic Locking Pretensioners work for all size
Retractor (ALR) feature or any other occupant restraint systems, including
Use the seat belt automatic locking the child restraint systems.
seat belt function is not working
mode anytime a child safety seat is
properly. NOTE:
installed in a seating position that has
a belt with this feature. • Failure to replace the belt and To obtain the highest degree of
Children under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, retractor assembly could increase protection from the action of the
should be properly buckled up in a the risk of injury in collisions. pretensioning device, wear the seat
child restraint system. belt tight to the chest and pelvis.
Automatic Locking Mode Setting Seat Belt Pretensioners
Pretensioners are triggered by the
• Buckle the lap and shoulder belt. The car is equipped with front seat Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). A
• Grasp the shoulder portion and pull belt pretensioners, that reduce slack in pretensioner may be used only once.
downward until the entire belt is the belts in the event of a severe Pretensioners do not require any
extracted. frontal impact. This guarantees the maintenance or lubrication: any
perfect adherence of the seat belts to changes to its original conditions will

55
 Before Starting
invalidate its efficiency. If, due to Enhanced Seat Belt Use and message remains illuminated
unusual natural events (floods, sea Reminder System (BeltAlert®) until the respective seat belts are
storms, etc.), the device has been fastened.
affected by water and mud, it must be BeltAlert® is a feature intended to If the opened front door on the driver
replaced. remind the driver and front passenger or passenger side is closed and the
to fasten their seat belts. The feature
2 activates whenever the ignition is on.
occupant presence sensor (if foreseen)
detects a status change from occupant
If the driver or front seat passenger is not present to occupant present the
WARNING! unbelted, the seat belt reminder light
It is strictly forbidden to remove or system will repeat the warning
and message will turn on and sequence.
tamper with the pretensioner remain on until both front seat belts
components. Any service intervention The driver should instruct all other
are fastened. occupants to fasten their seat belts.
must be carried out only by qualified
and authorized personnel. Always If a front seat belt is unbuckled while
contact an Authorized Maserati traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
Dealer. (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both
audio and visual notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is
not active when the front passenger
CAUTION! seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may be
Operations which lead to impacts, triggered when a pet or heavy object
vibrations or localized heating (over is placed on the front passenger seat.
212°F/100°C for a maximum of 6 hours It is recommended to restrain pets in
max.) in the area around the the rear seat, in pet harnesses or pet
pretensioners may damage or deploy The BeltAlert® warning sequence
begins after the vehicle speed is over carriers that are secured by seat belts,
them erroneously. These devices are and properly stow cargo.
not affected by vibrations caused by 5 mph (8 km/h) for more than 19
uneven road surfaces or low obstacles. seconds, by blinking the seat belt
Contact the Authorized Maserati reminder light and message and by
Dealer for any intervention that may sounding an intermittent chime.
be required. Once the sequence starts, it will
continue for the entire duration or
until the respective seat belts are
fastened. After the sequence
completes, the seat belt reminder light
56
 Before Starting

Seat Belts and Pregnant Supplemental Restraint

Women System (SRS) — Air bags
WARNING!
Seat belts should be worn by pregnant Pregnant women should observe the
women: the risk of injury in the event This vehicle has advanced front air
above indications, as well as local
of an accident is greatly reduced for bags for both the driver and front
regulation concerning the use of seat 2
them and the unborn child if they are passenger as a supplement to the seat
belts. In addition, pregnant women
wearing a seat belt. The best way to belt restraint systems.
should consult a doctor with regards
protect the fetus is to protect the The driver's advanced front air bag is
to the vehicle operation and seat belt
mother. mounted in the center of the steering
usage.
Pregnant women must position the wheel in the area shown in the
lower part of the belt below the belly picture. On this area is embossed the
so that it passes over the pelvis and word “SRS AIRBAG” for easier
under the abdomen (see figure). recognition.
The passenger's advanced front air
bag is mounted in the dashboard,
above the glove compartment in the
area shown in the picture. On this
area is embossed the word “AIRBAG”
for easier recognition.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped
with a supplemental driver side knee
air bag mounted in the dashboard
below the steering column.
NOTE:
When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the baby will not be These air bags are designed to the
hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, advanced air bag regulatory
as for anyone, the key to making requirements.
safety belts effective is wearing them
properly.

57
 Before Starting
side windows and their covers are also • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
labeled “AIR bag”. Curtains (SABIC);
This vehicle is also equipped with • Front and side impact sensors;
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air • Front seat belt pretensioners;
Bags (SAB) for driver and passenger
• Seat belt buckle switch and seat track
2 pelvis-chest-shoulder protection during
position sensors;
a side impact. The Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are • Pyrotechnical charge to cut power
mounted on front seats and are from the battery; it is located on the
located in the outboard side of the positive battery terminal.

The advanced front air bags have a front seats.

multistage inflator design. This allows NOTE:
the air bag to have different rates of WARNING!
After any accident, the vehicle should The air bag is not a substitute for the
inflation based on the severity and
be taken to the Authorized Maserati seat belts. Correct use of the seat
type of collision.
Dealer immediately. belts, in combination with the air bag,
This vehicle is equipped with driver
and front passenger seat track position will offer protection for the driver and
sensors that may adjust the inflation Air Bag System Components passenger in the front seat in the
level of the advanced front air bags Your vehicle may be equipped with the event of a head-on collision.
based upon seat position. following air bag system components:
This vehicle is also equipped with a Advanced Front Air Bags
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC);
front passenger seat belt buckle sensor Properties
that detects whether the front • Air bag warning light on the
instrument cluster; The advanced front air bag system has
passenger seat belt is fastened. The
• Steering wheel and column; multistage driver and front passenger
seat belt buckle sensor may adjust the
air bags. This system provides air bag
inflation rate of the advanced front air • Instrument cluster;
inflation rates which are appropriate
bag. • Driver advanced front air bag; to the severity and type of collision as
This vehicle is equipped with • Passenger advanced front air bag; determined by the Occupant Restraint
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
• Supplemental driver side knee air Controller (ORC), which may receive
Curtains (SABIC) to protect the heads
bag; information from the front impact
of front and rear outer occupants. The
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air sensors.
SABIC air bags are located above the
Bags (SAB);

58
 Before Starting
The first stage inflator is triggered with correct inflation of the • EXTREME HAZARD! Do not place a
immediately during an impact that passenger air bag and also cause rearward-facing infant seat onto the
requires air bag deployment. This serious injury to the occupants. front seat in front of a not
inflation rate is used in less severe • Do not place anything on or around deactivated air bag (see warning
collisions. A higher energy output, the air bag covers or attempt to plate on the dashboard and above
inflation rate, is used for more severe open them manually. You may and behind the sun visors). 2
collisions. damage the air bags and you could Deployment of the air bag in an
be injured because the air bags may accident could cause fatal injuries to
no longer be functional. The the baby regardless of the severity
CAUTION! of the collision.
protective covers for the air bag are
• The electronic control unit provides designed to open only when the air
for the activation of the bags are inflating.
pretensioners, front air bags or side • Always drive with your hands on
air bags (front and rear) based on the steering wheel rim, so that the
different criteria, according to the air bag can inflate freely if required.
type of impact. Failure of one or During the drive your back must be
more systems to activate is not as upright as comfort allows and be
indicative of a system malfunction. against the seat back with the seat
• The front and/or lateral air bags may belt properly fastened.
inflate if the vehicle suffers a violent
• Do not apply stickers or other
impact involving the underbody
objects on the steering wheel, on
area, for example in case of violent
the dashboard in the passenger’s
impacts against steps, sidewalks,
side air bag area, on roof side trims
speed bumps, or when the vehicle
or on the seats.
falls into potholes, or similar.
• Do not travel with objects in your
lap, in front of your chest or
especially with a pipe, pencil or
WARNING! other objects in your mouth. In the
• Never place objects (e.g. mobile event of a collision, the intervention
phones, toys, folders, tablets, ecc..) of the air bag could result in serious
on the passenger side of the injury.
dashboard since they could interfere
59
 Before Starting

Supplemental Air bags Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable • Do not add roof racks that require
Curtain (SABIC) permanent attachments (bolts or
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bags (SAB) SABIC air bags are designed to protect screws) for installation on the
the head of front and rear occupants vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air roof of the vehicle for any reason.
in the event of a side impact, thanks to
Bags (SAB) protect the pelvis, chest
2 and shoulder area of the occupants in
the wide cushion inflation surface.
Each air bag features inflated Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air
the event of a side impact of bag
chambers placed adjacent to the head
medium/high severity. The SAB is
of each outboard occupant that The supplemental driver side knee air
marked with “AIRBAG” label sewn
reduce the potential for side-impact bag provides enhanced protection and
into the outboard side of the front
head injuries. The SABIC deploy works together with the driver
seats.
downward, covering both windows on advanced front air bag during a
the impact side. frontal impact.

Air Bag Deployment Sensors

and Controls
WARNING!
• Side air bags also need room to Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
inflate. Do not rest your head, arms The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC
or elbows on the door, windows or determines if deployment of the front
the area in which the window bag is and/or side air bags in a frontal or side
located to avoid possible injury collision is required. Based on the
during air bag inflation. Sit upright impact sensor's signals, a central
When the air bag deploys, it opens the in the center of the seat. electronic ORC deploys the advanced
seam between the front and side of front air bags, SABIC and SAB air bags,
• Do not cover the front seatbacks
the seat's trim cover. Each air bag and front seat belt pretensioners, as
with clothes or covers. Do not use
deploys independently; a left side required, depending on the severity
accessory seat covers or place
impact deploys the left air bag only and type of impact.
objects between you and the side air
and a right side impact deploys the Beyond what is previously described,
bags; the performance could be
right air bag only. the characteristics of the collision
adversely affected and/or objects
could cause serious injury. registered by the sensors and sent to
the control unit of the ORC can also
cause a sudden cut of the power from

60
 Before Starting
the battery, “blowing” the The side air bags will not deploy in all malfunction that could affect the air
pyrotechnical charge located on the side collisions. Side air bag bag system, it turns on the air bag
positive battery terminal. deployment will depend on the warning light and the “Service Airbag
severity and type of collision. Because System” message either momentarily
air bag sensors measure vehicle or continuously. The diagnostics also
CAUTION! deceleration over time, vehicle speed record the nature of the malfunction. 2
After a collision that has caused the and damage merely are not good A beep will sound if the light
blowing up of the pyrotechnical indicators of whether or not an air illuminates again after initial startup.
charge, this must be replaced at an bag should have deployed.
Authorized Maserati Dealer. Seat belts are necessary for your
Advanced front air bags and protection in all accidents, and also
supplemental driver side knee air bag are needed to help keep you in
are designed to provide additional position, away from an inflating air
protection by supplementing the seat bag. The ORC monitors the readiness
belts in certain frontal collisions of the electronic parts of the air bag
depending on the severity and type of system whenever the ignition switch is
collision. Advanced front air bags and in the RUN position. If the ignition
supplemental driver side knee air bag switch is in the OFF position, in the
are not expected to reduce the risk of ACC position, or not active, the air bag
system is not activated and the air The air bag warning light monitors
injury in rear, side, or rollover the internal circuits and
collisions. bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power interconnecting wiring associated with
The advanced front air bags will not air bag system electrical components.
deploy in all frontal collisions, supply system that may deploy the air
including those that may produce bags even if the battery has low
substantial vehicle damage, for power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment. When starting WARNING!
example, some pole collisions, truck
under rides, and corner impacts. On the vehicle, ORC turns on the air bag • If the ignition switch is in RUN
the other hand, depending on the warning light on the instrument position, the engine is off and the
type and location of impact, advanced cluster for approximately 4 to 8 vehicle is in complete stop, the air
front air bags may deploy in crashes seconds for a test. bags can be deployed in case of
with little vehicle front-end damage After the test, the air bag warning collision. For this reason, children
but that produce a severe initial light will turn off. If the ORC, during must never occupy the front seat in
deceleration. the diagnosis phase detects a (Continued)
61
 Before Starting
(Continued) the air bags inflate to their full size. The inflating SAB exits through the
a rearward facing seat even if the car The air bags then quickly deflate while seat seam into the space between the
is not moving. Deployment of the air helping to restrain the driver and front occupant and the door. The side air
bag following an impact could cause passenger. The advanced front air bag bag moves at a very high speed and
fatal injuries to the child. Please note gas is vented through the vent holes in with such a high force that it could
2 that when the ignition switch is in the sides of the air bag. In this way, injure you if you are not seated
the OFF or ACC position or is turned the air bags do not interfere with your properly, or if items are positioned in
off, the air bag will not deploy in control of the vehicle. the area where the side air bag
case of collision. Therefore, in these inflates. This especially applies to
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air
cases, lack of air bag deployment is children.
Bag Inflator Unit
not an indication of a system
The supplemental driver side knee air Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
malfunction.
bag unit is located in the dashboard Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units
• Ignoring the air bag warning light
trim beneath the steering column. During collisions where the impact is
and message in your instrument
When the ORC detects a collision confined to a particular area of the
cluster could mean you won't have
requiring the air bag, it signals the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
the air bags to protect you in a
inflator units. A large quantity of deploy the SABIC air bags, depending
collision. If the light does not come
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate on the severity and type of collision. In
on as a bulb check when the ignition
the supplemental driver side knee air these events, the ORC will deploy the
is first turned on, stays on after you
bag. The trim cover separates and SABIC only on the impact side of the
start the engine, or if it comes on as
folds out of the way allowing the air vehicle. A quantity of non-toxic gas is
you drive, have an Authorized
bag to inflate to the full size. generated to inflate the side curtain
Maserati Dealer service the air bag
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air air bag.
system immediately.
Bag (SAB) Inflator Units The inflating side curtain air bag
Front Air Bag Inflator Units pushes the head/s of the occupant/s
The ORC unit determines if a side
seating in the outside seats from the
When the ORC detects a collision collision requires the side air bags to
edge of the headliner out of the way
requiring the advanced front air bags, inflate, based on the severity and type
and covers the window. The air bag
it signals the inflator units. A large of collision. Based on the severity and
inflates with enough force to possibly
quantity of nontoxic gas is generated type of collision, the side air bag
injure you if you are not belted and
to inflate the advanced front air bags. inflator on the crash side of the vehicle
seated properly, or if items are
The steering wheel hub trim cover and may be triggered, releasing a quantity
positioned in the area where the side
the upper right side of the dashboard of nontoxic gas.
separate and fold out of the way as
62
 Before Starting
curtain air bag inflates. This especially If you do have a collision which
applies to children. deploys the air bags, any or all of the
following may occur: WARNING!
Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Deployed air bags and seat belt
In front and side impacts, impact • The nylon air bag material may
pretensioners cannot protect you in
sensors can aid the ORC in sometimes cause abrasions and/or
another collision. Have the air bags, 2
determining appropriate response to skin reddening to the driver and
seat belt pretensioners, and the
impact events. front passenger as the air bags
front seat belt retractor assemblies
deploy and unfold.
Enhanced Accident Response System replaced by a Maserati Service
• As the air bags deflate, you may see Center. Also, have the Occupant
In the event of an impact causing air some smoke-like particles. The Restraint Controller (ORC) system
bag deployment, if the particles are a normal by-product of serviced as well.
communication network and the the process that generates the
power remains intact, depending on • Have the air bag checked, serviced
non-toxic gas used for air bag
the nature of the accident, the ORC and replaced only by an Authorized
inflation. These airborne particles
will determine whether the enhanced Maserati Dealer.
may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or
accident response system will have to throat. If these particles settle on
perform the following functions: Air Bag System Maintenance
your clothing, follow the garment
• cut off fuel to the engine; manufacturer's instructions for
• turn hazard lights and interior lights cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle
after the air bags have deployed. If WARNING!
on as long as the battery has power
you are involved in another collision, • Modifications to any part of the air
or until the ignition switch is turned
the air bags will not be in place to bag system could cause it to fail;
off;
protect you. thus you could be injured if the air
• unlock the doors automatically; bag system is not there to protect
• disconnect the battery with a you. Do not modify the components
pyrotechnic charge. ENVIRONMENTAL! or wiring. Do not modify the front
Air Bag Deployment Result Air bag inflation releases a small bumper, vehicle body structure, or
amount of powder. This powder is not add aftermarket side steps or
The advanced front air bags are
harmful to the environment. running boards.
designed to deflate immediately after
deployment. (Continued)

63
 Before Starting
(Continued) section 7. See the Authorized Event Data Recorder (EDR)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any Maserati Dealer if the fuse is
part of the air bag system without This vehicle is equipped with an event
efficient.
the necessary know-how. data recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain crash
• Do not attempt to modify any part Transport of persons with or near crash-like situations, such as an
2 of your air bag system. The air bag disability air bag deployment or hitting a road
may inflate accidentally or may not
If it is necessary to modify the obstacle, data that will assist in
function properly if modifications
advanced air bag system of your understanding how a vehicle’s systems
are made. Take your vehicle to the
vehicle to accommodate a person with performed.
Authorized Maserati Dealer for any
disabilities, contact an Authorized The EDR is designed to record data
air bag system service. If your seat
Maserati Dealer. related to vehicle dynamics and safety
including your trim cover and
systems for a short period of time,
cushion needs to be serviced in any
typically 30 seconds or less.
way (including removal or
WARNING! The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
loosening/tightening of seat
• The advanced air bag system of your record such data as:
attachment bolts), take the vehicle
vehicle is not designed to protect • how various systems in your vehicle
to the Authorized Maserati Dealer.
adults with disabilities that require were operating;
• Only Maserati manufacturer deactivation of the passenger or
approved seat accessories may be • whether or not the driver and
driver air bag.
used. If it is necessary to modify the passenger safety belts were
• If you or another occupant is an buckled/fastened;
air bag system for persons with
adult with a medical condition that • how far (if at all) the driver was
disabilities, contact the Authorized
requires air bag deactivation, please depressing the accelerator and/or
Maserati Dealer.
contact an Authorized Maserati brake pedal; and
• If the speedometer, Rev Counter, or Dealer. For further information on
any engine related gauges are not • how fast the vehicle was traveling.
disabled driver or passengers see
working, the Occupant Restraint These data can help provide a better
http://www.safercar.gov.
Controller (ORC) may also be understanding of the circumstances in
• As long as the air bag is activated, which crashes and injuries occur.
disabled. The air bags may not be
persons with disabilities are advised
ready to inflate for your protection.
not to travel in the front seat in order
Promptly check the fuse block for
to avoid the risk of serious injuries or
blown fuses. To identify the air bag
death, even in minor crashes.
fuse see “Fuse Replacement” in

64
 Before Starting
NOTE: Child Restraint Systems There are different sizes and types of
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle restraint systems for children from
only if a non-trivial crash situation Everyone in your vehicle must be newborn size to the child almost large
occurs; no data are recorded by the buckled up all the time, including enough for an adult safety belt.
EDR under normal driving conditions babies and children. Every state in the Always refer to the manual provided
and no personal data (e.g., name, United States and all Canadian with child seat to ensure it is the 2
gender, age, and crash location) are provinces require that small children proper type according the travelling
recorded. However, other parties, such ride in proper restraint systems. Please child. Use the restraint system that is
as law enforcement, could combine be reminded that you can be correct for your child.
the EDR data with the type of prosecuted for ignoring this law.
Children 12 years or younger should Infants and Child Restraints
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation. ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, Safety experts recommend that
if available. According to crash children ride rearwardfacing in the
To read data recorded by an EDR, statistics, children are safer when vehicle until they are two years old or
special equipment is required, and properly restrained in the rear seats until they reach either the height or
access to the vehicle or the EDR is rather than in the front. weight limit of their rear facing child
needed. seat.
In addition to the vehicle Two types of child restraint systems
manufacturer, other parties, such as WARNING! can be used rearward-facing: infant
law enforcement, that have the carriers and convertible child seats.
In a collision, an unrestrained child,
special equipment, can read the The infant carrier is only used
even a tiny baby, can become a
information if they have access to rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is
projectile inside the vehicle. The force
vehicle or the EDR. recommended for children from birth
required to hold even an infant on
your lap could become so great that until they reach the weight or height
you could not hold the child, no limit of the infant carrier.
matter how strong you are. The child Convertible child seats can be used
and others could be badly injured. either rearward-facing or
Any child riding in your vehicle should forward-facing in the vehicle.
be in a proper restraint system Convertible child seats often have a
suitable for the child’s size. higher weight limit in the
rearward-facing direction than infant
carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who have

65
 Before Starting
outgrown their infant carrier but are Older Children and Child The child and belt-positioning booster
still younger than at least two years Restraints seat are fixed to the car by the
old. lap/shoulder belt.
Children should remain rearward- Children who are two years old or who
facing until they reach the highest have outgrown their rear-facing child Children Too Large for Booster
2 weight or height allowed by their child seat can ride forward-facing in the Seats
seat. Both types of child restraint vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
Children who are large enough to
systems are fixed to the car by the convertible child seats used in the
wear the shoulder belt comfortably
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child forward-facing direction are for
and whose legs are long enough to
restraint anchor system. Refer to children who are over two years old or
bend over the front of the seat when
“Lower Anchors and Tether for who have outgrown the rear-facing
their back is against the seatback
CHildren (LATCH)” in this section. weight or height limit of their
should use the lap/shoulder belt in a
rear-facing child seat.
rear seat.
Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a • Make sure that the child is upright in
WARNING! harness for as long as possible, up to the seat.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat the highest weight or height allowed • The lap portion should be low on the
in front of an air bag. A deploying by the child seat. These child seats are hips and as snug as possible.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag also fixed to the car by the • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s
can cause death or serious injury to a lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child squirming or slouching can move the
child 12 years or younger, including a restraint anchorage system. Refer to belt out of position.
child in a rearward facing infant “Lower Anchors and Tether for
seat. • If the shoulder belt contacts the face
CHildren (LATCH)” in this section.
or neck, move the child closer to the
• Only use a rearward-facing child All children whose weight or height is
center of the vehicle. Never allow a
restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. above the forward-facing limit for the
child to put the shoulder belt under
child seat should use a belt-positioning
an arm or behind their back.
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the back is against the
seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat.

66
 Before Starting
NOTE: certifying that it meets all applicable Installing Child Restraint
For additional information, refer to Safety Standards. Maserati also Systems using the Vehicle Seat
www.seatcheck.org or call recommends that you make sure Belt equipped with ALR
1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents that you can install the child
restraint in the vehicle where you The passenger seat belts are equipped
should refer to Transport Canada’s
with an Automatic Locking Retractor
website for additional information: will use it before you buy it.
(ALR) to secure child protection
2
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ • The restraint system must be
through a Child Restraint System
safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm appropriate for your child’s weight
(CRS). These types of seat belts are
and height.
designed to keep the lap portion of
• Check the label on the restraint the seat belt tight around the child
system for weight and height limits. restraint seat avoiding to use a locking
WARNING!
• Carefully follow the instructions that clip.
• Improper installation can lead to come with the restraint system. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise
failure of an infant or child restraint.
• If installed improperly, it may not if the entire belt is pulled out of the
It could come loose in a collision.
work when needed. retractor in order to enable the belt to
The child could be badly injured or
• Fit the child into the seat according retract subsequently. For additional
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s
to the child restraint manufacturer’s information on ALR, see “Using Seat
directions exactly when installing an
directions. Belt in Automatic Locking Retractor
infant or child restraint.
(ALR) Mode” in “Occupants Restraint
• A rearward-facing child restraint Systems” in this section.
should only be used in a rear seat. A To install a Child Restraint System with
rearward-facing child restraint in the WARNING!
ALR, pull enough of the belt out of
front seat may be struck by a When your child restraint system is
the retractor leading it through the
deploying passenger air bag, which not in use, secure it in the vehicle with
belt path of the protection device.
may cause severe or fatal injury to the seat belt or remove it from the
Slide the latch into the buckle until it
the infant. vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
clicks, then remove the entire safety
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident,
belt from the retractor in order to
Here are some tips on getting it could strike the occupants or
rewound. While rewinding a click will
seatbacks and cause serious personal
the most out of your child indicate the safety belt is now in
injury.
restraint Automatic Locking mode.
Exert then a traction on the exceeded
• Before buying any restraint system,
lap section of the belt in order to
make sure that it has a label
67
 Before Starting
tighten it around the child restraint If your child restraints are not The anchorages are located in the
seat. All seat belts will loosen over LATCH-Compatible, install the panel between the rear seatback and
time, it is therefore necessary to check restraints using the vehicle's seat belts. the rear window and are under a
them periodically and set them Installing a LATCH- Compatible Child plastic cover (indicated in the figure)
properly. Restraint System with the anchorage symbol on it.
2 Lower Anchors and Tether for Follow the child restraint
Children (LATCH) manufacturer's instructions provided
with the child restraint system.
Your vehicle's rear outboard seats are The lower LATCH anchorages are “U”
all equipped with the child restraint metal rings located on the rear seat in
anchorage system called LATCH. the area between cushion and
The LATCH system allows the child seatback and are easily identificable by
restraint systems to be fixed without the symbol on the outer cover.
using the vehicle's seat belts, instead
fixing the child restraint system to the
vehicle structure, using lower A
• Lift the outer cover and secure the
anchorages and upper tether strap B.
child seat to the “U” lower metal
rings positioned on the rear seat.

In addition, there are tether strap

anchorages behind each rear seat.
NOTE:
LATCH-Compatible child restraint The tether strap anchorage behind the
systems are now available. You should central rear seat should only be used
never install LATCH child seats so that to secure a child restraint system with
two seats share a common lower the vehicle's seat belts.
anchorage.

68
 Before Starting
• Fix the top tether strap (provided
with the child seat), to the anchor
located in the rear part of the
backrest.
• Lift the plastic cover located behind
the seat where you want to install 2
the child restraint system.

• Tighten the upper strap until you NOTE:

reach the tension level For any further details on installation
recommended by the restraint and/or use, refer to the instructions
system manufacturer. provided with the child seat.
To fix a child restraint system on
center seating position introduce the
hook end of the tether strap between
the seatback and adjustable headrest WARNING!
• Route the top tether strap to
(with the headrest in the full up • A child seat should be fitted only
provide the most direct path
position) then attach the hook to the when the car is stationary. Follow
between the anchorage and the
anchor located in the panel between the instructions for assembly,
child restraint system passing it over
the rear seatback and the rear disassembly and positioning that
the headrest.
window. the manufacturer must supply with
• Attach the hook of the top tether
the child restraint system.
strap (provided with the child
restraint system) to the anchor. • An incorrectly anchored tether strap
could lead to increased head motion
and possible injury to the child. Use
only the anchor position directly
behind the child seat to secure a
child restraint top tether strap.

69
 Before Starting
NOTE: Transporting Pets ParkSense® Park Assist
• Ensure that the tether strap does not (optional)
slip into the opening between the Air bags deploying in the front seat
seatbacks as you remove slack in the could harm your pet. An unrestrained The ParkSense® Park Assist (hereafter
strap. pet will be thrown about and possibly called “Park Assist”) system provides
2 injured, or injure a passenger during visual and audible indications of the
• When using a LATCH-Compatible
panic braking or in an accident. distance between the rear and/or front
child restraint system, please ensure
Pets should be restrained in the rear bumper and a detected obstacle when
that all seat belts not being used for
seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers backing up or moving forward, e.g.
occupant restraints are stowed and
that are secured by the vehicle seat during a parking maneuver.
out of reach of children.
belts. Refer to "Park Assist System Usage
Precautions" for limitations of this
system and recommendations.
WARNING! Park Assist system will retain the last
• Improper installation of a child system state (enabled or disabled)
restraint system to the LATCH from the last ignition cycle when the
anchorages can lead to failure of an ignition is changed to the RUN
infant or child restraint. The child position.
could be badly injured or killed. Park Assist system can be active only
Follow the child restraint when the shift lever is in R (Reverse) or
manufacturer's directions exactly D (Drive).
when installing an infant or child If Park Assist is enabled at one of these
restraint system. shift lever positions, the system will
• Child restraint anchorages are remain active until the vehicle speed is
designed to withstand only those increased to approximately 7 mph
loads imposed by correctly fitted (11 km/h) or above. The system will
child restraints. Under no become active again if the vehicle
circumstances are they to be used for speed is decreased to speeds less than
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
attaching other items or equipment
to the vehicle.

70
 Before Starting

Park Assist Sensors

The four Park Assist sensors, located in
the rear bumper, monitor the area
behind the vehicle that is within the
sensor's field of view. The sensors can
detect obstacles up to approximately 2
60 in (150 cm) from the rear bumper
in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
Park Assist Warning Messages
Display
The Park Assist Warning screen will
only be displayed if “Sound and
Display” is selected from the MTC
System. Refer to “MTC Settings” in
section 4 for further information.
The Park Assist Warning screen is
located on the instrument cluster
display.
The six Park Assist sensors, located in It provides visual warnings to indicate The system will indicate a detected
the front bumper, monitor the area in the distance between the front/rear obstacle by displaying three fixed light
front of the vehicle that is within the bumper and the detected obstacle. arcs while beeping for a one-half
sensor's field of view. The warning display will turn on second. The color indicates the
The sensors can detect obstacles up to indicating the system status (Ready or distance and the arc indicates the
a distance of approximately 50 in (120 Off) when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) position of the detected obstacle. The
cm) from the front bumper in the or in D (Drive) and an obstacle has amber color of the arc indicates the
horizontal direction, depending on been detected. medium and maximum distance, while
the location, type and orientation of the red color indicates the minimum
the obstacle. distance.

71
 Before Starting
As the vehicle moves closer to the
object the instrument cluster will
display the arc moving towards the
vehicle and the sound tone will change
from slow, to fast, to continuous.
2 The vehicle is close to an obstacle
when the instrument cluster displays
one flashing red arc only, combined
with a continuous sound.

The following chart shows the warning

alert visualization when the system is
detecting an obstacle.
NOTE:
Park Assist will turn off the front park
assist audible alert (chime) after
approximately 4 seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is
stationary, and brake pedal is applied.

Warning Alerts
Rear distance More than 60 in (150 cm) 60-40 in (150-100 cm) 40-24 in 40-14 in Less than 14 in
Front distance More than 50 in (120 cm) 50-40 in (120-100 cm) (100-60 cm) (60-35 cm) (35 cm)
Audible Alert None Single (rear only) Slow (rear only) Fast Continuous
Arc-Type lights number None 3 - Solid 3 - Flash 2 - Flash 1 - Flash
Arc color - Amber Amber Amber Red
Radio Mute No Yes Yes Yes Yes

72
 Before Starting

Enabling and Disabling Park by snow, mud, or ice and the vehicle is
Assist shifted into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
The instrument cluster will display the
Park Assist can be enabled and “Service Park Assist Sensors” message
disabled using the MTC System. The when any of the rear or front sensors
available choices are: “Off”, “Sound
Only”, or “Sound and Display”. See
are damaged and require service. 2
When the shift lever is moved to R
“MTC Settings” in section 3 for further (Reverse) or D (Drive) and the system
information. has detected a faulted condition, the
When the Park Assist soft-key is instrument cluster will display the
pressed to disable the system, the corresponding message for the time
instrument cluster will display the If “Service Park Assist Sensors” or
lapse the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or D “Park Assist Unavailable Service
“Park Assist System disabled” message (Drive) at speeds less than 7 mph
for approximately five seconds. See Required” display on the instrument
(11 km/h). Under this condition Park cluster, contact an Authorized
“Instrument Cluster” in section 4 for Assist will not operate. See
further information. Maserati Dealer.
“Instrument Cluster” in section 4 for
When the shift lever is moved to R further information. Cleaning the Park Assist
(Reverse) or to D (Drive) at a speed of If “...Wipe Off...” displays on the Sensors
7 mph (11 km/h) or below and the instrument cluster make sure the
system is disabled, the instrument When cleaning the sensors, take
outer surface and the underside of the special care not to scratch or damage
cluster will display the “Park Assist rear bumper and/or front bumper is
off” message for approximately five them; therefore, do not use dry, rough
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or hard cloths.
seconds in R (Reverse) or for 5 seconds or other obstruction and then cycle
when the vehicle is in D (Drive). The sensors must be washed with
the ignition switch. If the message clean water, possibly adding car
Servicing Park Assist System continues to appear contact an shampoo.
Authorized Maserati Dealer. Should you need to repaint the
In case of malfunction of the Park
Assist System, the instrument cluster bumper or in case of paint touch-ups
will actuate a single sound, once per in the sensor area, please contact an
ignition cycle. The instrument cluster Authorized Maserati Dealer. Incorrect
will display a message when any of paint application could affect the
the rear or front sensor(s) are blocked parking sensors operation.

73
 Before Starting

Park Assist System Usage looks over his/her shoulder when ParkView® Rear View
Precautions using Park Assist.
Camera (optional)
NOTE:
Your vehicle can be equipped with the
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other ParkView® Rear View Camera that
2 vibrations could affect the WARNING!
allows you to see an image on the
performance of Park Assist. Drivers must be careful when backing MTC screen of the rear surroundings of
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer up even when using the Park Assist your vehicle whenever the gear lever is
hitches, etc., should not be placed system. Always check carefully behind put into R (Reverse).
within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear your vehicle, look behind you, and be The image will be displayed along with
bumper while driving the vehicle. sure to check for pedestrians, animals, a caution note to “Check Entire
Failure to do so can result in the other vehicles, obstructions, and blind Surroundings” across the top of the
system misinterpreting a close object spots before backing up. You are screen. After five seconds this note will
as a sensor problem, causing the responsible for safety and must disappear.
Service Park Assist message to be continue to pay attention to your The ParkView® camera is located on
displayed in the instrument cluster. surroundings. Failure to do so can the rear of the vehicle above the rear
result in serious injury or death. License plate.
When the gear lever is shifted out of R
CAUTION! (Reverse), the rear camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio
• Park Assist is only a parking aid and screen appears again.
is unable to recognize every obstacle, When displayed, static grid lines will
including small ones. Parking curbs illustrate the width of the vehicle
might only be temporarily detected while a dashed center-line will indicate
or not detected at all. Obstacles the center of the vehicle to assist with
located above or below the sensors parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
will not be detected when they are The static grid lines will show separate
in close proximity. zones in different color that will help
• The vehicle must be driven slowly indicate the distance to the rear of the
when using Park Assist in order to be vehicle.
able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. When backing
up, it is recommended that the driver

74
 Before Starting
The following table shows the surroundings and must continue to be ParkView® On/Off
approximate distances for each zone careful while reversing. Failure to do
• Turn the MTC on.
and color: so can result in serious injury or
death. • Press and release the “Settings”
Zone Distance to the rear of soft-key.
the vehicle • Press and release the “Safety & 2
Red 0 - 12 in (0 - 30 cm) CAUTION! Driving Assistance” soft-key.
Yellow 12 - 40 in (30 cm - 1 m) • Press the check box soft key next to
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® “Parkview Backup Camera” to
Green 40 in (1 m) or greater should only be used as a parking aid, enable/disable it.
as the The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle
must be driven slowly when using
ParkView® to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look
frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView®.

NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any other
WARNING! substance builds up on the camera
Drivers must be careful when lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
reversing even when using the and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover
ParkView® Rear View Camera. Always the lens.
check carefully behind your vehicle,
and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before reversing. You
are responsible for the safety of your

75
 Before Starting

Safety Tips Exhaust Gas The best protection against carbon

monoxide entry into the passenger
Transporting Passengers compartment is a properly maintained
WARNING! engine exhaust system.
Whenever detecting a change in the
Exhaust gases can injure. They contain
2 WARNING! carbon monoxide (CO), which is
sound of the exhaust system or
eventual exhaust fumes inside the
• Do not leave children or animals colorless and odorless. Breathing it
vehicle have an Authorized Maserati
inside parked vehicles in hot can make you unconscious and can
Dealer inspect the complete exhaust
weather. Interior heat build-up may eventually poison you. To avoid
system and adjacent body areas for
cause serious injury. breathing (CO), follow these safety
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a tips:
mispositioned parts.
cargo area, inside of a vehicle. In a • Do not run the engine in a closed Open seams or loose connections could
collision, people riding in these areas garage or in confined areas any permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
are more likely to be seriously longer than needed to move your passenger compartment.
injured. vehicle in or out of the area.
• Do not allow people to ride in any • If it is necessary to sit in a parked
area of your vehicle that is not vehicle with the engine running, WARNING!
equipped with seats and seat belts. adjust your heating or cooling CALIFORNIA proposition 65.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in controls to force outside air into the Engine exhaust, some of its
a seat and using a seat belt properly. vehicle. Set the blower at high constituents, and certain vehicle
speed. components contain or emit chemicals
• If you are required to drive with the known to the state of California to
trunk/liftgate open, make sure that cause cancer, and birth defects or
all windows are closed and the other reproductive harm. In addition,
climate control blowers switch is set certain fluids contained in vehicles and
at high speed. DO NOT use the certain products of component wear
recirculation mode. contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer,
and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.

76
 Before Starting

Vehicle Safety Checks • If the light stays on, flickers, or Floor Mats
comes on while driving, have the Always use floor mats designed to fit
Seat Belts
system checked by an Authorized the footwell of your vehicle. Use only
• Inspect the belt system periodically, Maserati Dealer. floor mats that leave the pedal area
checking for cuts, frays, and loose
unobstructed and that are firmly
parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately.
secured so that they cannot slip out of 2
WARNING! position and interfere with the pedals
• Do not disassemble or modify the or impair safe operation of your
Certain components of this vehicle
system. vehicle in other ways.
such as air bag modules, seat belt
• If the belt has been sharply pulled, pretensioners, adaptive steering
for example as the result of an NOTE:
columns, and button cell batteries
accident, the safety belt, together may contain Perchlorate material. The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
with the anchoring devices, the Special handling may apply for service provide you with any information
anchoring device mounting screws or vehicle end of life disposal. See about the available Maserati floor
and the pretensioner (if available) www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ mats included in the Genuine
must be completely replaced. Even if perchlorate. Accessories range.
the belt does not present any
exterior signs of wear or damage, it Defroster
may have lost its restraining
Check operation by selecting the WARNING!
properties.
defrost mode and place the blower Pedals that cannot move freely can
Air Bag Warning Light system on high speed (see “Air cause loss of vehicle control and
The light should illuminate and Conditioning Controls” chapter in increase the risk of serious personal
remain lit for a few seconds bulb section 4). injury.
checking when the ignition switch is You should be able to feel the air
directed against the windshield and • Always make sure that floor mats
pushed in RUN position (see
front side windows. Contact an are properly attached to the proper
“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Authorized Maserati Dealer for service fasteners.
— Air bags” chapter in this section).
if your defroster is inoperable. • Never place or install floor mats or
• If the light does not illuminate other floor coverings in the vehicle
while starting, contact an that cannot be properly secured to
Authorized Maserati Dealer. prevent them from moving and
(Continued)

77
 Before Starting
(Continued) Tires Lights and Indicator Lights
interfering with the pedals or the
• Examine tires for excessive tread • Have someone observe the operation
ability to control the vehicle.
wear and uneven wear patterns. of exterior lights while you operate
• Never put floor mats or other floor • Check for stones, nails, glass, or other the controls (see “Lights” chapter in
coverings on top of already installed objects lodged in the tread or section 3).
2 floor mats. Additional floor mats and sidewall. • Check turn signal and high beam
other coverings will reduce the size indicator lights on the instrument
• Inspect tire tread for cuts and cracks.
of the pedal area and interfere with panel (see “Instrument Cluster”
the pedals. • Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and
bulges. chapter in section 4).
• Check mounting of mats on a regular
• Check lug nuts for tightness. Door Latches
basis. Always properly reinstall and
secure floor mats that have been • Check the tires (see “Tire Inflation • Check for positive closing, latching,
removed for cleaning. Pressure” chapter in section 8) for and locking of doors and trunk lid
proper cold inflation pressure. (see “Unlock Power Doors and Trunk
• Always make sure that objects
Lid with Key fob” chapter in this
cannot fall into the driver footwell
section).
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake WARNING! Fluid Leaks
pedal and accelerator pedal causing Driving over rough or damaged road • After parking overnight check under
a loss of vehicle control. surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and the vehicle for recent fluid leaks (oil,
• Mounting posts must be properly other obstacles can cause serious fuel, etc.).
installed, if not equipped from the damage to wheels, tires, and • If gasoline fumes are detected or
factory. Failure to properly follow suspension parts. This is more likely to fluid leaks are suspected, contact an
floor mat installation or mounting occur with low-profile tires, which Authorized Maserati Dealer.
can cause interference with the provide less cushioning between the
brake pedal and accelerator pedal wheel and the road. Be careful to
operation causing loss of control of avoid road hazards and reduce your
the vehicle. speed, especially if your vehicle is
equipped with low-profile tires.

78
3 – Understanding the Vehicle

Interior Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Driver Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Adjustable Pedals (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Rear-View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Windshield Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Interior Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Power Sunroof with Sunshade (if foreseen) . . . . . . . . 122
HomeLink (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Air Conditioning Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

79
 Understanding the Vehicle

Interior Components
Dashboard Components

80
 Understanding the Vehicle

1 Adjustable side air outlets. Central Console Components Components between the Rear
2 Engine START/STOP button. Seats
3 Headlight switch.
4 Light dimmer controls.
5 Steering wheel controls.
6 Instrument cluster.
7* Right shift paddle +.
8* Left shift paddle –. 3
9 Hood release.
10 Adjustable central air outlets.
11 Analog clock.
1 Automatic transmission shift
12 MTC display. lever. 1 Armrest cup holder covers
13 Hazard lights switch. 2 Drive mode switches. unlock button.
14 Climate controls. 3 Electric Parking Brake lever. 2 Armrest compartment unlock
15 SD Memory card slot. button with power outlet.
4 Cover for compartment with
16 CD/DVD slot. AUX and USB port.
17 Internal rear view mirror. 5 Cover for cup holder and
18 Front dome console. power socket compartment.
19 Storage compartment handle. 6 Unlock button for central
console with cup holder and
20 Storage compartment.
power outlet.
21 Dashboard glove box handle.
7 Central console covers with
22 Dashboard storage armrest function.
compartment.
8 Air outlets (adjustable).
(*) Optional equipment
9 Rear power sunshade and rear
seats comfort controls panel
(optional).

81
 Understanding the Vehicle

Front Doors Components 4 Passenger power window Rear Doors Components

switch.
5 Power door unlocks/locks,
passenger door.
6 Trunk lid release.
7 Loudspeakers.
8 Storage compartment.
9 Internal door lock/unlock knob.
3
10 Door panel grip.
11 Reflex reflector.
12 Outside door handle.
13 Door lock button with “Passive 1 Inside rear door handle.
Entry” function. 2 Grip.
14 Door outboard opening lock 3 Loudspeaker.
(for version/market where
4 Door storage pockets.
provided).
5 Power window and power
doors lock/unlock buttons.
6 “Child protection” door lock
system.
7 Inside door lock/unlock knob.
1 Inside door handle. 8 Reflex reflector.
2 Driver’s seat and rear mirrors 9 Outside door handle.
memory switch.
3 Rear view mirrors, power
windows and power switches
door unlocks/locks switches
panel.

82
 Understanding the Vehicle

Front Seats Seat Up/Down Adjustment

The height of the seat can be adjusted
Seats and seat belts are part of the
up- or downward.
Occupant Restraint System of the
Grip switch 1 from the back side and
vehicle.
push it down or up.
For further information, see chapter
Release the switch 1 when the desired
“Occupant restraint system” in Section
position is reached.
2.
Depending on the different versions,
the front seats may have different CAUTION! 3
controls for adjustment and optional If the seat's movement does not work,
features. make sure that the corresponding fuse
is not tripped (see chapter “Fuse
Replacement” in section 7).
WARNING!
To manually lift or lower the head
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
restraints press the indicated lateral
a seat and using a seat belt properly.
button.

Front Power Seats

The power seats switches are located
on the outboard side of the seat Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
cushion.
The seat can be adjusted both forward
Use these two front switches to move
and rearward.
the driver's seat up or down, forward
Push the seat switch 1 forward or
or rearward or to recline the seat
rearward, the seat will move in the
cushion and the seatback.
direction of the switch.
Use the rear switch to adjust the
Release the switch 1 when the desired
lumbar support.
position is reached.

83
 Understanding the Vehicle
Power Lumbar

WARNING! Push the switch 3 forward or rearward WARNING!

to increase or decrease the lumbar
Remember that the headrests must be • Never adjust the seat while driving.
support.
positioned so that their upper edge is You could lose control of the vehicle.
Push the switch 3 upward or
aligned with the top of the occupant’s Moving the seat could distract you
downward to raise or lower the
head. In fact, only in this position can or make you press a pedal
lumbar support.
they provide the support required in unintentionally.
the event of a bumper-to-tail collision. • Seats should be adjusted before
3 fastening the seat belts and while
Seat Tilt Control (Up/Down) the vehicle is parked.
The angle of the seat cushion can be • Do not ride with the seatback
adjusted in four directions. reclined so that the shoulder belt is
Pull upward or push the front of the no longer resting against your chest.
switch 1, to move the front cushion In a collision you could slide under
seat in the direction of the switch. the seat belt, which could result in
Release the switch 1 when the desired serious injury or death.
position is reached.
Seat Back Tilt Control
The angle of the seatback can be CAUTION!
adjusted forward or rearward. Do not place any object under a power
Push the seatback switch 2 forward or seat or obstruct its movement as it may
rearward, the upper seatback will cause damage to the seat controls.
move in the direction of the switch. Seat movement may become limited if
Release the switch 2 when the desired there is an obstruction.
position is reached.

84
 Understanding the Vehicle

Front Power/Manual Seats

On these seats, the power switch 1 WARNING!
and the manual reclining lever 2 are Remember that the headrests must be
located on the outboard side of the positioned so that their upper edge is
seat cushion. aligned with the top of the occupant’s
Use the power switch 1 to move the head. In fact, only in this position can
driver's seat up or down, forward or they provide the support required in
rearward or to recline the seat the event of a bumper-to-tail collision.
cushion. 3
Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
CAUTION! The seat can be adjusted both forward
If the seat's movement does not work, and rearward.
make sure that the corresponding fuse Push the seat switch 1 forward or
is not tripped (see chapter “Fuse rearward, the seat will move in the
Replacement” in section 7). direction of the switch.
Use the manual lever 2 to recline the Release the switch 1 when the desired
seatback. position is reached.
Seat Up/Down Adjustment
The height of the seat can be adjusted Seat Tilt Control (Up/Down)
up- or downward. The angle of the seat cushion can be
Grip switch 1 from the back side and adjusted in four directions.
push it down or up. Pull upward or push the front of the
Release the switch 1 when the desired switch 1, to move the front cushion
position is reached. seat in the direction of the switch.
To manually lift or lower the head Release the switch 1 when the desired
restraints press the indicated lateral position is reached.
button.

85
 Understanding the Vehicle
Seat Back Manual Control Front Heated Seats (optional
The angle of the seatback can be for Power/Manual Seats
WARNING!
adjusted forward or rearward. version)
• Never adjust the seat while driving.
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift
You could lose control of the vehicle. The front seats can be equipped with
the lever 2, then push back to the
Moving the seat could distract you heaters in both seat cushions and
desired position and release the lever.
or make you press a pedal seatbacks.
Lean forward and lift the lever 2 to
unintentionally. The front seats heating is operated by
return the seatback to its normal
• Seats should be adjusted before the MTC System.
position. Using body pressure, lean
3 forward and rearward on the seat to fastening the seat belts and while
be sure the seatback has latched. the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback WARNING!
Power Lumbar (optional)
reclined so that the shoulder belt is • Persons with low skin sensitivity
Push the switch 3 forward or rearward no longer resting against your chest. because of advanced age, chronic
to increase or decrease the lumbar In a collision you could slide under illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
support. the seat belt, which could result in medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
Push the switch 3 upward or serious injury or death. or other physical conditions must be
downward to raise or lower the careful when using the seat heater. It
lumbar support. may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for
CAUTION!
long periods of time.
Do not place any object under a power
seat or obstruct its movement as it may • Do not place anything on the seat
cause damage to the seat controls. that insulates against heat, such as a
Seat movement may become limited if blanket or cushion. This may cause
there is an obstruction in the way. the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated
could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the
seat.

86
 Understanding the Vehicle
Front Seats Heat Function Front Ventilated Seats
NOTE: (optional)
The engine must be running for the NOTE:
heated seats to operate. The engine must be running for the
ventilated seats to operate.
• Touch the “Controls” soft-key on the
lower part of the MTC display. To enhance occupants comfort by high
• Within 15 seconds, touch the external temperatures, both the driver
“Driver” or “Passenger” seat and passenger seats, on request, can 3
soft-key once to select HI-level be ventilated.
NOTE:
heating. Small fans are located in the seat
Once a heat setting is selected, heat
cushion and seatback, they draw air
will be felt within two to five minutes.
from the seat surface through fine
When the HI-level setting is selected, perforations in the seat cover to help
the heater will provide a boosted heat keep the driver and front passenger
level during the first four minutes of cooler when the temperature is high.
operation. The ventilated seats are operated with
Then, the heat output will drop to the the MTC System.
normal HI-level. Front Ventilated Seats Function
If the HI-level setting is selected, the
• Touch the “Controls” soft-key on the
system will automatically switch to
lower part of the MTC display.
• Within 15 seconds, touch the same LO-level after a maximum of 60
minutes of continuous operation. • Within 15 seconds, touch the
soft-key a second time to select “Driver” or “Passenger” seat
LO-level heating. At that time, the display will indicate
the change from HI to LO. soft-key once to select HI-level
• Within 15 seconds, touch the same ventilation.
The LO-level setting will turn OFF
soft-key a third time to shut the
automatically after a maximum of
heating elements OFF.
approximately 45 minutes.

87
 Understanding the Vehicle

Driver Memory Seat • The “1” and “2” buttons which are
used to recall either of two
This feature (for versions/markets, programmed memory profiles.
where provided) allows the driver to
store up to two different memory
profiles for easy recall through a
memory switch. Each memory profile
contains desired position settings for
the driver seat, external side mirrors,
3 adjustable pedals, power tilt and
telescopic steering column and a set of
• Within 15 seconds, touch the same
programmed radio stations.
soft-key a second time to select
Your key fob RKE transmitter can also
LO-level ventilation.
be set to recall the same positions by
• Within 15 seconds, touch the same pressing the button. Memory Profiles Setting
soft-key a third time to shut off the
seat ventilation. NOTE: NOTE:
• Only one key fob RKE transmitter can Saving a new memory profile will
be linked to each of the memory erase an existing profile from memory.
positions.
• Passive Entry door handles cannot be To create a new memory profile,
linked to the memory function. Use perform the following:
either the memory recall switch or • Cycle the ignition switch to the RUN
the key fob RKE transmitter (if linked position.
to the memory feature) to recall • Adjust all memory profile settings to
memory positions 1 or 2. desired preferences (i.e., seat, side
The memory seat switch is located on mirrors, adjustable pedals, power tilt
the driver's door trim panel. The and telescopic steering column, and
switch consists of three buttons: radio station presets).
• Press and release the “S” button on
• The “S” (SET) button, which is used
the memory switch.
to activate the memory save
function.

88
 Understanding the Vehicle
• Within five seconds, press and 3. Once the profile has been transmitter linked to memory position
release the MEMORY button “1” or recalled, press and release the 1 or 2.
“2”. The instrument cluster display “S” button on the memory A recall can be canceled by pressing
will show which memory position switch, then press and release any of the MEMORY buttons (“S”, “1”,
has been set. button “1” or “2” accordingly. or “2”) during a recall. When a recall
“Memory Profile Set” 1 or 2 will is canceled, the driver seat, external
NOTE:
display in the instrument cluster. side mirrors, adjustable pedals, power
Memory profiles can be set without tilt and telescopic steering column
4.
the vehicle in P (Park), but the vehicle Press and release the button stop moving.
must be in P (Park) to recall a memory on key fob RKE transmitter A delay of at least one second will 3
profile. within 10 seconds. occur before selecting a new recall.

Pairing Remote Keyless Entry NOTE:

Easy ENTRY/EXIT Seat
Transmitter to Seats Memory (optional)
Your key fobs RKE transmitter can be
Your key fob with RKE transmitters unlinked to your memory settings by This feature provides automatic driver
can be programmed to recall one of pressing the “S” button followed by seat positioning to enhance driver
two programmed memory profiles by the button on the key fob RKE mobility when entering and exiting
pressing the button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above. the vehicle.
transmitter. The distance the driver seat moves
To program your key fobs RKE Memory Position Recall depends on where you have the driver
transmitter, perform the following seat positioned when you place the
NOTE: ignition switch to the OFF position.
actions:
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to • When you cycle the ignition to the
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the
recall memory positions. If a recall is OFF position the driver seat:
OFF position.
attempted when the vehicle is not in P
2. Select the desired memory • will move about 2.36 in (60 mm)
(Park), a message will display in the
profile that you wish to activate rearward if the driver seat position
instrument cluster.
from the transmitter by pressing is greater than or equal to ca. 2.67
the button “1” or “2”. To recall the memory settings for in (68 mm) forward of the rear
driver, press MEMORY button number stop;
“1” or “2” on the driver's door trim • will move to a position of ca.
panel or the button on the RKE 0.31 in (8 mm) forward of the rear
stop if the driver seat position is

89
 Understanding the Vehicle
between 0.9 in (23 mm) and 2.67 in Rear Seats • To raise the head restraint, pull
(68 mm) forward of the rear stop. upward on the head restraint. For
• The seat will return to its previously Rear seats can fit three passengers. easier operation, lower the rear
set position when you place the Seats and seat belts are parts of the armrest as described in the following
ignition into the ACC or RUN occupant restraint system of the paragraph.
position. vehicle.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is
disabled when the driver seat
position is less than 0.9 in (23 mm) WARNING!
3 forward of the rear stop. In this Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
position, there would be no benefit seat and using a seat belt properly.
to the driver by moving the seat for
Easy Exit or Easy Entry. NOTE:
Each stored memory setting will have See chapter “Occupants Restraint
an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit Systems” in section 2 for seat belt
position. positioning. • To lower the head restraint, press the
NOTE: push button, located at the foot of
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be Rear Head Restraints the head restraint on the left side,
and push downward on the head
enabled or disabled using the MTC Side seats are equipped with fixed
restraint.
System, refer to “MTC Settings” in head restraints.
section 4 for further information. The center seat head restraint has two
positions, up or down.
When the center seat is being
occupied the head restraint should be
in the raised position.
When there are no occupants in the
center seat the head restraint can be
lowered in order to provide the driver
for maximum visibility.

90
 Understanding the Vehicle
NOTE: request a 12 V power outlet and an Rear Side Heated Seats
To remove the head restraint of USB charging port. (optional)
central seat see “Cargo Area” in this The side rear seats can be equipped
section. with heaters both in seat cushion and
seatback.
Rear Armrest Rear seats heating can be adjusted by
The rear armrest is mobile and can be operating control devices on the
folded up into the seat back. instrument panel located on the rear
side of the central console. The panel 3
• To lower it, pull the stripe as also includes commands for the rear
indicated. window sunshade (see “Rear
Windows” in section 2).

WARNING!
• Persons with low skin sensitivity
because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
or other physical conditions must be
careful when using the seat heater.
• To close it, pull it upwards then push It may cause burns even at low
it back into its seat. temperatures, especially if used for
• To close the compartment, lower the
On the front part of the armrest there long periods of time.
cover.
are two cup holders (see “Interior • Do not place anything on the seat that
Features” in this section). insulates against heat, such as a blanket
Inside the armrest there is an CAUTION! or cushion. This may cause the seat
illuminated glove or document The armrest is not designed to support heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that
compartment. Pressing the opening the weight of an adult or a child: has been overheated could cause
button and lifting the cover of the please use it only to store beverages, serious burns due to the increased
armrest box you access to a small objects or documents. surface temperature of the seat.
compartment where you can find on

91
 Understanding the Vehicle
The buttons on the instrument panel By selecting the HI-level setting, the Steering Wheel
with the resistance icon activate the heater will provide a boosted heat
heating on one or both seats. level during the first four minutes of Adjustment
• Push the button once to select the operation. Then, the heat output will This feature allows you to power tilt
highest heating level. The upper LED drop to the normal HI-level. the steering column upward or
located on the side of the icon will By setting the HI-level, the system will downward or to lengthen or shorten it
illuminate. automatically switch to LO-level after a in order to adjust the steering wheel
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous to an optimized position. Steering
• Push the same button a second time
operation. The LO-level setting will wheel adjustment can be manual or
3 to select the lowest level. The lower
turn off automatically after a electric.
LED will illuminate.
maximum of approximately 45
• Push the same button a third time to minutes. Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel
shut the heating elements OFF. The
LED will turn off. The tilt/telescoping control handle is
located below the steering wheel at
the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull
the control handle outward. To tilt the
steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as
desired.

NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat
will be felt within two to five
minutes.
• The engine must be running for the
heated seats to operate.

92
 Understanding the Vehicle
To lock the steering column in To lengthen or shorten the steering Heated Steering Wheel
position, push the control handle column/wheel, pull the switch toward (optional)
inward until fully engaged. you or push the switch away from you
as desired. NOTE:
The engine must be running for the
NOTE:
heated steering wheel to operate.
You can use your key fob with RKE
transmitter or the memory buttons on The steering wheel contains a heating
the driver's door trim panel to return element inside the rim that helps
the tilt/telescopic steering warm driver’s hands by cold weather. 3
column/wheel to programmed The heated steering wheel has only
positions. See “Driver Memory Seat” one temperature setting. Once turned
in section 3. on, this function will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering before automatically shutting off.
Wheel The heated steering wheel can shut
WARNING! off early or may not turn on when the
The power tilt/telescoping steering
Do not adjust the steering steering wheel is already warm.
column/wheel switch is located on the
column/wheel while driving. The heated steering wheel can be
lower left side of the steering column.
Adjusting the steering column/wheel turned on and off using the MTC
To adjust the tilt of the steering
while driving could cause the driver to System.
column/wheel, move the switch up or
lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
down as desired. • Touch the “Controls” soft-key
steering column/wheel is adjusted
before driving your vehicle. Failure to located on the lower part of the
follow this warning may result in MTC display.
serious injury or death.

93
 Understanding the Vehicle
• Do not place anything on the Adjustable Pedals
steering wheel that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or steering (optional)
wheel covers of any type and The adjustable pedals system is
material. This may cause the steering designed to allow greater range of
wheel heater to overheat. pedals positions enabling driver
comfort with regard to the steering
wheel tilt and the seat position.
This feature allows the brake and
3 accelerator pedals to move toward or
• Within 15 seconds, touch the away from the driver’s feet.
“Heated wheel” soft-key to turn on The switch is located on the front side
the function. of the driver's seat cushion side shield.
• Within 15 seconds, touch the
“Heated wheel” soft-key a second
time to turn it off.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion, or other physical Press the switch downward to move
conditions must exercise care when the pedals forward (toward the front
using the steering wheel heater. It of the vehicle).
may cause burns even at low Lift the switch upward to move the
temperatures, especially if used for pedals rearward (toward the driver).
long periods.

94
 Understanding the Vehicle

Rear-View Mirrors
WARNING! CAUTION!
External Mirrors
Do not adjust the pedals position Do not place any object under the
while the vehicle is moving. You could adjustable pedals or obstruct its External mirrors can be adjusted
lose control and have an accident. movement as it may cause damage to electrically and are equipped with anti
Always adjust the pedals position the pedal controls. Pedal movement fog resistors operated by the air
while the vehicle is parked. may become limited if there is an conditioning system (see “Air
obstruction in the adjustable pedal's Conditioning Controls” in section 4).
The following messages will be The mirrors can be folded electrically
displayed if the driver is attempting to
path. 3
and will yield in both directions in case
adjust the pedals when the system is of a collision.
locked out: The external mirrors can be
• “Adjustable Pedals Unavailable electrochromic (for versions/markets,
While in Reverse”; where provided), which means, they
• or “Adjustable Pedals Unavailable automatically operate an anti glare
While Cruise Engaged”. function by gradually shading as the
light hitting the mirrors increases.
NOTE: The exterior of the rear-view mirror
For vehicles equipped with driver support is equipped with LEDs,
memory seat, use your key fob (RKE) lighting up when the turn signals and
transmitter or the memory buttons on vehicle entry/exit lights are activated.
the driver's door trim panel to return
NOTE:
the adjustable pedals to programmed
positions. See “Driver Memory Seat” The mirrors can be adjusted
in section 3 for further information. electrically only with the ignition key
in RUN position.

95
 Understanding the Vehicle
Mirrors Positioning indicating the rear view mirror is Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
The power mirror controls are located activated and can be adjusted. This feature provides automatic
on the driver's door trim panel. Press the mirror control switch external rear-view mirrors positioning,
The power mirror controls consist of corresponding to the arrow indicating allowing the driver to view the ground
mirror select buttons and a four-way the direction of the desired area behind the front doors. The
mirror control switch. movement. external mirrors will move slightly
For optimal vision orientate the downward from the current position
outside(s) mirror(s) in order to frame when the shift lever is shifted into
the adjacent lane adjacent and get a reverse. The external mirrors will then
3 partial overlap with the visible image return to the original position when
on the inside rear-view mirror. the lever is shifted out of the reverse
Power mirror preselected positions can position. Each memory set of the
be reset by operating the optional driver's seat (see "Driver Memory Seat
Memory Driver Seat device. Check (for versions/markets, where
“Driver Memory Seat” in section 3 for provided)" chapter in section 3)
further information. corresponds to a mirrors tilt position in
reverse.

WARNING! NOTE:
Vehicles and other objects seen in the The mirrors tilt in reverse can be
external side convex mirror will look turned on and off using the MTC
smaller and farther away than they System, refer to “MTC Settings” in
really are. Relying only on your section 4.
passenger side convex mirror could
cause you to collide with another
vehicle or object. Use the inside mirror
to judge the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the external side
To adjust a rear view mirror, press convex mirror.
either the L (left) or R (right) button to
select the mirror that you want to
adjust. The spin button will illuminate

96
 Understanding the Vehicle
Folding Mirrors greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
The switch for the power folding will automatically unfold.
CAUTION!
mirrors is located between the power
To avoid damage to the mirror during
mirror switches.
CAUTION! cleaning, never spray any cleaning
Never retract or open the mirrors solution directly onto the mirror.
manually: it could damage the power Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
mechanism. and wipe the mirror clean.

Internal Rearview Mirror 3

The internal rearview mirror can be
manually adjusted, and is equipped
with an accident-prevention release
system operating in the event of a
collision.
Internal rearview mirror can be
electrochromic (for versions/markets,
where provided): this function is
automatically deactivated in reverse to
ensure maximum visibility of obstacles.

Press the switch once and the mirrors

will fold in; press the switch a second
time to reset the mirrors to the
standard position.
If the mirrors are in the folded
position, and vehicle speed is equal or

97
 Understanding the Vehicle

Lights
Light Switch
The headlight switch located on the
left side of the dashboard is used for
the parking lights, headlights and fog
lights operations.
The regulation devices beside the
3 switch may have a different
configuration according to type of
headlights installed. It can adjust
respectively:
• the left one: brightness of the
instrument panel lights, doors
controls rear lighting, interior and
night lighting (see “Interior Lights”
in this chapter).
• the right one: headlights leveling
(see “Headlights Leveling” in this
chapter) or brightness tuning of
night lighting (see “interior Lights” NOTE:
in this chapter). If the headlights or position/parking
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise lights are on after the ignition is
to the first or to the second placed in OFF position, an audio signal
trigger the instrument cluster will will alert the driver while opening the
display the related telltale. driver's door.

98
 Understanding the Vehicle
Lighting Up External Lights according to the Position of the Headlights Switch, Ignition Device and Transmission and
according to the Engine Status

Ignition Lights switch position

Engine Transmission
device
status position 0
position
OFF All lights off Position/parking lights Low beams, position/parking (1),
- - (1), side marker and side marker and license plate
license plate lights on lights on
ACC All lights off Position/parking lights Low beams, position/parking (1), 3
Off P (Park) (1), side marker and side marker and license plate
license plate lights on (2) lights on (2)
RUN All lights off All lights off Low beams, position/parking (1),
Off P (Park) side marker and license plate
lights on (2)
RUN All lights off All lights off Low beams, position/parking (1),
On P (Park) side marker and license plate
lights on
RUN Any position DRL (1) on (if DRL (1) on (if enabled by Low beams, position/parking (1),
On other than P enabled by MTC) side marker and license plate
(Park) MTC) lights on
(1) The lighting system uses the same LED with two different levels of intensity: high for DRL and low for position/
parking lights.
(2) The lights are powered up for 30 minutes to preserve the charge of the battery.

99
 Understanding the Vehicle
Lighting Up Internal Lights according Automatic Headlights the lights on and off manually.
to the Headlights Switch and Ignition • In case of fog during the day, the
Device Position This system automatically turns the
headlights on or off according to position lights and low beams will
• When lights switch is in mode turn on automatically. The driver
ambient light intensity detected by the
and ignition switch in RUN, besides must always be ready to turn the
twilight sensor. To turn the system on,
the outdoor lights, the rear Dome lights on manually, including the rear
rotate the lights switch clockwise to
lights LED, the front Dome light (if fog lights.
“AUTO” position.
enabled), the control backlight, the
When the automatic system is
lighting of the instrument panel and Headlights On with Wipers
3 activated, the headlight time delay
front seats night lighting will light When this feature is active, the
feature is activated as well. This means
up. headlights will turn on in “Adverse
the headlights will stay on for up to 90
• Besides the external lights, the same seconds after you place the ignition Weather” mode approximately 120
interior lights indicated in the into OFF position. seconds after activation of the wipers,
previous step based on the DAY or To turn the automatic system off, if the lights switch is placed in the
NIGHT mode established by the move the lights switch out of “AUTO” “AUTO” position. The headlights will
Ambient light detecting sensor will position. additionally turn off by deactivation of
light up. In DAY mode, the control the wipers if previously activated with
backlights will have 100% intensity. NOTE: this function.
In NIGHT mode, the intensity can be The engine must be running before
adjusted by the right regulator (see the headlights turn on in automatic NOTE:
“Interior Lights" of this chapter). mode. The Headlights ignition feature with
• When the light switch position is "0" wipers may be turned on and off using
and the ignition device is in RUN the MTC System, refer to “MTC
mode, the control back light and Settings” in section 4.
night lighting will turn off. WARNING!
• The responsibility for turning on the Headlights Time Delay
NOTE: lights, depending on the daylight
During DAY mode, the control and regulations in force in the This safety feature provides headlight
switches are not backlit except the country of use, always lies with the illumination for up to 90 seconds
windows and steering switches. driver. The automatic system for (programmable) when leaving your
switching on and off the external vehicle in an unlit area. To activate the
lights is to be considered as an aid delay feature, place the ignition switch
for the driver. If necessary, switch in the OFF or ACC position while the

100
 Understanding the Vehicle
headlights are still on. Then turn off This camera detects vehicle specific Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
the headlights within 45 seconds. light and automatically switches from
The lighting system uses the same
The delay interval begins when the high beams to low beams until the
high or low intensity headlights LED,
lights switch is turned off (position approaching vehicle or the front
respectively, for the DRL lights and
“0”). If you turn the headlights or vehicle is out of view.
position or parking lights.
parking lights on, or place the ignition
NOTE: DRL lights will turn on when the
in RUN, the system will cancel the
• This function can be turned on or off engine is running and the shift lever is
delay.
using the MTC System, refer to “MTC moved out of the P (Park) position.
If you turn the headlights off (“0”
Settings” in section 4 for further If a turn signal is activated, the DRL 3
position) before the ignition, they will
information. light on the same side of the vehicle
turn off in the normal mode.
• If the headlights and rear parking will turn off for the duration of the
NOTE: lights of the vehicle in the visual turn signal activation. Once the turn
• To activate this feature the lights field of the camera should be signal is deactivated, the DRL light will
must be turned off (“0” position) broken, covered in mud or light up again.
within 45 seconds of placing the obstructed, high beam headlights NOTE:
ignition in the OFF or ACC position. will remain lit for longer, up to a
closer position of the oncoming or Depending on your Country’s
• The headlight delay time is regulations (for example: on Canadian
programmable using the MTC foregoing vehicle. Dirt, impurities
and other obstructions on the vehicles DRL are always on), DRL lights
System, see “MTC Settings” in may be turned on and off. Where the
section 4. windshield or camera lens can cause
the system to function improperly. regulations permit, the DRL lights can
be turned on and off using the MTC
SmartBeam™ System (for • By replacing the windshield or
System, see “MTC Settings” in section
versions/markets, where SmartBeam™ mirror, the
4 for further information.
SmartBeam™ mirror must be
provided)
re-aimed to ensure proper
The SmartBeam™ system provides performance. Please contact Adaptive Bi-Xenon Headlights
increased forward lighting at night by exclusively the Authorized Maserati The gas-discharge (xenon) headlights
automating high beam control (“Auto Dealer for replacement. operate with an electric arc saturated
Dim High Beams” function) through with Xenon gas under pressure,
the use of a digital camera fitted instead of the incandescent filament.
behind the rearview mirror. The light produced is assuredly higher
compared to traditional light bulbs, in

101
 Understanding the Vehicle
terms of quality (brighter light) as well subsequently start up different AFS headlight system combines the
as the span and positioning of the strategy. light beam with the steering angle to
illuminated area. The advantages offered by the AFS assure better visibility of the road
The headlight system combines the system are perceived especially in case surface when driving in a curve,
light beam with the steering angle to of bad weather, and for highway steering or in the event of road
assure better visibility of the road driving (see comparison rendered deviations.
surface when driving in a curve, below): this surely increases driving
steering or in the event of road safety.
deviations. Furthermore, the projectors are WARNING!
3 suitable to prevent glare. If xenon headlamp replacement is
NOTE:
necessary, contact the Authorized
• Each time the adaptive headlight
Maserati Dealer only: DANGER - RISK
system is turned on, the headlights
OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK.
will perform a self-regulation cycle.
• The adaptive headlight system is
active only when the vehicle is
moving forward.
• “Steering Directed Headlights”
function can be turned on or off
using the MTC System, refer to “MTC
Settings” in section 4 for further
The table shows the light values (lux)
information.
and the light flux (lumen) of AFS
AFS Adaptive Feature (for headlights.
versions/markets, where provided)
Lighting Light flux
These projectors combine the “xenon”
Technology with the AFS (Advanced (A) Low beam 75 lux 1200 lm
Frontlighting System) adaptive High beam 130 lux 1600 lm
feature, using a camera located in (B) Highway 120 lux (Driver Side)
front of the rearview. The System is 1200 lm
140 lux (Passenger Side)
able to process signals of the camera
and other onboard systems and

102
 Understanding the Vehicle

Fog Lights
The rear fog lights switch is built into
the lights switch.
To activate the rear fog lights, turn the
headlight switch to the low beam
light or “AUTO” position. Press
the lights switch to turn on the
rear fog lights.
3
NOTE: Turn Signals
The rear fog lights will NOT activate Move the multifunction lever all the
automatically when turning on the way up or down until the stop trigger;
low beam or “AUTO” headlights the left or right arrow on respectively
if previously deactivated by turning the speedometer and Rev Counter
the lights switch off. The rear fog instrument cluster, flashes to show
lights will only turn on by operating proper operation of the front and rear
the switch as previously described. turn signal lights.
Pressing again the lights switch will
deactivate the rear fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
Turning the lights switch off (position The multifunction lever controls the
“0”) will also deactivate the rear fog operation of the turn signals,
lights. headlight beam selection and
A dedicated telltale in the instrument overtaking lights.
cluster illuminates when the rear fog The multifunction lever is fitted on the
lights are turned on. left side of the steering column.

103
 Understanding the Vehicle
High Beams and Flashing You can signal another vehicle with
To switch on the high beams with the your headlights by lightly pulling the
light switch in headlamp or multifunction lever toward you. This
“AUTO” position, shift the will turn on the high beams headlights
multifunction lever onward. until the lever is released.
A related telltale will illuminate Flashing occurs also with lights off
on the Rev Counter. (lights switch in position “0”) if the
Pulling the lever backward (toward the ignition switch is RUN position.
steering wheel) you switch off the
3 high beams and switch on the low
To activate lane change function, tap beams.
the lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent. The turn
signals (right or left) will flash three
times then automatically turn off.
This function is useful when
overtaking or changing lanes.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does
not flash, or flashes at a fast rate,
check for a defective outside light CAUTION!
bulb. If an indicator fails while The high beams can only be switched
moving the lever, then the indicator on manually by pushing the left-hand
bulb is probably defective. lever forward.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will
appear in the instrument cluster and
a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km ) with either turn signal on.

104
 Understanding the Vehicle
To protect the battery, the interior • steering wheel backlight controls
lights will turn off automatically 10 LED;
WARNING! minutes after the ignition switch has • front footrest light;
If the high beams are activated, they been shifted to OFF. This occurs if the • front seats night lighting.
will turn on automatically every time interior lights were turned on
the low beams are switched on either manually or by opening of a door. The
manually or automatically. We glove box light, share the same
recommend therefore that you switch characteristics excepting the trunk
them off when they are no longer light.
necessary and every time the twilight To adjust interior lights, either turn 3
sensor deactivates the external lights. the ignition switch out of OFF or
rotate the multifunction lever out of
Entry/Exit Illumination “0” position.
The compartment courtesy lights and Courtesy Dimmable Lights
the exterior lights can be switched on
The following dimmable courtesy
and off when entering or exiting the
lights, can be set with the regulation
vehicle by pressing the buttons on the
device:
remote control and/or from the
Passive Entry System. Check • instrument cluster dials and display;
“Illuminated Entry/Exit” in section 2 • dome light (front/rear);
for further information. • inside door handle LED;
Interior Lights
The interior and external approach
lights turn on and off when
entering/exiting the vehicle (see
“Illuminated Entry/Exit” in section 2
for further information).
The brightness of the lights can be
manually adjusted with the regulator
positioned beside the multifunction
lever.

105
 Understanding the Vehicle
Interior Lights Regulator (only with 1st Dimmable position: allows The left regulator switch has 4
Headlights without AFS functions) minimum to maximum different positions:
brightness tuning of the 0 Stable position: lower level of
NOTE:
instrument cluster dials, (OFF) the internal lighting.
• The left regulator operates only with
display, control switches and
park lights or low beams lights on. 1st Dimmable position: allows
MTC’s backlight, including all
• The right regulator adjusts the minimum to maximum
displayed messages and night
headlights leveling: see “Headlights brightness tuning of the
lighting.
Leveling” in this chapter. instrument cluster dials,
2nd Stable position: allows display, control switches and
3 maximum brightness set. MTC’s backlight, including all
3rd Stable position: allows to displayed messages and night
switch on the main and lighting.
reading lights of the front 2nd Stable position: allows
dome light. maximum brightness set.
3rd Stable position: allows to
Interior Lights Regulators (only with
switch on the main and
Headlights with AFS functions)
reading lights of the front
dome light.

The regulation device rotates from NOTE:

position “0” upward and back
The left regulator operates only with
downward performing stable and
park lights or low beams lights on.
dimmable positions.
This regulator switch has 4 different
positions:
Stable position: lower level of
0
the internal and night
(OFF) The regulation devices rotate from
lighting.
position “0” upward and back
downward performing stable and
dimmable positions.

106
 Understanding the Vehicle
The right regulator has 2 different A heavy load will weigh the vehicle
positions: down and, as a consequence, the light
0 Stable position: night beam will be raised. In this case it is
(OFF) lighting off. important to adjust the beam to a
correct level using the right regulator
1st Dimmable position: allows
located on the side of the light switch.
minimum to maximum
brightness tuning of the
front dome light LED and the
night lighting. 3
NOTE:
Dome Lights
The right regulator is only active if the The front and rear part of the dome,
switch is in “AUTO” or in low beam include each a central and two
mode . reading lights.
The central light automatically turns
on when one of the doors is opened
Headlights Leveling (only with
The regulator has 3 different and turns off when the door is closed
Headlights without AFS (timed switching off). The light may be
functions) positions:
switched on manually by pressing the
0 One or two people on the front central button.
A correct headlights leveling is crucial
seats. The reading lights are controlled by
for the safety of the vehicle’s
occupants and of people in the street. 1 Four or five people in the the respective side buttons.
Moreover it is included in the road vehicle. If they are turned on by pressing the
regulation law. 2 Four or five people + load in button, both central and reading
In order to obtain the best visibility the trunk. lights will stay on for about 10
conditions while driving with minutes after turning the engine off,
headlights on, the headlight beam During the regulation, the different and will then turn off gradually.
must be properly leveled. positions (0, 1 and 2) are visualized on When the exterior lights are switched
Headlights leveling must be adjusted the TFT display. on, the two night LEDs fitted on the
at every change of the weight and side of the buttons will light up to
position of the passengers and/or of facilitate use of the shift lever and the
the load carried. central console.

107
 Understanding the Vehicle
If one or more doors are opened, the Hazard Warning Flashers
front and rear dome lights will turn on
Press the indicated button on the
for 27 seconds. If the door is closed
center of the control panel to turn on
before this time, the lights will dim
the hazard warning flashers. The
and subsequently switch off after
operation is independent from the
about 3 seconds.
ignition key position.
NOTE: Press the button again to turn them
The dome lights will also turn on by off.
3 pressing the or button for When these lights are on, the turn
centralized doors unlock and lock on signals, the related indicator light on
In the event of a collision causing the instrument cluster and the button
the key fob RKE transmitter. See
automatic interruption of fuel supply, itself will flash.
“Illuminated Entry/Exit” section 2 for
the dome lights switch on
further information.
automatically and remain lit for
approx. 15 minutes.
NOTE:
The sunroof and/or the HomeLink (if
foreseen) controls can be found on the
front dome light.

108
 Understanding the Vehicle

Integrated External Rear View Windshield Wipers and

Mirror Lights Washers
Driver and passenger external mirrors
are supplied with LED turn signals The multifunction lever operates the
integrated on the support. windshield wipers and washer when
The LED turn signal indicators flash the ignition switch is placed in RUN or
simultaneously with the ACC position. The multifunction lever
corresponding turn signal lights in the is located on the left side of the
front and rear of the vehicle. Turning steering column.
A low fluid level of windshield 3
on the hazard warning lights will also
activate these LEDs. washers is indicated by the indicator Windshield Wipers
light and by the message on the
• Rotate the end of the multifunction
instrument cluster.
lever to one of the four settings to
To refill the fluid, see “Maintenance
activate the automatic intermittent
Procedures” in section 7.
setting (see “Rain Sensing Wipers”
paragraph in this chapter).
• For low speed wiper operation
(stable position "LO"): rotate the
end of the multifunction control
lever forward to the first trigger
after the intermittent setting.
• Rotate to the second trigger after
the intermittent setting for
high-speed (stable position HI) wiper
operation.
• Rotate the end of the lever
downward to the “MIST” position to
activate a single wipe cycle. The
wipers will continue to operate until
you release the multifunction lever.

109
 Understanding the Vehicle
• To turn the wipers off rotate the Rain Sensing Wipers (for
lever to “OFF”. versions/markets, where
CAUTION!
provided)
• The rain sensing feature may not
CAUTION! This feature detects moisture on the
function properly by ice or dried salt
windshield through an internal rear
• Turn the windshield wipers off when water on the windshield.
view mirror integrated sensor, which
driving through an automatic car • Use of RainX® or products containing
automatically activates the wipers.
wash. The windshield wipers may be wax or silicone may reduce rain
Rotate the end of the multifunction
damaged if the wiper control is left sensor performance.
3 in any position other than “OFF”.
lever to one of four settings to adjust
the detection system. The rain sensing system has protective
• In cold weather, always turn off the Wiper delay position 1 is the least features for the wiper blades and
wiper switch and allow the wipers to sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is arms. It will not operate under the
return to the park position before the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be following conditions:
turning off the engine. If the wiper used for normal rain conditions.
switch is left on and the wipers • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit: the
The rain sense wipers will
freeze to the windshield, the wiper rain sensing feature will not operate
automatically change between an
motor may be damaged when the when the ignition is in RUN position,
intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a
vehicle is restarted. the vehicle is stationary and the
fast wipe depending on the amount of
• Always remove any buildup of snow outside temperature is below 32 °F
detected moisture sensed by a
that prevents the windshield wiper (0°C), To resume, set the automatic
particular area of the windshield.
blades from returning to the off feature on the multifunction lever,
Place the wiper switch in the “OFF”
position. If the windshield wiper start the engine and drive or wait
position when you do not want to use
control is turned off and the blades until the outside temperature rises
the automatic intermittent system.
cannot return to the off position, the above freezing.
The rain sensing feature can be turned
wiper motor may be damaged. on and off using the MTC System, see • Neutral Wipe Inhibit: the rain sensing
“MTC Settings” in section 4 for further feature will not operate when the
information. ignition is placed in the RUN
position, the transmission shift lever
is in the N (Neutral) position and the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).

110
 Understanding the Vehicle
To resume, set the multifunction brought in a position enabling the Always use “Service” position for any
lever to the automatic function or opening of the wiper arms and intervention on the wiper blades.
move the shift lever out of N change of the blades. It is possible to
(Neutral). use the panic position for a maximum Windshield Washers
of 3 times within two minutes,
Headlights On with Wipers corresponding to different the blades To use the washer, push the end of the
positions on the windshield. When multifunction lever inward (toward
When activating this function, the
completed bring the ignition switch in the steering column) and hold it as
headlights will light up approximately
RUN: the arms will reposition. If long as washer spray is desired.
10 seconds after the wipers are turned
necessary move the multifunction If you activate the washer while the 3
on if the headlight switch is placed in
lever to other required operating windshield wiper control is in the
“AUTO” position. In addition, the
positions. automatic intermittent range, the
headlights switch off when the wipers
wipers will operate for two wipe
are turned off (position “OFF”) if they
cycles after releasing the lever and
were previously turned by using this
then resume the previously selected
function. Powering on Headlights with
intermittent interval.
wipers can be activated and
If you activate the washer while the
deactivated with the MTC System, see
windshield wiper is turned off (OFF)
“MTC Settings” in section 4 for further
the wipers will operate for three wipe
information.
cycles and then turn off.
Wipers Blades Maintenance
When the wiper arms are in “P” (park
position) it is not possible to check or
replace the blades (Service position) as
they are folded under the hood. To
service the blades it is necessary to WARNING!
shift the multifunction lever to “OFF” Operate or service the wiper blades
and the ignition switch to OFF without deactivating the wipers
position. (“OFF” position) leaving the ignition
Shift the control lever within 15 switch in RUN can be dangerous for
seconds to the “MIST” panic position the operator since the rain sensor may
(counterclockwise rotation of the twist suddenly activate the wipers.
switch) and release. The blades are

111
 Understanding the Vehicle

Interior Features not covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Electric Power Outlets
• Do not start the windshield washer
during the cold months until the The vehicle is equipped with three 12
windshield has warmed up. If it has Volt (13 Amp) electric power outlets, WARNING!
not warmed up, the liquid could one available for each front seats, one To avoid serious injury or death:
freeze on the glass and block your for rear seats passengers and one
• Only devices designed for use in this
view. fitted in the trunk.
type of outlet should be inserted
3 All power outlets are supplied only
• Sudden loss of visibility through the into any 12 Volt outlet.
when the engine is started or the
windshield could lead to a collision. • Replacing the fuses that protect
ignition device set on ACC or RUN.
You might not see other vehicles or power outlets with others of higher
Power outlets are protected by a fuse.
other obstacles. To avoid sudden amperage, there is the risk of fire.
Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug
icing of the windshield during
into the power outlets to ensure • Do not touch with wet hands.
freezing weather, warm the
proper operation. Otherwise, check • Close the lids when the plug is not
windshield with the defroster before
the matching fuse integrity, see “Fuse used and while driving the vehicle.
and during windshield washer use.
Replacement” in section 7 for further
information. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may
cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!
• Do not plug in accessories that
exceed the maximum power of 160
Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
• Power outlets are designed for
accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlets
as this will damage the outlet and
blow the fuse. Damages caused by
improper use of the power outlet are

112
 Understanding the Vehicle
Power Outlet inside the Cup Holder Rear Power Outlets
To access the power outlet inside the A 12 V power outlet inside the armrest
cup holder beside the shift lever, press between the seats, is available upon
the cover as indicated to open request for rear seat passengers (see
completely. “Rear Seats” in this section).

WARNING!
High power consumption items 3
plugged into this outlet for long
Power Outlets inside the Central
periods may discharge the battery
Console
and/or prevent the engine from
starting. To access the power outlet located
inside the glove box of the central
console you need to open the half-lids
as indicated in the following Power Outlet inside the Trunk
paragraph.
The power outlet is positioned on the
right side of the trunk.

113
 Understanding the Vehicle

Cup Holders The storage and passenger

compartment share the same air
The vehicle is equipped with several
conditioning even though you may
cup holders.
exclude the air conditioning of the cup
holder compartment by moving the
CAUTION! indicated button.

• Use light and shatterproof

containers.
3 • Do not forcefully push unsuitable
containers into the cup holders to
Pressing the indicated button, the
prevent damage to the containers.
half-lids will rise completely enabling
• Do not store hot drinks. access to the inner compartment
where the two cup holders are
Front Seats Cup Holders located.
The front cup holders are located
within the central console beside the To close one or both of the half-lids,
transmission shift lever. push them down to the locking
To access the cup holder, push the lid position.
as shown in the picture and it will
open completely.

114
 Understanding the Vehicle
Rear Seats Cup Holders AUX and USB Port The AUX auxiliary port features:
Two cup holders are available in the The AUX and USB ports are located • typical input impedance between
frontside of the rear seats central inside the compartment behind the AUX-IN and AUX_REF: 13 Kohm;
armrest, press the button as shown in transmission shift lever. To access the • max. applicable voltage: 0.75 Vrms at
the picture to access them. ports, push the lid as indicated: it will 1 kHz;
open completely. • input compatible only with 3.5 mm
jack connectors (not included).
Any player with these characteristics
and analog audio output (headset 3
output type) can be served by the MTC
System. The system can recognize the
connection to a player outlet
autonomously enabling access to the
audio functions connected to this
source.
The USB port , available by
removing protection cap, allows the
data exchange and charge of the
connected source. If there are MP3
files on the USB device, they will
automatically start playing. If you are
already listening music from a
different source you need to select the
USB function to start playing audio
contents (refer to the MTC guide).
Another USB port can be present
inside the armrest between the rear
seats (see “Rear Seats” in this section).

115
 Understanding the Vehicle

iPod® Connection Sun Visors By lowering the visor you can access
® the courtesy mirror with incorporated
An iPod can be connected to the Sun visors can be folded to the front
light illuminating automatically (with
system via USB and AUX ports by and to the side of the vehicle. To move
the ignition switch in RUN) by raising
means of a special cable (optional). the visor laterally, lower and release it
the mirror protective cover. Before
The MTC will then control the from its catch as indicated.
raising the visor, close the mirror cover.
following functions: play, pause, fast
A paper holder is fitted inside each sun
forward, rewind, next track, previous
visor.
track, random or repeat mode,
3 selection and navigation of
playlist/genre/singer/album/Podcast.

CAUTION!
Do not leave your USB device, iPod® or
an external audio source in the vehicle
for extended period of time: extreme
temperatures and humidity can occur
in the vehicle.

116
 Understanding the Vehicle

Smoking Kit (optional) The rear seat passengers can use the Handholds and Cloth Hooks
removable ashtray by inserting it into
The kit includes a lighter and a Handholds are fitted above the
the rear doors pocket, while the
removable ashtray with cover. passenger doors. Once grabbed, they
lighter can be inserted into the power
The Smoking kit for front seats will lower until the block position.
outlet (if foreseen) inside the armrest
passengers is located inside the box When released, a return spring will
between the rear seats.
beside the transmission shift lever and bring them back to the original
Pressing the central button activates
can be accessed by pressing the cover position.
the cigarette lighter. After about 20
as indicated.
seconds the button returns
automatically to the initial position 3
and stops the heating: now the
cigarette lighter is ready for use.

CAUTION!
After use, always make sure that the
cigarette lighter is switched off.

Rear handholds also include a cloth

hook.
WARNING!
• The cigarette lighter reaches high
temperatures. Handle it carefully
and do not allow children to use to
avoid risk of fire and injury!
• The cigarette lighter may not be
used as a power outlet.

117
 Understanding the Vehicle

Map Pockets iPad Holder (Genuine Cargo Area

Front seats are fitted with map Accessory)
pockets, on the rear of the seatbacks, The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
and accessible by rear passengers. provide you with all information about WARNING!
the “Maserati iPad Holder” mounted To help protect against personal injury,
on the rear of the front seatbacks, passengers should not be seated in
available in the Genuine Accessories the rear cargo area. The rear cargo
range. space is intended for load carrying
3 purposes only, not for passengers,
who should sit in seats and use seat
belts.

Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity

The load carrying capacity of your
vehicle is shown on the vehicle
homologation label positioned on the
CAUTION! driver's side rear door pillar.
Do not put heavy or sharp objects in
the map pockets.

The information indicated on the label

concerns passengers and luggage
loading operations.

118
 Understanding the Vehicle
Do not exceed the specified Gross than the top of the seatback. This
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the could impair visibility or become
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) dangerous in a sudden stop or
front and rear. collision.
The GVWR is the total allowable
weight of your vehicle. This includes The trunk is the most suitable place to
driver, passengers, and cargo. load bulky and heavy objects onboard
The total load must be limited so that the vehicle. The maximum allowable
you do not exceed the GVWR load on the floor of the trunk is 440 lb
indicated on the label. (200 kg). 3
To load your vehicle properly, store
heavier items below and be sure you
WARNING! distribute their weight as evenly as
possible.
After loading the vehicle, before
Stow all loose items securely before
driving, adjust the headlight beam
start driving as they could move
leveling using the specific regulator (if
during the trip.
available) as described in chapter
Light objects can be stored in the net
“Lights” in this section.
pocket on the right side of the trunk.
To fasten heavy and bulky luggage
Vehicle Loading inside the compartment a luggage net
with hooks anchored to the floor is NOTE:
available upon request. The hooking
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
WARNING! eyelets of the net are positioned on
provide you with information about
• Improper weight distribution can the floor and on the rear wall of the
the available Genuine Accessories for
have an adverse effect on the way trunk.
the trunk compartment.
the vehicle steers, handles and the
way the brakes operate.
• Never drive with the trunk open.
Exhaust gases can enter the
passenger compartment.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher

119
 Understanding the Vehicle

Loading with Rear Seatbacks

Down
The 60/40 split-folding seatback of the
rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility.
The seatback folded down provides a
continuous nearly-flat extension of the
load floor able to accommodate large
3 sized equipment and objects (such as
the “Maserati Ski and Snowboard
Bag”) that may not fit with the normal Folding the Short (40) Seatback Side Folding the Long (60) Seatback Side
dimensions of the trunk. The short (40) seatback side fold down • Press the red button located on the
easily by pulling tab between the front of the buckle using the free
NOTE:
seatback and the side bolster. latch plate and unlatch the plate
• To safely store the Ski and from the left-side buckle.
Snowboard Bag, tilt forward the
short seatback side. Secure the rear
hook of the bag to the eyelet located
on the rear wall of the trunk
compartment. Wrap the belt around
the seat back of the folded seat and
fasten the belt buckle. Tighten the
belt as much as necessary to prevent
the bag from moving.
• Both seat backs can be reclined
independently.
• Allow the belt to retract completely
into the retractor seat behind the
seatback.
• Unlatch the long (60) seatback side
by pulling tab between the seatback
and the side bolster.

120
 Understanding the Vehicle

WARNING! WARNING!
Do not leave free the head restraint of • Make sure that the seatback is
the center seat in the passenger securely locked into position. If the
compartment: in the event of an seatback is not securely locked into
accident it could be dangerous for position, the seat will not provide
passengers. the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly
• Fully fold down the long seatback. latched seat could cause serious 3
When the short or both seatbacks are injury.
• Partially fold down the long
folded to the upright position, make • The cargo area in the rear of the
seatback side and remove the head
sure they are latched by strongly vehicle with the rear seatbacks in
restraint of the center seat, by
pulling on the top of the seatback the folded down position should not
pressing at the same time the push
above the seat strap. be used as a play area by children
buttons located at the foot of the
head restraint. In this way it is when the vehicle is in motion. They
avoided that the fully reclined seat could be seriously injured in a
back touches the edge of the central collision. Children should be seated
console. and use proper restraint system.
• Accommodate the head restraint in
a safe location.

NOTE:
When the seatback is folded to the
upright position, make sure the
seatbelt of the rear central position is
in the proper condition for use.

121
 Understanding the Vehicle

Power Sunroof with • In a collision, there is a greater risk

of being thrown from the vehicle if
Sunshade (if foreseen) the sunroof is open. Always fasten
The sunroof is power controlled and your seat belt properly and make
can only be operated with the ignition sure all passengers are properly
switch in RUN position. It can slide secured too.
lengthways and be raised at the rear • Do not allow small children to
(tilting). operate the sunroof. Never insert
By opening the sunroof a front flap fingers, other body parts, or any
3 rises automatically in order to deviate object through the opening sunroof.
the air flow. The sunshade can be opened manually.
However, the sunshade will open
automatically as the sunroof opens. CAUTION!
The sunshade cannot be closed if the
sunroof is open. • In the event of rain, always close the
sunroof to prevent water infiltrations
from staining the fabric/leather
upholstery.
WARNING!
• Do not open the sunroof if there is
• Improper use of the sunroof can be
ice on it: risk of damage.
dangerous, even if it features a
finger-trap prevention system.
Before and during the sunroof Slide Opening Sunroof
The power sunroof controls are
located between the sun visors on the operation, always make sure that • Full automatic express opening
overhead console. passengers are not exposed to the Press the button rearward for more
risk of injuries caused by the moving than half second and the sunroof
roof or by personal objects dragged will open automatically regardless
or hit by the moving sunroof. of any previous position. The
• Never leave children in a vehicle sunroof will open fully and stop
with the key fob RKE transmitter in automatically. During this operation,
the passenger compartment. if any sunroof button is pressed, the
sunroof will stop.

122
 Understanding the Vehicle
• Full or partial manual opening Pinch Protect Feature To Close the Power Sunroof
To open the sunroof manually press This feature will detect an obstruction with RKE Transmitter and
the rearward button for less than in the opening of the sunroof during Ignition Off
half second to move step by step express close operation. If an When the ignition switch is in OFF
the sunroof panel. obstruction is detected, the sunroof position, if the sunroof is open, it can
Venting Sunroof will automatically retract. If this be closed together with the windows
occurs, remove the obstruction then by pressing the button on the RKE
Press and release the central button, press the forward button and release transmitter (refer to “Power
and the sunroof will open to the vent to express close. Windows” in Section 2).
position. This is called “Express Vent”, 3
and will occur regardless of sunroof NOTE: • Press and release the button.
position. During this opening If three consecutive attempts to close • Press a second time the button
operation, any movement of the the sunroof result in pinch protect and keep it pressed until the sunroof
button will stop the sunroof. reversals, the fourth attempt will be is completely closed.
manual, with pinch protect feature NOTE:
Closing Sunroof disabled.
• Full automatic express closing Pressing the button on the RKE
Pinch Protect Override transmitter will only open the
Press the forward button for more
windows but will have no effect on
than half second and the sunroof If any obstruction (ice, debris, etc.)
the sunroof.
will close automatically regardless prevents closing the sunroof, press the
of any previous position. The forward button and hold for two
sunroof will close fully and stop seconds after the reversal occurs. This Wind Buffeting
automatically. During this allows the sunroof to move toward Wind buffeting can be described as
operation, if any button is pressed, the closed position. the perception of pressure or a
the sunroof will stop. helicopter-type sound. Your vehicle
NOTE:
• Full or partial manual closing may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Pinch protection is disabled while windows down, or the sunroof in
To close the sunroof manually press
pressing the forward button. certain open or partially open
the forward button for less than
half second to move step by step positions. This is a normal occurrence
the sunroof panel. and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open,
then open the front and rear windows

123
 Understanding the Vehicle
together to minimize the buffeting. If HomeLink® (Optional)
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof
open, then adjust the sunroof opening HomeLink® replaces up to three WARNING!
to minimize the buffeting. hand-held transmitters that operate • Your motorized door or gate will
automatic devices that open garage open and close while you are
Ignition Off Operation doors and gates, enable/disable the programming the universal
The power sunroof controls will lighting or security systems. The transceiver. Do not program the
remain active for up to approximately HomeLink® unit is powered by your transceiver if people, pets or other
ten minutes after the ignition switch is vehicles 12 Volt battery. The objects are in the path of the door or
3 in OFF position. Opening either front HomeLink® buttons that are located in gate. Only use this transceiver with a
door will cancel this feature. The the overhead console designate the garage door opener that has a “stop
ignition system timing can be set using three different HomeLink® channels. and reverse” feature as required by
the MTC System (see “MTC Settings” in The HomeLink® warning light is Federal safety standards. This
section 4). located above the center button. includes most garage door opener
models manufactured after 1982. Do
Sunroof Maintenance not use a garage door opener
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a without these safety features. Call
soft cloth to clean the glass panel. toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon
monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not
run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury
NOTE:
or death.
HomeLink® is disabled when the
vehicle security alarm is active (see
“Vehicle security alarm” in section 2).

124
 Understanding the Vehicle

General Information Before You Start Programming • If you have any problems, or require
This device complies with FCC rules HomeLink® assistance, please call toll-free
1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Be sure that your vehicle is parked at www.HomeLink.com for
Operation is subject to the following outside of the garage before you information or assistance.
two conditions: begin programming.
• This device may not cause harmful For more efficient programming and
interference. accurate transmission of the
• This device must accept any radio-frequency signal it is
interference that may be received recommended that a new battery be 3
including interference that may placed in the hand-held transmitter of
cause undesired operation. the device that is being programmed
to the HomeLink® system.
NOTE: Before starting programming it is
• The transmitter has been tested and necessary to erase the standard codes
it complies with FCC and IC rules. memorized on the HomeLink® device
Changes or modifications not during the production phase. To erase
expressly approved by the party such codes: System with devices provided
responsible for compliance could
• place the ignition device in the RUN with rolling codes
void the user’s authority to operate
position without starting the engine; Programming the hand-held
the device. transmitters
• press and hold the two outside
• The term IC before the
HomeLink® buttons (I and III) until For programming garage door/gate
certification/registration number
the warning light starts flashing openers that were manufactured after
only signifies that Industry Canada
(after approximately 20 seconds); 1995.
technical specifications were met.
• release the buttons. These devices can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” setting button
NOTE: located where the hanging antenna is
• Erasing the standard codes should attached to the garage door/gate
only be performed when opener. It is NOT the button that is
programming HomeLink® for the normally used to open and close the
first time. Do not perform this door.
operation to program additional The name and color of the button may
buttons. vary by manufacturer.

125
 Understanding the Vehicle
• Place the ignition device to the RUN every attempt, keep the setting NOTE:
position without starting the engine. position for at least 15 seconds If the garage door opening device
• Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to before trying again. does not activate, press the button a
3 inches (5 - 30 cm) away from the third time for two seconds and then
HomeLink® button you wish to Synchronizing the rolling codes release it to complete the
program. At the end of the previously described programming/synchronization phase.
• Simultaneously press and hold both programming, if the HomeLink® has
the Homelink® button you want to been programmed for a rolling code • To program the remaining two
program and the hand-held system, it will be necessary to HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step
3 transmitter button. synchronize it to ensure its correct for each remaining button. DO NOT
• Continue to hold buttons until the operation. erase the channels.
warning light starts flashing quickly; • Locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
then release both buttons. setting button of the opening motor. Button
The quick flashing light indicates that Firmly press it and then release it. On To reprogram a channel that has been
the channel with the new frequency some garage door openers/devices previously trained, follow these steps:
has been acquired and programmed there may be a light that blinks
correctly by the HomeLink® system. when the garage door opener/device • Place the ignition device to the RUN
is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. position without starting the engine.
NOTE: • Press and hold the desired
• On the last versions of this device it is NOTE: HomeLink® button.
no longer necessary to keep the You have 30 seconds in which to • Without releasing the button
button on the transmitter and the initiate the next step after the setting proceed with “Programming the
HomeLink® buttons pressed; you just button has been pressed. hand-held transmitters” from second
have to release the HomeLink® step and follow all remaining steps.
button immediately and keep only • Return to the vehicle and press the
the first one pressed. programmed HomeLink® button for
• The distance necessary between the two seconds and then release it.
portable hand-held transmitter and • Repeat this operation a second time.
the HomeLink® in the vehicle If the garage door opening device
depends on the system you wish to activates, the programming/
program. Probably it will be synchronization phase is complete.
necessary to try several times. Upon

126
 Understanding the Vehicle

System with devices without • Press and hold the programmed Security
rolling code HomeLink® button.
It is advised to erase all channels
If the garage door opener/device
Programming the hand-held before you sell or turn in your vehicle.
activates, programming is complete.
transmitters To erase the channels press and hold
To program the remaining two
For programming garage door the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I
HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step
openers manufactured before 1995. and III) until the warning light starts
for each remaining button. Do not
flashing (after approximately 20
• Turn the ignition device to the RUN erase the channels.
seconds).
position without starting the engine. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver 3
• Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to Button is disabled when the vehicle security
3 inches (5 to 30 cm) away from the alarm is active (see “Vehicle security
To reprogram a channel that has been
HomeLink® button you wish to alarm” in section 2).
previously trained, follow these steps:
program.
• Simultaneously press and hold both • Place the ignition device to the RUN Troubleshooting Tips
buttons until the warning light starts position without starting the engine.
If you are having trouble
flashing quickly; then release both • Press and hold the desired programming HomeLink®, here are
buttons. HomeLink® button. some of the most common solutions:
The quick flashing light indicates that • Without releasing the button
• Replace the battery in the original
the channel with the new frequency proceed with “Programming the
hand-held transmitter.
has been acquired and programmed hand-held transmitters” from second
correctly by the HomeLink® system. step and follow all remaining steps. • Press the LEARN button on the
garage door opener to complete the
NOTE: Using HomeLink® training for a rolling code.
The distance necessary between the To operate, press and release the • Did you unplug the device for
portable hand-held transmitter and programmed HomeLink® button. programming and remember to plug
the HomeLink® in the vehicle depends Activation will now occur for the it back in?
on the system you wish to program. programmed device (i.e., garage door If you have any problems, or require
Probably it will be necessary to try opener, gate operator, security system, assistance, please call toll-free
several times. Upon every attempt, entry door lock, home/office lighting, 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
keep the setting position for at least etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the www.HomeLink.com for information
15 seconds before trying again. device may also be used at any time. or assistance.

127
 Understanding the Vehicle

Air Conditioning
Distribution

128
 Understanding the Vehicle

Adjustable and fixed air vents allow • The fixed vents under the dashboard There are also vents placed at the
Air Conditioning System to achieve and below the front seats aim to rear end of the central console,
the optimal comfort conditions. ventilate the lower part of the adjustable by rear passengers. These
passenger compartment. vents can be adjusted in vertical and
• The fixed vents, positioned on the
horizontal direction, by operating on
upper part of the dashboard,
the central paddle 1, as indicated in
beneath the windshield and above
the following pictures. The rotor 2,
the front part of the front door
located near each air vent, allows to
panels are meant to guarantee the
adjust the air flow.
demisting and defrosting of the
3
windshield and the side windows.

• The adjustable air vents are located

at the center and at the side ends of
the dashboard. They have the
purpose of ventilating the upper
part of the passenger compartment.

129
 Understanding the Vehicle

3
NOTE:
In order to avoid the obstruction of
the windshield defrost vents, it is
recommended not to place objects on
the dashboard.

130
4 – Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
MTC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Slot for SD Memory Card and CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Dashboard Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Phone and Voice Controls on Steering
Wheel (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

131
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Instrument Cluster The odometer setting should be Warning Lights on Analog

maintained following the repair or Instruments
The instrument cluster is divided into service.
three main areas displaying Keep a record of the odometer Warning Lights on Speedometer
information, symbols and text and/or mileage before any repair or service to Following tell tales are displayed on
icon messages. ensure that the odometer is properly the speedometer, and related
A. Analog speedometer. It indicates reset. messages are visible for 5 seconds on
the vehicle speed in MPH. Speedometer and Rev Counter display sector 1 of the display, unless
the main warning lights (see “Warning otherwise indicated (see “TFT Display”
B. Rev Counter. paragraph in this chapter).
Lights on Analog Instruments” in this
C. TFT display. chapter). The other warning lights are
displayed in the lower part of the TFT
NOTE: display (see “Warning Lights on
4 Display” in this chapter).
The image shows the instrument
cluster before starting the engine.
In the TFT area, the odometer display
shows the total distance the vehicle
has been driven.
U.S. Federal Regulations requires that
upon transfer of vehicle ownership,
the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has
been driven.
If your odometer needs to be repaired
or serviced, the repair technician
should leave the odometer reading the
same as it was before the repair or
service. This repair should be
performed by an Authorized Maserati
Dealer.

132
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Malfunction warning messages will be The failure could cause high exhaust
stored in “Stored Messages” (see emissions, loss of performance, poor
example in picture). vehicle handling and high fuel CAUTION!
consumption levels. • When the ignition switch is in the
Should this occur, proceed with RUN position and if the indicator
caution to your Authorized Maserati light does not switch on or if it
Dealer without heavy throttle switches on while driving, contact
application or driving at high speeds. the Authorized Maserati Dealer as
Obey all applicable local traffic soon as possible.
regulations. • Prolonged driving with the MIL on
The indicator light will go out if the could cause damage to the engine
problem is no longer present. control system. It also could affect
The error will be registered by the
system in any case.
fuel economy and drivability. If the 4
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss
The Malfunction Indicator will soon occur. Immediate service is
Light (MIL) is part of an WARNING! required. In addition, the OBDII
onboard diagnostic system, Engine exhaust, some of its system incorporates a diagnostic
called OBD II, that monitors constituents, and certain vehicle connector that can be interfaced
engine and automatic transmission components contain or emit chemicals using diagnostic equipment. This
control systems. known to the State of California to makes it possible to read the error
Under normal conditions, this cause cancer and birth defects or codes stored in the control unit,
indicator should illuminate when the other reproductive harm. In addition, together with a set of specific
ignition switch is in RUN position and certain fluids contained in vehicles parameters for the engine operation
switch off once the engine has been and certain products of component diagnostic cycle, for compliance with
started (the MIL does not shut off wear contain or emit chemicals CARB & EPA OBDII regulations.
immediately). known to the State of California to
This is a sign of the indicator light cause cancer and birth defects or
working properly. If the indicator other reproductive harm.
remains lit or switches on while
driving, there is a failure in the fuel
supply/ignition and emission control
systems.

133
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Left Turn Signal Indicator Light When the system detects a ignition switch is in RUN position,
The indicator lights up when malfunction, the monitoring light and please visit an Authorized Maserati
the left turn signal or the the related message will flash for Dealer as soon as possible to restore
hazard flashers are turned on. approximately one minute and then the Anti-Lock brake function.
The indicator light will flash at remain lit. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
the same frequency of the turn signals This sequence will continue upon Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and is controlled by the stalk switch subsequent vehicle startups as long as
The ESC activation/malfunction
lever. the malfunction lasts.
indicator light on the
If the vehicle electronics sense that the When the malfunction indicator lights
instrument cluster will display
vehicle drives for more than 1 mile up, the system may not be able to
when the ignition switch is in
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a detect or signal low tire pressure
RUN position.
continuous sound will alert the driver correctly.
It should switch off by starting the
to turn the signal off. Please refer to “Tire Pressure
4 Monitoring System (TPMS)” in section
engine.
If the indicator flashes at a rapid rate, If the light stays on with the engine
check for a defective exterior light 5 for further information.
running, there is a malfunction in the
bulb. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light ESC system.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Light This light, and its related If the light still stays on after several
This warning light is connected message, indicate possible ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
to the Tire Pressure malfunctions of the Anti-Lock been driven for several kilometers at
Monitoring System (TPMS). Brake System (ABS). more than 30 mph (48 km/h) speed,
Under normal conditions, the The light will turn on when the visit an Authorized Maserati Dealer as
warning light should illuminate when ignition switch is in RUN position and soon as possible to have the problem
the ignition switch is in RUN and may stay on for 4 seconds. If the ABS diagnosed and serviced.
should go off once the engine is light remains lit or turns on while
NOTE:
started. driving, the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and Each time the ignition switch is in RUN:
If the warning light remains lit or
illuminates while driving, the pressure requires service. However, the • The ESC off indicator light and the
of one or more tires is too low and a conventional brake system will ESC activation/malfunction indicator
message will be displayed. continue to operate normally if the light illuminates temporarily.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is warning light is switched off. If (Continued)
connected to the low tire pressure the ABS light turns on while driving, or
monitoring light. if it does not switch on when the

134
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
(Continued) brake fluid level mat be low or a
• When the ESC is functioning, the problem with the anti-lock brake
system will make buzzing or clicking system (ABS) reservoir may have
sounds. This is normal. The sounds occurred.
will stop once ESC becomes inactive In all the above situations, a related
and the road conditions that caused message will be displayed.
the ESC activation no longer persist. If the light still illuminates when the
parking brake has been disengaged,
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF and the fluid level is at the full mark
Indicator Light on the master cylinder reservoir, there
This light indicates that the Rear Fog Light Indicator could be a brake hydraulic system
Electronic Stability Control is malfunction or a problem with the
disabled. The related message This indicator lights up when
brake booster detected by the
will be displayed. the rear fog light is switched
ABS/ESC system.
4
on.
Warning Indicators on Rev Counter If this occurs, the light will remain lit
High Beam Indicator until the problem has been solved.
Following indicator lights and linked If the problem concerns the brake
messages are displayed on the Rev This indicator lights up when
the high beams are switched booster, the ABS pump will run when
Counter on sector 1 of the display (see engaging the brake and a brake pedal
“TFT Display” in this chapter). on or when are flashed by
using the multifunction lever. pulsation may be felt during each stop
Push the left multifunction lever of the vehicle.
forward to switch the headlights to Inefficiency of one of the dual brake
high beam function, and pull toward system cycle is indicated by the brake
yourself (back to normal position) to warning light, which will turn on
reset the low beams. when the brake fluid level in the
master cylinder has dropped below a
Brake Indicator Light certain level.
This light monitors various The light will remain lit until the
brake functions, including problem has been diagnosed and
brake fluid level and parking serviced.
Malfunction messages will be stored in brake engagement. If a brake failure occurs, visit the
“Stored Messages” (see example in If the brake light illuminates the Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as
pictures). parking brake may be engaged, the

135
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
possible in order to have the brake system may have failed, resulting in
system checked and serviced. increased braking distances and the
In the event of an Electronic Brake risk of an accident. Have the vehicle WARNING!
Force Distribution (EBD) failure, both checked as soon as possible at an If the warning light remains ON or if it
the brake indicator light and the ABS Authorized Maserati Dealer. does not illuminate or illuminates
light illuminate. while driving, contact your Authorized
Immediate repair of the ABS system is Air Bag Indicator Light Maserati Dealer as soon as possible.
required. This light will illuminate for a
Functioning of the brake warning light Right Turn Signal Indicator
few seconds for a bulb check
can be checked by turning the ignition when the ignition switch is in This indicator lights up when
switch from OFF to RUN position. RUN. If the light does not the right turn signals or the
The light should illuminate for illuminate while starting the engine, hazard flashers are switched
approximately 2 seconds. stays lit, or switches on while driving, on.
4 The light should switch off unless the The indicator will flash at the same
have the system checked at an
parking brake is engaged or a brake Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as frequency of the turn signals and is
fault is detected. If the light does not possible. controlled by the turn signal lever.
illuminate, have the warning light In the latter case, the message will If the vehicle electronics sense that the
checked by an Authorized Maserati remain displayed: to hide it, press ◄ vehicle drives for more than 1 mile
Dealer. on the steering wheel right side. (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a
The light will also switch on when the continuous sound will advise the driver
parking brake is engaged with the to turn the signal off.
ignition switch in RUN position. If the indicator flashes at a fast rate,
This light only indicates the brake is check for a defective outside indicator
engaged but not the clamping force of light bulb.
the parking brake to the wheels. To Seat Belt Reminder Light
fully engage the parking brake, please
refer to “Parking Brake” in section 5. When the ignition switch is in
RUN, the seat belt reminder
light will light up for a few
seconds as a bulb check.
WARNING!
See “Supplemental Restraint System During the bulb check, you will hear
Driving a vehicle with the red brake an acoustic signal if one or both front
(SRS) – Air bags” in section 2 for
light on could be very dangerous and seat belts are unbuckled.
further information.
is not recommended. Part of the brake
136
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
After the bulb check or while driving, TFT Display 4 Position within the submenus
if a seat belt remains unbuckled, the and scroll arrows (example: 1 of
When operating, the TFT Display is
seat belt reminder light will illuminate 5).
divided into sectors including menus
in addition to the acoustic signal and a There can be maximum 9
and sub-menus, running data,
message will indicate which belt is displayable submenu positions.
warning lights and messages.
unbuckled. When the number of submenu
The different sectors of the display
points exceeds 9, the points are
layout are shown in the following
replaced by a numerical value
picture.
WARNING! within the scroll arrows (in the
Maserati urges you to use the seat example: 12).
belts correctly fastened and adjusted 5 Submenu Titles.
at all times. Correct use of the seat 6 Menu Instruction.
belts can help reduce the risk of
7 (P, R, N, D, M) shift position 4
serious injury in the event of an
indicator.
accident. Do not pass seat belts over
sharp edges. They could tear. Do not 8 Sport or Normal driving mode.
pin anything to the seat belts. This 9 Gear engaged.
could reduce their initial strength and 10 Complete Odometer.
cause them to tear in the event of a
11 Engine Temperature Gauge.
crash. 1 Main area.
12 Fuel Gauge.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” 2 User-selectable information
13 Distinctive Quadrants for
in section 2 for further information. (data, time, temperature,
indicators according to priority
compass, etc.).
and function (see “Indicators on
3 Main menu titles with scroll Display” in this chapter).
arrows.

137
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
The display background may change Main- and Submenu Press and release the switch (►) to
according to the type of message Operate the controls on the right side enter the information screens or a
displayed. of the steering wheel to scroll, modify submenu. Keep the switch (►) for 2
and program the Main- and Submenu. seconds to restore the selected/
visualized functions.
The sub-menu title selected will be
displayed in sector 5 (Submenu Title).
Within a submenu, press and release
the switch in the ▲ and ▼ arrow
directions to scroll the menu.
Press the ◄ button to return to the
main menu from an item of interest or
from an information screen.
4
• Blue color: normal conditions.
• Yellow color: low-critical warning. Press and release the multifunction
• Red color: high-critical warning. switch in the ▲ and ▼ arrow
directions to scroll upwards and
downwards the main menu titles.
The main screen area in sector 1 (Main
Area) will be updated and the selected
title will be shown in sector 3 (Main
Menu Title).

138
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Main Menu & Submenu Content Overview
Pos. Main menu Submenus
From mph
DIGITAL SPEED-
1. to km/h or vice
SPEEDOMETER
versa
AWD Torque
Individual Tire Transmission Oil
2. VEHICLE INFO Oil Pressure Distribution
Pressure Monitor Temperature Temperature
(AWD model only)
Current, Range,
3. FUEL ECONOMY
Average
Distance,
Average, Avg. 4
4. TRIP A
speed, Elapsed
Time
Distance,
Average, Avg.
5. TRIP B
speed, Elapsed
Time
Current media
6. AUDIO
Source and track
STORED Example: Coolant
7.
MESSAGES Low
Cluster upper left Cluster upper right Restore
8. SCREEN SETUP
information information Defaults
Electric Parking
9. VEHICLE SETTINGS Set Speed Warning
Brake Disable

139
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
1. DIGITAL SPEED — SPEEDOMETER • Individual tire pressure monitor
Press and release the central switch in Indicates the pressure of each single
the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until tire (see example below). Please
"Digital Speed" is displayed. refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Pressing and releasing the switch (►) System (TPMS)” in section 5 for
will toggle the unit of measure further information.
between mph or km/h.
Press and release the ◄ button to
return to the main menu.

• AWD Torque Distribution (AWD

model only)
4 Displays a vehicle icon with torque
distribution in front and rear axle
and “AWD” if all wheel drive is
active. Displays “RWD” if all wheel
• Transmission temperature drive is inactive.
Displays the current transmission
temperature.
2. VEHICLE INFO • Oil Temperature
Press and release the switch in the ▲ Displays the current engine oil
or ▼ arrow directions until "Vehicle temperature.
Info" is displayed. • Oil Pressure
Press and release the switch (►) to
Displays the current engine oil
access the submenu.
pressure (see example).
Press and release the switch in the ▲
or ▼ arrow directions to scroll through
the following information displays and Press and release the ◄ button to
in the (►) arrow direction to visualize return to the main menu.
the selected information.

140
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
3. FUEL ECONOMY • Fuel economy average in mpg or The screen will display the following:
Press and release the switch in the ▲ l/100km • Distance traveled in miles or km
or ▼ arrow directions until "Fuel Shows the average fuel economy Shows the total covered distance
Economy" is displayed. since the last reset. since the last reset.
Press the central switch (►) for 1 • Average consumption in mpg or
second and release to reset the Fuel l/100km
Economy “Average”.
Shows the average fuel
When the fuel economy is reset, the consumption since the last reset.
display will read “Reset” or show
• Average speed in mph or km/h
dashes for two seconds.
Shows the average speed since the
Then, the history information will
last reset.
be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average • Elapsed Time 4
reading before the reset. Shows the total time of travel since
The screen will display the following: Press and release the ◄ button to the last reset in
return to the main menu. “hours:minutes:seconds” Elapsed
• Current fuel economy in mpg or Time will increment when the
l/100km 4. TRIP A – 5. TRIP B
ignition switch is in the RUN or
Shows the instantaneous fuel Press and release the switch in the ▲ START position.
economy. or ▼ arrow directions until "Trip A" or
Press the central switch (►) for 1
“Trip B” is displayed.
• Range in miles or km second and release to reset Trip A or
Shows the range since the last fuel Trip B.
average reset. Press and release the ◄ button to
When the fuel economy is reset, the return to the main menu.
display will read “Reset” or show
dashes for two seconds.
Then, the history information will
be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average
reading before the reset.

141
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
6. AUDIO Press and release the switch in the ▲
Press and release the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions to scroll the
or ▼ arrow directions until “Audio” is stored messages.
displayed. When the number of messages
exceeds 9, the submenu points will be
replaced by a numerical value
indicating the message number. Press
and release the switch (►) to view the
selected message (for example
“Transmission too Hot”). Press and
7. STORED MESSAGES release the ◄ button to return to the
main menu.
Press and release the central switch in
4 the ▲ or ▼ arrow directions until
“Stored Messages” is displayed.
The display will show the audio status The system will either display the
(source and information) as set on the number of the stored messages (if any
MTC. It is possible to display up to 13 available) or “No Stored Messages” as
alphanumeric characters. Displays shown in picture.
Audio Status are:
• AM: Frequency;
• FM: Frequency, Station provided info;
• CD: Track info;
• UCI/BTSA with metadata: Artist,
Song, Album.
Press and release the ◄ button to
return to the main menu.

142
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
8. SCREEN SETUP • OK.
Press and release the switch in the ▲ • Cancel.
or ▼ arrow directions until “Screen For the “Upper Right” and “Upper
Setup” is displayed. Left” titles there are following
Press and release the switch (►) to options:
access the submenu. • None.
If the vehicle exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h),
• Compass.
this feature is locked out and the main
screen shows “Screen Setup • Outside Temperature.
Unavailable While in Motion”. • Date.
Scroll the positions on the menu with • Time (see picture).
the switch in the ▲ or ▼ arrow
directions: 4
• Restore Defaults.
• Upper Right (see picture).

Operate this function with the vehicle

stopped and transmission in P (Park) • Time & Date.
position. • Range to Empty.
In order to enter a function, press the • Average fuel consumption MPG (or
switch (►) as shown in the picture. L/100km).
• Upper Left. • Current fuel consumption MPG (or
Press and release the central switch L/100km).
(►) to view the options related to the • Trip A Distance.
menu title selected. • Trip B Distance.
For the “Restore Defaults” title there
are following options:

143
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ The images show the default items, 9. VEHICLE SETTINGS
arrow directions to view the selectable which are also displayed on the upper With ignition switch in RUN position
item. A check mark will remain next to part of the MTC. press and release the switch in the ▲
the previously selected item until a or ▼ arrow directions until “Vehicle
new selection is made. Settings” is displayed.
Press and release the switch (►) to Press and release the switch (►) to
select an item. “Setting Saved” access the submenu.
notification appears as a popup for 2 If the vehicle exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h),
seconds, then the display will show the this feature is locked out and the main
last modified item. screen shows “Vehicle Settings
Unavailable While in Motion”.

Operate this function with the vehicle

stopped and transmission in P (Park)
position.
Press and release the ◄ button to In order to enter a function, press the
return to the main menu. switch (►) as shown in the picture.

144
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Example: How to modify the Speed Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼
Warning Status arrow directions to view the selectable
Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼ options.
arrow directions to view the selectable Speed values are in loop, keeping the
items. switch pressed in the ▲ or ▼ arrow
Press and release the switch (►) to directions will increase scroll speed.
select “Speed Warning”. Press and release the switch (►) to
select the option. A check mark will
remain next to the previously selected
item until a new selection is made.
Scroll with the switch in the ▲ or ▼
arrow directions to view the selectable
item: 4
• Electric Park Brake;
• Speed Warning.
NOTE:
In order to modify the “Electric Park Press and release the switch (►) once
Brake” function, please see chapter again to view the related options:
“Parking Brake” in section 5. “Off” is the default status.
The “Setting Saved” notification
appears as a popup for 2 seconds,
then the display will show the last
modified item.

145
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Examples of this message type are
"Right Front Turn Signal Light Out"
and "Tire Pressure” low (as shown in
the picture).

When the set speed is exceeded, the Messages on Main Display Area
driver is alerted by an acoustic signal, a The main display area also displays
4 telltale indicating the speed limit, and "pop up" messages. These pop up
a pop-up message indicating that the messages fall into several categories:
limit has been exceeded. • Unstored Messages
• Five-Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions This message type is displayed until
occur, this type of message appears the condition that activated the
on the main display area for five message is cleared.
seconds and then returns to the Examples of this message type are
previous screen. Most of the "Turn Signal On" (if a turn signal is
messages of this type are then left on) and "Lights On" (if the
stored (as long as the condition that driver leaves the vehicle).
activated it remains active) and can
be reviewed from the "Stored
Messages" main menu item. As long
The pop-up message and the telltale as there is a stored message, an "i"
will be displayed for 5 seconds before will be displayed in the
returning to the previous menu. compass/outside temp sector.

146
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
• Unstored Messages with Ignition • Five-Second-displayed Navigation Warning Lights on Display
Switch in RUN Messages
NOTE:
This message type is displayed until When the navigation menu is
• In sector 13 of the display more
the ignition switch is in RUN enabled on the MTC, information
telltales are displayed while
position. An example of this pop ups will be displayed for 5
dedicated messages are shown on
message type is "Press Brake and seconds while changing direction or
sector 1 for 5 seconds, unless
Push Button to Start" (as shown in approaching a turning point.
otherwise indicated.
the picture). On highway, the first pop up will be
• Malfunction messages will be saved
displayed at 2 miles (3.2 km) from
in “Stored Messages”.
the turn, on roadway, at 1 mile
(1.6 km).

• Five-Second Unstored Messages

When appropriate conditions occur,
this type of message appears on the
main display area for five seconds While approaching the turn, further
then returns to the previous screen. pop ups will be displayed starting at
Examples of this message type are 430 yd (400 m) from the turning
"Memory System Unavailable point and the countdown to 0 miles
Vehicle Not in Park" and (meters).
"Automatic High Beams Enabled".

147
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Charging System Warning Light triggering and acoustic signal by engine hood (see “Maintenance
This telltale shows the status reaching the set threshold. Procedures” in section 7).
of the electrical charging If the warning light switches on while If the problem persists, contact an
system. If the telltale stays on driving, safely pull over and stop the Authorized Maserati Dealer.
or comes on while driving, vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it Engine Oil Temperature Indicator
turn off some of the vehicle's off. Also, shift the transmission into N
(Neutral) and idle the vehicle. If the This light indicates that the
non-essential electrical devices or engine oil is overheated. The
increase engine speed (if at idle). If the temperature does not return to
normal, immediately turn the engine indicator is combined with the
charging system telltale remains on, it related displayed message. In
means that the vehicle is experiencing off and contact an Authorized
Maserati Dealer. this case, drive carefully until the
a problem with the charging system. temperature drops back to normal
IMMEDIATELY contact an Authorized Check “Engine Overheating” in section
6 for more information. level and the indicator light turns off.
4 Maserati Dealer to have the vehicle If the problem persists, contact an
serviced. Low Oil Pressure Indicator Authorized Maserati Dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to Under normal conditions, the
“Jump Start Procedures” in section 6. Low Engine Oil Level Indicator
warning light illuminates
Automatic Transmission Failure when the ignition switch is This indicator and the related
Indicator turned to RUN and goes off as displayed message, indicate a
soon as the engine is started. low engine oil level.
This indicator and related
If the warning light stays or turns on The engine oil level must be
displayed message, indicate
while driving, the engine oil pressure is checked with the dipstick fitted under
transmission failure. If the
too low. The warning light is combined the engine lid (see “Maintenance
failure permits, slowly drive to
with a displayed message and an Procedures” in section 7).
the nearest Maserati Service Center.
acoustic signal that will last 4 minutes. Power Steering Failure Warning Light
Engine Temperature Warning Light
In this case, turn the engine off This warning light, and the
This warning light notifies immediately and carry out the related message, illuminate
when the engine is necessary checks. when the Electric Power
overheated. As temperature Do not operate the vehicle until the Steering is not operating and
rises and the gage displayed in problem has been checked and serviced. needs service.
sector 11 approaches “H”, this warning This light does not indicate the oil level. If the problem persists, contact an
light will illuminate combined with the The engine oil level must be checked Authorized Maserati Dealer.
related displayed message, and with the dipstick located under the

148
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) with consequent high temperature in Door Ajar Indicator
Indicator the exhaust system. This indicator illuminates
This light combined to the when one or more doors are
related message displayed on ajar. The indicator will show
sector 1 for 5 seconds, WARNING! which door is ajar. When one
indicates a failure of the • If the warning light is accompanied or more doors are open, a related
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) by the message “Catalyst Temp message will be displayed if the
system. If the indicator turns on while Getting Hot Reduce Speed”: the vehicle is running at speed 5 mph
driving, have the system checked by temperature of the catalytic (8 km/h) or faster.
the Authorized Maserati Dealer. converters is too high. The driver Trunk and Engine Lid Ajar Indicators
When detecting a failure, the light must slow down immediately until
indicator will illuminate while the the warning light turns off. These light indicators will
engine is running. Cycle the ignition illuminate to indicate that the
• If the message “Catalyst Temp Hot trunk or engine lid is ajar.
4
switch when the vehicle has
Stop Safely Wait To Cool” appears When the trunk or engine
completely stopped and the shift lever
after decelerating: the temperature compartment is open, a
is placed in P (Park) position: the light
in the catalytic converters has related message will be
indicator should turn off.
reached an abnormal level and the displayed with the warning
If the indicator remains lit with the
catalytic converters could be indicator if the vehicle is running at
engine running, you can still drive
damaged. Drive slowly to the speed 5 mph (8 km/h) or faster.
your vehicle. However, contact the
nearest workshop.
Authorized Maserati Dealer as soon as Low Fuel Indicator
possible. • If the light turns on permanently 3
times the engine will stop. It will be When the fuel level reaches
If the indicator is flashing while the
possible to restart the vehicle only approximately 4.2 Gallons
engine is running, immediate service is
after a key-off / key-on cycle. Then (16.0 L) this light will turn on,
required. You may experience reduced
slowly drive to the nearest Maserati and remain on until fuel is
performance, an elevated/rough idle
Service Center. added; the related message will also
or engine stall and your vehicle may
be displayed.
require towing. • Maserati is not responsible for
Refer to “Refueling” in section 5 for
Catalyst Over Temperature Indicator damage deriving from non-
fuel filling.
compliance with the above
This warning light, and the mentioned warnings.
related message, light up if
the engine runs irregularly

149
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Windshield Washer Low Fluid If this warning light turns on, safely displayed and an acoustic signal is
Indicator pull over and stop the vehicle. triggered to warn the driver of the risk
This indicator will illuminate Then, shift the transmission into P of icy roadbed.
for 5 seconds to indicate a low (Park) and run the engine at idle or Under such conditions, we recommend
level of the windshield washer faster until the temperature drops and to use the I C E drive mode (see
fluid. A related message will the light switches off. If the problem “Automatic Transmission” in section 5)
be displayed. persists, contact an Authorized drive carefully and slow down as the
See “Maintenance Procedures” in Maserati Dealer. grip of the tires may be significantly
section 7 for fluid filling. reduced.
The warning light flashes for 5 seconds
Adaptive Light Control System Failure CAUTION! and switches off when the
This indicator, and the related Continuous driving with the temperature reaches 43°F (6°C) or
message, indicate a failure of transmission temperature warning higher.
4 the automatic headlight light illuminated will eventually cause
Brake Pads Wear Warning Light
aiming system. severe transmission damage or failure.
Please contact an Authorized Maserati This warning light and the
Dealer to check the system. related message indicate that
the brake pads have reached
Suspension Failure Indicator
WARNING! their wear limit.
This indicator light and the If the transmission temperature Please contact an Authorized Maserati
related message turn on warning light is illuminated and you Dealer to have them replaced.
during driving if there is a continue operating the vehicle, in Electric Parking Brake Failure Warning
failure of the suspension some circumstances you could cause Light
system. the fluid to boil over, come in contact
Please contact an Authorized Maserati This warning light and related
with hot engine or exhaust
Dealer to check the system. message illuminate when
components and cause a fire.
there is an EPB system failure.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Ice Hazard Warning Light The failure could also completely or
Light
partially block the vehicle because the
This warning light and the When the external parking brake could remain on even
related message indicate that temperature falls below 37°F after it has been automatically or
the transmission fluid (3°C), the temperature value manually disengaged though its
temperature is rising. blinks for a few seconds, the controls. In this situation it is possible
warning light turns on, a message is to release the parking brake by
150
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
following the emergency release To turn off the message temporarily, further information, check “Electronic
procedure as indicated in chapter press and release the ◄ button. To Cruise Control” in section 5.
“Emergency Release of the Parking reset the oil change indicator system Gear Shift Indicator Light
Brake” in Section 6. please visit a Maserati Service Center.
If it is still possible to use the vehicle This indicator lights up to
Indicators in Sector 13 of the Display indicate gear shift change in
(parking brake not engaged) drive to
the nearest Authorized Maserati Electronic cruise control, gear shift, order to optimize fuel
Dealer and remember to performing lights on and headlight leveling consumption, see “Drive
each operation/command that the indicators are displayed in sector 13 on Mode” in section 5 for further
electric parking brake is not the right side of the total odometer. information.
functioning. Electronic Cruise Control ON Indicator Park/Headlight On Indicator
Speed Limit Exceeded Warning Light This light indicator and This indicator will illuminate
This warning light and related related message will when the park lights or 4
message illuminate when the illuminate when the electronic headlights are turned on.
set speed limit is exceeded (in cruise control is ON. For For further details, see
the example shown: 40 mph further information, check “Electronic “Lights” in section 3.
or km/h). Cruise Control” in section 5. Headlight Leveling Indicator
Oil Change Required Indicator Electronic Cruise Control in Stand-by This indicator is visualized on
Indicator the right side of the TFT
The “Oil Change Required”
This light indicator and related display while the headlight
message flashes on the display
message will illuminate when beam level is being adjusted.
for approximately 5 seconds
the electronic cruise control is in See “Lights” in section 3 for further
after an acoustic signal and it
stand-by. For further details.
indicates that the next scheduled oil
information, check “Electronic Cruise
change is due.
Control” in section 5.
The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which Electronic Cruise Control SET Indicator
means the engine oil change interval This light indicator and
may fluctuate according to your related message will
personal driving style. Unless reset, illuminate when the electronic
this message will continue to display cruise control is SET. For
each time you cycle the ignition to the
RUN position.
151
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Service AWD System Message (AWD Infotainment System This vehicle is provided with a
model only) description of the MTC System features
The message on the TFT display will This vehicle is equipped with the and listing of warnings and
illuminate when all wheel drive infotainment Maserati Touch Control precautions, which are essential for
feature requires service. For further (MTC) System, an advanced user safe use of the system. Maserati
information refer to “All-Wheel Drive” interface which combines innovative advises you to read this addendum
in section 5. and exclusive technical features carefully and thoroughly.
integrating entertainment, user
settings, air conditioning, navigation,
communication and information
features within a single system.
The MTC System features an audio
system which is acoustically optimized
4 for this specific vehicle.

WARNING!
The navigation system assists the
driver while driving, providing advice
and suggestions, by voice guidance
and graphic information, for the best
route to reach the set destination. The
suggestions provided by the
navigation system do not relieve the
driver from full responsibility for the
maneuvers made through traffic while
driving, or from compliance with road
regulations and other provisions
regarding road traffic. The person
driving the vehicle is always and in
any case responsible for safe driving
on the road.

152
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

MTC Controls Hard Keys the label is facing up. Press the
• SD Card slot lateral button to eject the disc.
MTC System has a series of tools,
controls and soft-keys that are Insert an SD Card containing any • ON/OFF and Volume
designed to use external multimedia navigation information, perform Press the central button (1) to turn
resources and different audio options, navigation functions and play the unit on or off. Rotate the
to change settings and to perform media files (music and images). external regulator on the central
other functions. • CD/DVD slot button (1) to adjust the volume.
All controls are positioned in the If the ignition is switched off
To be used when in Player mode.
central part of the dashboard. (ignition switch in OFF) with the
When inserting a disc, make sure
1 ON/OFF and Volume control. radio in stand-by mode, the radio
2 Enter/Browse and Tune/Scroll
knob. 4
3 Card slot.
4 CD/DVD slot.
5 “Radio” soft-key.
6 “Player” soft-key.
7 “Controls” soft-key.
8 “Climate” soft-key.
9 “Nav” soft-key.
10 “Phone” soft-key.
11 “Settings” soft-key.

153
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
memorizes the stand-by mode for • Player soft-key (6) Audio Controls
recall at the next ignition cycle. Press the Player soft-key to access
Press the central button to turn the media sources such as: Disc, USB The vehicle is equipped with audio
radio on. Device and AUX as long as the controls that allow both driver and
requested media is present. front passenger to operate the audio
It is possible to eject the CD and to
system without using the touch-screen
display the time if the system is off. • Controls soft-key (7) keys on the MTC display. These
The navigation software is always Press the Controls soft-key to access controls can be used to adjust audio
working when the ignition is the Settings list. Controls such as; volume, change radio station or mode
switched on, even if the radio is in Heated Seats, Heated Steering (AM, FM, CD, etc).
standby mode. Wheel, Ventilated Seats, etc. can be
• Enter/Browse and Tune/Scroll selected or turned ON/OFF by Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Press the central button to accept a touching the related soft-key. These sound system controls are
4 • Climate soft-key (8) rocker-type switches with a button in
highlighted selection on the screen.
Rotate the external regulator to Press the Climate soft-key to access the center and are located on the rear
scroll through a list or tune a radio the air conditioning settings. See side of the steering wheel, right
station. “Air Conditioning Controls” in this behind the front switches.
section for further details. The right-hand control manages
Touch-Screen Keys
volume and mode of the sound
The soft keys located on the lower part • Nav soft-key (9) system.
of the MTC display, enable different Press the Nav soft-key to access the By pressing the top of the rocker
function modes as briefly indicated Navigation feature. switch you can increase the volume,
below. For further information refer to • Phone soft-key (10) and by pressing the bottom of the
the dedicated booklet included in the rocker switch you can lower it. Press
Press the Phone soft-key to access
owner documentation. the center button to switch radio
the MTC Phone feature.
• Radio soft-key (5) mode (AM, FM, CD, etc.). The left-hand
• Settings soft-key (11) control functions depend on the
Press the Radio soft-key to enter the
Press the Settings soft-key to access current mode set with the right-hand
Radio mode. The different tuner
the list of settings. control, and are the following ones.
modes: FM, AM and SAT can be
selected by touching the related
soft-keys in the Radio mode.

154
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Radio Operation Rotate the regulation knob clockwise
Pressing the top of the switch will to increase volume, anti-clockwise for
Seek up for the next received station lower volume.
and pressing the bottom of the switch Rotate the right knob to scroll
will seek down for the next received through the menus and change the
station. user’s settings (see “MTC Settings” in
The button fitted in the center of the section 4).
left-hand control will tune to the next
preset station set on the MTC preset
button.
CD Player MTC Side Audio Controls
A light press on the top of the switch On both sides of the MTC display
there are two rotating devices (knobs) 4
will play the next track on the CD.
Pressing the bottom of the switch with a central button.
once will go to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within one
second after the current track begins
to play.
If you press the switch up or down
twice, it plays the second track; three
times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side
rocker switch has no function for a
single-disc CD player. However, if the Press the central button on the left
vehicle is equipped with a side to turn on and off the MTC:
multiple-disc CD player, the center rotate the knob to set the audio
button will select the next available volume.
CD in the player.

155
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Audio System • One 1 in (25 mm) diameter Tweeter,

2 on the upper edges of the
The vehicle is equipped with an audio dashboard and 2 on rear doors.
system that offers superior sound • One 7x10 in (180x250 mm)
quality, higher sound pressure levels Subwoofer on the rear panel below
and reduced energy consumption. the rear window.
The new system maximizes the
• 8–channel amplifier in the trunk.
amplifier and speaker technology
delivering substantially higher
components and system efficiency.
The basic sound system features 8
speakers and can develop a sound
output of 280 W.
4 The basic system includes:
• Four 6.5 in (165 mm) diameter
Woofers, one on each door.
• One 1 in (25 mm) diameter Tweeter,
2 on the upper edges of the
dashboard and 2 on rear doors.

The vehicle can be equipped with a

“Premium” sound system which
features 10 speakers and can develop a
sound output of 600 W.
This system includes:
• Four 6.5 in (165 mm) diameter
Woofers, one on each door.
• One 3.5 in (90 mm) diameter The vehicle can be equipped with an
Midrange diameter, on the top of "High Premium" audio system
the dashboard. including 15 speakers and 1280 W of
sound power, available upon request.

156
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
• 13.7 x 7.9 in (350 x 200 mm) specific booklet included in the on
Racetrack Sub Dual VC: 1 x on the board documentation.
rear parcel shelf. The driver selectable “Video
• 16-channel 1280 Watts Class-D Surround” mode (DSS) is available
amplifier in the trunk. only for video media sources (DVDs,
The system is supplied with a 12 Video CDs, or other video media
channel high efficiency amplifier and supported by the radio). Some audio
is operated by a high voltage tracking will sound better in “DSS” modes,
power supply and drives a 7.5-channel some other in “Stereo” mode.
playback architecture. This audio When in “Audio Surround” mode,
system offers the ability to choose balance is set automatically. Fader
Logic 7® surround sound for any audio control is available in surround mode
source. The high-efficiency speaker but it should be set to the center
position for optimal surround
4
design ensures higher Sound Pressure
Level (SPL) and exceptional dynamic performance.
sound quality.
The speakers are tuned for maximum
efficiency and compatible with the
amplifier output stage ensuring best
updated surround sound processing.
Logic 7® multichannel surround sound
The “High Premium” system includes: technology delivers an immersive,
• 6.5 in (165 mm) CFR Woofer: 2 x 165 accurate sound stage throughout the
mm in the front doors. passenger compartment.
• 6.5 in (165 mm) Black Kevlar Woofer: This surround effect is available from
2 x 165 mm in the rear doors. any audio source - AM/FM/CD/Satellite
Radio or AUX input; and is activated
• 4 in (100 mm) Yellow Kevlar
through the MTC System controls. By
Midrange: 1 x center dashboard, 2 x
selecting “Audio Surround”, you can
in the front doors, 2 x L/R surround.
activate the Logic 7® multichannel
• 1 in (25 mm) MMX Tweeter: 1 x surround-sound technology in your
Center, 2 x on the dashboard L/R, 2 x vehicle. All information on the current
in the rear doors. operational mode are listed in the

157
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

MTC Settings Customer Programmable To make a selection, and enter the

Features — MTC Settings desired function, press the
The MTC System uses a combination of corresponding soft-key on the menu
keys able to access and change the Press the Settings soft-key to display (the picture shown is “Doors and
customer programmable features. the programmable features menu. Locks”).
Touch-screen keys are positioned on
the lower part of the MTC display
centrally of the dashboard.
There is a Scroll/Enter control knob
located on the right side of the MTC
display.
Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60,
4 90), press the button in the center of
the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting (i.e., ON,
In this mode the MTC System allows To scroll through the functions, move
OFF).
you to access following programmable the cursor up or down, or press the
features (some of them are optional arrow ▼ or ▲. Once the desired mode
and may not be available on your is entered, press and release the
vehicle): Display, Clock & Date, Safety touch-screen area of the setting that
& Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & you wish to modify. The new setting
Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote will be highlighted with one or more
Start, Engine Off Options, Audio, boxes to indicate status or possible
Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS XM Setup. variants of the function status. A check
NOTE: mark in a box indicates the current
status of the function. Press the
Only one touchscreen area or key may
checkmark to cancel, or the empty box
be selected at a time.
NOTE: to insert the check mark, and change
For further details refer to the the status of the function.
Maserati Touch Control guide.

158
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Display • Display Brightness with Headlights
After pressing the Display soft-key the Off
following mode settings will be When in this display, you can select
available. the brightness with the headlights
off. Adjust the brightness as
• Display mode
previously explained.
When in this display you can select
one of the auto display settings. To • Set language
change mode status, touch and When in this display, you can select
release the Day, Night or Auto one of available languages for all
soft-key. display descriptions, including the
Once the procedure is completed (for
trip functions and the navigation
example, Display mode) press the ◄
system.
back arrow soft-key to return to the 4
previous menu or press the upper • Units
right X soft-key, to close the settings When in this display, you can select
screen. Pressing the ▲ or ▼ soft keys between US and Metric units of
and the cursor on the right side of the measurement in the instrument
screen will allow you to scroll up or cluster, odometer and navigation
down through the available settings. system. The speed unit, shown in
digital format on the TFT display of
the instrument cluster, is defined
• Display Brightness with Headlights and modifiable through the
On controls located on the right side of
the steering wheel (see “TFT
When in this display, you can select
Display” in chapter “Instrument
the brightness with the headlights
Cluster” of this section).
on. Adjust the brightness with the +
and – setting soft-keys or by • Voice Response Length
selecting any point on the scale When in this display, you can
between the + and – soft-keys. change the voice response length
settings. To change the voice
response length, touch the Brief or
Detailed soft-key.

159
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
• Touchscreen Beep Clock & Date
When in this display, you can turn Time is always visible on the dashboard
on or shut off the sound activated analog clock and in digital format on
by pressure of a touch screen button the instrument cluster and on the MTC
(soft-key). display.
• Control Screen Time-Out
Use this mode to operate the timing
of the control screen display.
• Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed
on Cluster With this feature it is possible to view
By selecting this feature, the and set the following modes.
4 turn-by-turn directions will appear
• Sync with GPS or Radio Time
on the instrument cluster along a
programmed route until the desired When in this mode, time is
destination is reached (see picture). automatically set and synchronized
to the GPS or radio signal.
• Set Time Hours
When in this mode, you can set the
hours manually. To select, touch the
+ or – soft-keys to adjust the hours.

160
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
• Set Time Minutes • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When in this mode, you can set the By selecting this feature, the system
minutes manually. To select, touch will automatically activate the
the + or – soft-keys as done for the windshield wipers if it senses
hours. moisture on the windshield.
• Time Format Lights
When in this mode, you can select Press the Lights soft-key to set the
the time format display. To change following modes.
the current setting, touch and
• Headlights Off Delay
release the 12 Hrs or 24 Hrs button.
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse By selecting this feature, the driver
• Set Date in Cluster (MM/DD/YY) By selecting this feature the outside can choose to have the headlights
When in this mode, you can set the side-view mirrors will tilt downward off or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds 4
date manually in the status bar of when the ignition is in RUN position when exiting the vehicle. To change
the MTC and on the instrument and the transmission shift lever is in the current headlight off delay
panel display. R (Reverse) position. The mirrors will status, touch and release the 0, 30,
Safety & Driving Assistance move back to their previous 60 or 90 soft-key to select the
position when the transmission is desired time range.
Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance”
shifted out of R (Reverse). • Headlights Illumination on Approach
soft-key to set the following modes.
• ParkView Backup Camera By selecting this feature, the driver
• Park Assist
This vehicle can be equipped with can choose to have the headlights
The rear park assist system will scan
the ParkView® rear backup camera off or lit for 30, 60, or 90 seconds
for objects behind the vehicle when
which allows you to see an image of when the doors are unlocked with
the transmission shift lever is in R
the rear surroundings of your the key fob RKE transmitter.
(Reverse) and the vehicle speed is
vehicle whenever the shift lever is
less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
set in R (Reverse). The image will be
system can be enabled with Sound
displayed on the MTC display along
only, Sound + Display, or turned Off.
with a caution note to “check entire
See “ParkSense® Park Assist” in
surroundings”. See “ParkSense®
section 2 for further information.
Park Assist” in section 2 for further
information.

161
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
check-mark appears next to setting, button. See “Passive Entry
showing that setting has been System” in section 2.
selected.
• Steering Directed Headlights
By selecting this feature, the
headlights rotate following the
steering wheel direction change and
change their flux distribution at
high speeds, when the vehicle enters
an town area and when it's raining.
• Headlights with Wipers
• Headlights Dip (Traffic Changeover)
By selecting this feature, while the
By selecting this feature, the
4 headlight lever is in “AUTO”
headlights will change their • Auto Unlock on Exit
position, the headlights will turn on By selecting this feature, all doors
luminous distribution when a
approximately 10 seconds after the will unlock when the vehicle is
left-hand-drive vehicle enters a
wipers are activated. The headlights stopped, the transmission is in P
Country with right-hand-drive
will also turn off when the wipers (Park) or N (Neutral) position and
system and vice versa.
deactivate if they were activated in the driver's door is open.
the current mode. • Flash Lamps with Lock
By selecting this feature, the • Flash Lamps with Lock
• Auto Dim High Beams
headlights will flash when the doors By selecting this feature, the
By selecting this feature, the high headlights will flash when the doors
are locked or unlocked with the key
beam headlights will deactivate are locked or unlocked with the key
fob RKE transmitter.
automatically under certain fob RKE transmitter.
conditions. See “Lights” in section 3 Doors & Locks
for further information. • Sound Horn with Lock
Press the Doors & Locks soft-key to set
the following modes. By selecting this feature, the horn
• Daytime Running Lights
will sound when the doors are
When this feature is selected, the • Auto Door Locks locked or unlocked with the key fob
DRL lights will turn on whenever the This feature allows you to lock the RKE transmitter.
engine is running. To make your vehicle’s door(s) without having to
selection, touch the Daytime • 1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks
press the key fob RKE transmitter
Running Lights soft-key, until a By operating the 1st Press of the Key

162
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Fob Unlocks mode you may set up • Passive Entry
only the driver's door will unlock on By selecting this feature, Passive
the first press of the key fob RKE Entry may be programmed to on or
transmitter button. When 1st off. The default status is on. With
press of key fob unlocks is selected, Passive Entry deactivated, also the
you must press the key fob RKE “Pre-Short Drop” function is
transmitter button twice to disabled (for further information,
unlock the passenger's doors. When refer to “Bodywork Maintenance
unlock all doors by 1st press and Care” in section 7).
selection mode, all doors will unlock
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob
on the first press of the key fob RKE Engine Off
transmitter button. By selecting this mode, the key fob
can be programmed with the This feature allows certain functions
NOTE: driver’s personal position settings. after turning off the engine. 4
st These settings will be implemented
If the vehicle is programmed on 1 • Easy Exit Seat
Press of Key Fob Unlocks: when pressing the button on the
This feature provides automatic
• all doors will unlock no matter which remote control.
driver seat positioning to enhance
Passive Entry equipped door handle Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start driver mobility when entering and
is grasped; By pressing the Auto-on Comfort exiting the vehicle.
• only the driver’s door will unlock soft-key the following setting will be
when the driver’s door is grasped; available.
• with Passive Entry, touching the • Auto-on Driver Heated/Ventilated
handle more than once will only Seat & Steering Wheel with Vehicle
result in the driver’s door opening. Start
If driver door first is selected, once the By selecting this feature the driver’s
driver door is opened, the interior heated seat and heated steering
door lock/unlock switch can be used to wheel will automatically activate
unlock all doors (or use key fob RKE when the temperature is below 40°F
transmitter). (4°C). When temperatures are above
80°F (26°C) the driver vented seat
will turn on.

163
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
• Engine off Power Delay (Power • Balance/Fade • Speed Adjusted Volume
duration after engine shutdown) Use this screen to adjust the Balance This feature increases or decreases
By selecting this feature, the power and Fade settings. volume combined to vehicle speed.
window switches, radio, MTC To change the speed adjusted
System, DVD video system (for volume touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3
versions/markets, where provided), soft-key.
power sunroof, and power outlets
will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition switch is
cycled to OFF. Opening of one front
door will cancel this feature.
The switch-off delay can be canceled
4 (0 seconds) or reduced to 5 minutes
or 45 seconds.
• Equalizer
• Headlights off delay Use this screen to adjust the Bass,
By selecting this feature the Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the
headlights will stay lit for up to 90 settings with the + and – setting • Music Info Cleanup
seconds after turning off the soft-keys or by selecting any point This feature helps organizing music
engine. on the scale between the + and – files for optimized music navigation.
The switch-off delay can be canceled soft-keys.
(0 seconds) or reduced to 60 or 30
seconds.
Audio
This feature enables to view and set
the available audio modes depending
on the type of audio system supplied
on the car.
The following modes refer to the
“High Premium” audio system.

164
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
• Surround Sound (only for “High NOTE: would like to skip followed by
Premium” audio system) On the Maserati website, at pressing the arrow ◄ soft-key.
This feature provides simulated www.maserati.com, or through the • Subscription Information
surround sound mode. To make Authorized Maserati Dealer you may SIRIUS XM Satellite radio requires a
your selection, press Stereo, consult the list of telephones that are user-paid subscription to access
Audience or On Stage. compatible with the MTC, and their these stations.
level of compatibility. It will be necessary to access the
information on the Subscription
Information Screen in order to
subscribe.
Touch the Subscription Info soft key
to access your receiver ID number.
Write down the SIRIUS XM ID 4
numbers for your radio. To activate
SIRIUS XM service, either call the
number listed on the screen or visit
Phone/Bluetooth SIRIUS XM online at
www.siriusxm.com\subscriptions or
Press the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key to
SIRIUS XM Setup call the number listed.
select and connect phones and audio
sources. After pressing the SIRIUS XM Setup
soft-key the following settings will be
• Paired Phones
available.
• Paired Audio Sources
• Channel Skip
By selecting one of these options you
will be notified which phones or SIRIUS XM can be programmed to
which audio sources are combined to designate a group of channels that
the Phone/Bluetooth system. are the most desirable to listen to or
For each option, you can also add a to exclude undesirable channels
device and change the PIN code of the while scanning. To make your
device you wish to connect. For selection, touch the Channel Skip
further information, see the MTC soft-key, select the channels you
guide.

165
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Slot for SD Memory Card Dashboard Compartments Glove Box Driver Side
and CD/DVD There are two glove box
To open the glove box on the driver
side, pull the handle as indicated.
Both slots are located on the center of compartments on the dashboard to
the dashboard, under the air store small items or documents.
conditioning system control devices.

WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with a
compartment lid in the open position.
Cellular phones, music players, and
other handheld electronic devices
4 should be stowed while driving. Use
of these devices while driving can
cause an accident due to distraction, The compartment is ca. 10-12 in (25-30
resulting in death or injury. cm) deep and is lit by two courtesy
lights when open (the light
To insert a memory card into the slot, automatically switches off when the
lift the tab with the “SD” indication compartment is closed).
CAUTION!
and push it inside the slot. To extract
it, press lightly on the card. Do not place objects weighing over
To insert a CD/DVD push it inside the 22 lb (10 kg) in the glove box
lower slot with the label on the upper compartment.
side. To extract it, press the button on
the left side of the slot, as indicated.
Songs and video played from a SD card
or a CD/DVD can be controlled using
the touch screen controls on the MTC
(see the MTC guide) or the remote
controls on the steering wheel (see
“Audio Controls” in this section).

166
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Glove Box Passenger Side The compartment is illuminated by a Analog Clock

courtesy light when open (the light
To open the glove box on the
will automatically switch off when the To adjust the analog clock located on
passenger side, pull the handle as
compartment is closed) moreover, the the center of the dashboard between
shown in the picture.
compartment is also air-conditioned the air outlets, use the MTC System
like the rest of the interior. (see “MTC Settings” in this section).
The air outlet inside the compartment
is located on the lower right side.

The compartment is divided into two

parts: in the lower part you can find
The time can be visualized also on the
the Owner’s documentation, while in
MTC status bar and on the instrument
the upper part you can fit small items.
cluster display (see “MTC Settings” in
this section).
Clock backlight functioning is
combined with the MTC display and
the ignition switch backlight.

167
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Air Conditioning Controls Dual Zone Climate Controls Description of Controls

This system can be operated by using All functions, except the air
The vehicle is equipped with an distribution, MAX A/C and the SYNC
automatic dual-zone air conditioner/ either the automatic climate controls
on the dashboard or the mode, can be set and modified using
heater that adjusts the air temperature the climate control panel or the MTC
in the passenger compartment, in two corresponding keys on the MTC
display. display.
separate left and right side zones.
A demister system can "control" a When the MTC System is in different 1. Climate control on/off
specific area of the windshield, modes (Radio, Player, Controls, etc.) Press the button or the OFF key to
through a sensor located behind the the driver and passenger temperature switch the climate control on/off. The
rearview mirror, and activate a special settings will be indicated on the upper LED on the button and the OFF key
function to prevent or eliminate mist. part of the display. will illuminate when the A/C is on.
The sensor is enabled upon ignition NOTE:
4 and whenever the user presses one of
For vehicle equipped with Remote
the automatic function buttons
Start, the Air Conditioning System will
(AUTO).
not function during Remote Start
operation if the climate control is left
CAUTION! in OFF.
To help ensure proper functioning of
the sensor, do not apply adhesive 2. A/C
parking stickers, etc. in the “checking” Press to change the current air
area between the sensor and the conditioning (A/C) setting; the
windshield. Therefore, keep the indicator illuminates when the A/C is
windshield and the sensor clean to on. Operating this function will cause
prevent accumulation of dust or other the automatic feature to switch into
impurities. manual mode and the AUTO LED/Key
will turn off.
3. Driver temperature control
Provides the driver with independent
temperature control. Push the ▼
button for cooler temperature. Push
the ▲ button for warmer temperature.

168
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
The driver's temperature setting will blower will cause automatic mode to soft key illuminates when this feature
be displayed on the MTC screen switch to manual. is activated. Operating this function
between the arrows. Pushing the “+” on the climate control will cause the ATC to switch into
panel will increase the speed of the manual mode: so the AUTO LED/soft
NOTE:
blower, while pushing the “-” will key will turn off; the fifth blower
In SYNC mode, this button will also decrease it. On the MTC screen, touch speed will be automatically selected,
automatically and simultaneously the small icon of the blower to unless the blower is not already set to
adjust the passenger temperature. decrease the speed, or the big icon to a higher speed. If this function is
increase it. Between the two icons, turned off the climate system will
4. Passenger temperature control bars will appear to show the number return to the previous setting.
Provides the passenger with of the corresponding selected speed.
independent temperature control. 9. REAR defrosting/demisting
The blower can also be activated/ Press the button/the soft key to
Push the ▼ button for cooler regulated by touching the bars
temperature. Push the ▲ button for between the two blower icons.
turn on the rear window defroster 4
warmer temperature. The passenger's and the heated outside mirrors. A LED
temperature setting will be displayed 7. AUTO indicator will illuminate when the rear
on the MTC screen between the This function automatically controls window defroster and the heated
arrows. the interior temperature by adjusting external mirrors are on.
the air flow rate and the air The rear window defroster and the
NOTE: distribution. Press the AUTO will cause heated external mirrors automatically
Pressing the 4 button while in SYNC the ATC to switch between manual turn off after 10 minutes.
mode will automatically exit SYNC. and automatic mode. The LED on the
button/the AUTO soft key illuminates
5. Recirculation when the AUTO function is activated. CAUTION!
Press to change the current setting, See “Automatic Temperature Control Failure to observe the following
the LED indicator on the button/the (ATC)” in this chapter for more cautions may cause damage to the
relevant soft key illuminates when the information. rear windows defroster:
function is on. 8. FAST defrosting/demisting • Use care when washing the inside of
6. Blower control Press the button/the soft key to the rear window. Do not use
Blower control is used to regulate the switch the airflow setting to the abrasive window cleaners on the
amount of air forced through the windshield and the front side interior surface of the window. Use a
climate system. There are seven windows to get a quick defrosting/ soft cloth and a mild washing
blower speeds available. Adjusting the defogging. The LED on the button/the (Continued)

169
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
(Continued) • “Bi-Level” mode Changing the passenger temperature
solution, wiping parallel to the Air comes from the dashboard vents, setting while in SYNC will
heating elements. Labels can be the central console adjustable vents automatically exit this feature.
peeled off after soaking with warm and the fixed floor vents. A small 12. MAX A/C
water. portion of the airflow is directed Pressing the MAX A/C soft key on the
• Do not use scrapers, sharp through the defrost/demist vents. MTC, the system automatically
instruments, or abrasive window switches to get the maximum cold air
cleaners on the interior surface of NOTE:
flow.
the window. Bi-Level mode is designed to let cooler
• Keep all objects inside the vehicle at air from the dashboard and rear Dual Zone Climate Control
a safe distance from the window. central console vents and warmer air Functions
from the floor vents.
Air Conditioning (A/C)
10. Airflow distribution modes
4 • “Floor” mode
The A/C button allows the operator to
The airflow distribution mode can be manually activate or deactivate the air
adjusted so air comes from the Air comes from the floor vents. A conditioning system. When the air
dashboard vents, floor vents, small portion of the airflow is conditioning system is turned on, cool
demist/defrost vents. directed through the defrost/demist dehumidified air will flow through the
The mode setting keys are located on vents. outlets into the cabin. For improved
the MTC display only and allow • “Mix” mode fuel economy, press the A/C button to
following setting options: Air comes from the floor and the turn off the air conditioning and
• “Dashboard” mode defrost/demist vents. This mode is manually adjust the blower and
Air flows in from the four adjustable recommended for cold climates, to airflow mode settings.
vents of the dashboard and the two improve comfort and prevent When the A/C and AUTO are switched
positioned at the rear of the central fogging. off it is not possible to have air at a
console. Each of these vents can be 11. “SYNC” mode lower temperature than the outside.
singly adjusted. The air vanes of the Press the SYNC soft-key on the MTC to Recirculation
vents can be moved up and down or switch the Sync feature on/off. The When outside air contains smoke,
right and left to adjust air flow SYNC indicator illuminates when this odors, or high humidity, or if rapid
direction. A setting wheel, placed feature is selected. This function is cooling is desired, you may wish to
near each vent, allows to regulate or used to synchronize the passenger recirculate interior air by pressing the
close the air flow. temperature setting with the driver Recirculation control button. The LED
temperature setting. indicator on the recirculation button

170
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
will illuminate when this function is MAX A/C
selected. Push the button a second Activating this function, the system
time to turn off the Recirculation switches to exit AUTO, enter A/C and
mode and allow the entry of outside Recirculation. The minimum
air into the air conditioning system. temperature (LO) in both zones, the
maximum blower speed and the air
distribution are also selected.
The blower speed can be adjusted and
the air distribution can be modified
without exiting MAX A/C. To exit MAX
A/C press the relevant soft key or exit
A/C or Recirculation. Selecting ,
AUTO, or OFF, will also exit MAX A/C.
4
Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC)
Automatic operation
• Press the AUTO key on the A/C panel
or the soft key button on the MTC
screen.
• Set the desired temperature • To provide you with maximum
adjusting the driver and/or comfort in the Automatic mode,
passenger temperature hard or soft during cold start-ups the blower
control buttons. Once the desired speed will remain low until the
temperature is displayed, the system engine warms up.
will achieve and automatically
NOTE: maintain that comfort level.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation • When the system is set up for your
mode may lead to window fogging. comfort level, it is not necessary to
Select the MIX mode and increase change the settings anymore, simply
the blower speed to prevent fogging. allow the system to function
automatically.

171
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls
Manual operation NOTE: • Any time you store your vehicle or
The system allows for manual selection • Recirculation mode without A/C keep it stationary (i.e., during
of blower speed, air distribution mode, should not be used for long periods vacation) for two weeks or more, run
A/C status and Recirculation control. of time, as fogging may occur. the air conditioning system at idle
The blower fan speed can be set to any for about five minutes in the fresh
• Automatic Temperature Controls
fixed speed by adjusting the blower air by high blower setting. This will
(ATC) will automatically adjust the
control. In this case the blower will ensure adequate system lubrication
climate control settings to reduce or
operate at a fixed speed until and minimize the possibility of
eliminate window fogging on the
additional speeds are selected. This compressor damage when the system
front windshield.
allows the front occupants to control is started again.
the volume of air circulated in the • Make sure the air intake, located
vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode. directly in front of the windshield, is
The user can also select the direction
4 of the airflow by selecting one of the
free of obstructions such as leaves or
other objects. Leaves collected in the
available mode settings. A/C operation air intake may reduce airflow, and if
and Recirculation control can also be they enter the plenum, they could
manually selected. plug the water drains. In winter
Operating Tips make sure the air intake is clear of
ice, slush, and snow.
• Continuous use of the air
• The climate control system filters
recirculation in winter, in rainy
outside air containing dust, pollen
weather or humid climate is not
and some odors. Strong odors cannot
recommended because it may cause
be totally filtered out. See
window fogging.
“Maintenance Procedures” in section
• Interior fogging on the windshield 7 for filter replacement instructions.
can be quickly removed by FAST
• The temperature can be displayed in
defrosting/demisting. The “Mix”
U.S. or Metric units by selecting the
mode can be used to maintain a clear
US/M customer programmable
windshield and provide sufficient
feature. See “MTC Settings” in this
heating. If side window fogging
section.
becomes a problem increase blower
speed.

172
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Phone and Voice Controls NOTE: normally in a conversational tone

On the Maserati website, at from the driver’s position towards the
on Steering Wheel front dome light where the voice
www.maserati.com, or through the
(optional) Authorized Maserati Dealer you may command system microphone is
consult the list of telephones that are located.
The controls on the right side of the System recognition of the user’s voice
steering wheel activate/deactivate the compatible with the MTC, and their
level of compatibility. can decrease when the speaking too
phone mode and the voice control quickly or too loudly.
functions.

WARNING!
Any voice-controlled system should be
used only in safe driving conditions 4
following all applicable regulations.
All attention should be kept on
driving. Failure to do so may result in
a collision causing serious injury or
death.
The voice command communication
These functions are only available Phone Mode
system is fully integrated with the
when one or more Bluetooth®
vehicle's audio system. By using the Phone button it is
compatible mobile phones are paired
The volume can be adjusted from the possible to: activate the phone mode,
with the MTC System connection: to
radio volume control knob on the side start a call, show recent incoming and
pair a phone and to learn all available
of the MTC screen or from the outgoing calls, show contact list, etc.
functions refer to the MTC guide.
steering wheel radio controls (see All these functions can also be reached
“Audio Controls” in this section). by using the touch screen commands
The system will automatically mute on the MTC screen.
the radio when using the phone When pressing the button an
mode. audible sound will indicate system
When activating the phone mode readiness to accept a command.
using voice commands with
speakerphone, you should speak

173
 Dashboard Instruments and Controls

Voice Commands
By using voice commands, after
pressing the button, it is possible
to control the AM and FM radio, the
satellite radio and all other media or
devices connected to and controlled by
the “Player” mode (i.e CD player, SD
card, USB/iPod player).
When pressing the button, an
acoustic signal will indicate the system
is ready to accept a voice command.
NOTE:
4
For further details refer to the
Maserati Touch Control guide.

174
5 – Driving

Normal Starting of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Brake and Stability Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Using the Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Use of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Electronic Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Tires - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Driving Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

175
 Driving

Normal Starting of the Before starting the engine, close the gages, Maserati logo and complete
doors, adjust your seat, the inside and odometer, will display.
Engine outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt
and instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
WARNING! The shift lever must be in P (Park) or N
• Hold the brake pedal down when (Neutral) position before you can start
starting the engine. the engine. Apply the brakes before
shifting into any driving gear (see
• It is dangerous to run the engine in
“Automatic Transmission” in this
an enclosed area. The engine
section).
consumes oxygen and discharges
carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide
and other toxic gases in the CAUTION!
atmosphere.
• Before starting the engine, switch off
When doors are opened, the the electrical devices with a high
5 instrument cluster displays the power consumption (air-conditioning
Maserati Logo in the center and the and heating system, heated rear
complete odometer plus the “open window, headlights, etc.).
doors” indicator in the lower part • Do not start the engine if the fuel
of the cluster. level in the tank is low.
The keyless ignition device allows the
driver to operate the ignition switch
by pushing a button, as long as the key The current display subsequently sets
fob RKE transmitter is within the up with the latest screenshot.
passenger compartment (check “Keys” If the engine fails to start, the starter
in section 2 for further information). will disengage automatically after 10
By pressing the brake pedal and seconds. If you wish to stop the
pushing the START/STOP button the cranking of the engine prior to
engine starts and the shift lever starting it, press the button again.
position, engine temperature, fuel

176
 Driving
NOTE: NOTE: After starting the engine, the idle
Normal starting of either a cold or a If the ignition switch is left in the ACC speed is controlled automatically and
warm engine is obtained without or RUN (engine not running) position will decrease as the engine warms up.
pumping or pressing the accelerator and the transmission is in P (Park), the Engine Start Failure
pedal. system will automatically time out
after 30 minutes of inactivity and the
If the driver only pushes the
ignition will switch to the OFF CAUTION!
START/STOP button but does not press
position.
the brake pedal, the ignition switch • Do not attempt to push or tow your
cycles to the ACC position (see “Keys” vehicle to get it started. Vehicles
in section 2) and the instrument equipped with an automatic
cluster displays the latest screenshot. transmission cannot be started this
At the second press of the way. Unburned fuel could enter the
START/STOP button, the ignition catalytic converter and once the
device switches to RUN position (see engine has started, ignite and
“Keys” in section 2) and the damage the converter and vehicle.
instrument cluster displays the latest • If the vehicle battery is dead, booster
screenshot.
5
cables may be used to obtain a start
At the third press of the START/STOP from a booster battery or the
button the ignition switch returns to battery in another vehicle. This type
OFF position and the display powers of start can be dangerous if done
down. improperly. See “Auxiliary Jump
At the fourth press of the START/STOP Start Procedure” in section 6 for
button the screen will display the further information.
following message: “Press Brake and
Push Button to Start”. Flooded engine clearing
If the engine fails to start after you
have followed the described
procedures, it may be flooded. To clear
any excess fuel, move the shift lever in
P (Park) position. Press and hold the
brake pedal, push the accelerator all
the way to the floor and hold it, then

177
 Driving
press and release the START/STOP switch will remain in the ACC Automatic Transmission
button once. The starter will engage position until the shift lever is in P
automatically, run for 10 seconds, and (Park) and the button is pressed The electronic shift lever replaces the
then disengage. Once this occurs, twice from the OFF position. conventional mechanical lever and has
release the accelerator pedal and the • If the shift lever is not in P (Park) and no mechanical connection to the
brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, the START/STOP button is pressed transmission. The transmission is
then repeat the “Normal starting of once, the instrument cluster will operated by electrical actuators on the
the engine” procedure. display a “Vehicle Not in Park” hydraulic system and all commands to
message and the engine will remain the control system are transmitted by
Starting by cold engine
running. the CAN network. The lever itself
Start-off slowly, avoiding sudden
represents a mere user interface. Gear
acceleration and rev the engine at low
positions are simulated by solenoids
medium speeds. High-performance
inside the lever body, which are
driving should be avoided until the WARNING!
computer controlled and enable or
engine temperature reaches 149-158°F Never leave a vehicle out of the P disable certain positions of the lever.
(65-70°C ). (Park) position, as it could move. The solenoids inside the gear lever
5 Engine Turn Off prevent the movement of the lever
NOTE: towards invalid positions.
• Place the shift lever in P (Park) (see
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC The electronically-controlled
“Automatic Transmission” in this
or RUN (engine not running) position transmission provides a precise shift
section).
and the transmission is in P (Park), the schedule. The transmission electronics
• With the engine at idle, press and system will automatically time out are self-calibrating, therefore the
release the START/STOP button. The after 30 minutes of inactivity and the gearshift behavior could become
ignition switch will return to the OFF ignition will switch to OFF position. perfect as expected after few
position. A burst on the accelerator hundreds of miles.
pedal before turning off the engine
has no purpose and increases fuel
consumption. CAUTION!
• If the shift lever is not in P (Park), the In order to properly use the Automatic
START/STOP button must be held for Transmission, it is essential that you
two seconds and vehicle speed must read through the whole chapter, so
be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the that you can understand right from
engine will shut off. The ignition (Continued)

178
 Driving
(Continued) forward or in reverse. You could lose • Do not leave the key fob in or near
the start what the correct and granted control of the vehicle and hit the vehicle. A child could operate
operations are. someone or something. Only shift power windows, other controls, or
Damage to the transmission may occur into gear when the engine is idling move the vehicle.
if the following precautions are not normally and when your foot is
This vehicle is equipped with a feature
observed: firmly pressing on the brake pedal.
which requires the shift lever to be
• Unintended movement of a vehicle placed in P (Park) before the engine
• Shift into P (Park) only after the
could injure those in or near the can be turned off. This prevents the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
vehicle. As with all vehicles, you driver from inadvertently leaving the
This is the default position of the
should never exit a vehicle while the vehicle without first placing the
lever and should be used every time
engine is running. Before exiting a transmission in P (Park). This system
the ignition switch is cycled to OFF.
vehicle, always apply the electronic also locks the shift lever in P (Park)
• Shift into or out of R (Reverse) only parking brake, shift the transmission
after the vehicle has come to a whenever the ignition switch is in the
into P (Park), and turn the engine OFF position.
complete stop and the engine is at off. The shift lever will consequently
idle speed. lock in P (Park) position for a few Automatic Transmission
• Do not shift between P (Park), R seconds, then eases, handling the Controls 5
(Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) change to prevent the motion of the
when the engine is above idle speed Automatic transmission is operated by
car.
a selection lever with lock button and
• To effect any change from vehicle • Never leave children unattended in a by a series of buttons located on the
stop to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 1st or vehicle, or with access to an central console.
2nd gear, it is necessary to keep the unlocked vehicle. Allowing children Using the selection lever it is possible
brake pedal fully depressed. in an unattended vehicle is to select following positions, indicated
dangerous for a number of reasons. on the top of the lever: the selected
A child or others could be seriously position will illuminate in amber light.
or fatally injured. Children should be
WARNING! • P (Park);
warned not to touch the parking
• It is dangerous to move the shift brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • R (Reverse);
lever out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) if • N (Neutral);
the engine speed is higher than idle • When leaving the vehicle, always
remove the key fob and lock your • D (Drive) automatic forward speed (8
speed. If your foot is not firmly
vehicle. ranges);
pressing on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly

179
 Driving
• +/- to upshift or downshift when The electric parking brake lever is part By operating instead the lever, the
manual mode in D (Drive) status, or of the shift control panel (see “Parking new range will be indicated in the
set M (Manual) mode. Brake” in section 5). field and in the lower part of the
display.

Buttons on the central console have Transmission status is visible on the

following functions: lever and on the lower part of the
• to exclude/reactivate the ESC Instrument cluster display.
5
system.
• M (Manual): to switch from
automatic to manual driving mode.
• I C E: to activate/deactivate the
driving mode in slippery surfaces
conditions.
• SPORT: to activate/deactivate a
sportier driving mode.
• to switch between the two If the vehicle is temporarily in the
suspensions setting modes (if manual drive mode, D2 (Drive) status,
equipped). By pressing the release button on the or in M1 (Manual) drive mode, the
By selecting one of these functions, lever, the gear position field is gear position is indicated beside the
the LED beside the button illuminates. displayed: if you release the button lever status, on the lower part of the
without moving the lever, the field display.
disappears after 2 seconds.

180
 Driving
the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep
your foot pressed on the brake pedal
when moving the shift lever between
these gears.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting
from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into
another gear range.

Automatic Transmission Range

P (Park)
Use this position to park the vehicle.
Shifting gears from P (Park) position is
only possible with the brake pedal
pressed. To move the shift lever from P
(Park) position to any other position,
the engine must be switched on. The
engine can be regularly started in P 5
(Park) range. Never attempt to use P
(Park) while the vehicle is in motion.
When parking on a level surface, you
may place the shift lever in the P
In normal conditions, the shift lever is (Park) position first, and then apply When parking on a hill, apply the
always unlocked. When in D (Drive) the electronic parking brake by parking brake before placing the shift
mode it is possible to upshift or pulling the handle upwards. The lever in P (Park).
downshift the changing gears by Instrument cluster will display the For enhanced security, turn the front
automatically temporary setting in M related warning light and the wheels toward the curb on a downhill
(Manual) mode. message for 5 seconds. and away from the curb on an uphill
You must also press the brake pedal to grade.
shift the transmission out of P (Park)
position.
Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R
(Reverse) should be done only after
the accelerator pedal is released and

181
 Driving
R (Reverse) only possible if the vehicle is moving
This range is used to move the vehicle forwards.
WARNING! Set the parking brake and shift the
backward.
• Never use the P (Park) position as a transmission into P (Park) if you must
We recommend to shift into R
substitute for the electronic parking leave the vehicle.
(Reverse) only after the vehicle has
brake. Always apply the parking
come to a complete stop.
brake fully when parked to prevent
vehicle movement and possible • Vehicle halted: switching between P
(Park), R (Reverse) and D (Drive) WARNING!
injury or damage.
requires pressing the unlock button Do not switch to N (Neutral) and/or
• Make sure the transmission is in P never turn off the ignition to coast
on the lever and brake pedal: N
(Park) before leaving the vehicle. downhill. These are unsafe practices
(Neutral) is reached only by pressing
the unlock button on the lever. that limit driver’s response to
changing traffic or road conditions. It
• Vehicle moving: the driver can switch
CAUTION! is possible to lose control of the
from R (Reverse) to N (Neutral), or
vehicle and have a collision.
• DO NOT race the engine when vice versa, by pressing the lock
shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) button on the shift lever.
5 into another gear range, as this can N (Neutral)
damage the drivetrain. CAUTION!
• Vehicle halted and engine started: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or
• The following indicators should be
switching from N (Neutral) to R driving for any other reason with the
used to ensure that you have
(Reverse), P (Park) and/or D (Drive) transmission in N (Neutral) can result
engaged the shift lever into the P
requires brake pedal and unlock in severe transmission damage. See
(Park) position:
button pressed. “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in section
• when shifting into P (Park), press • Vehicle moving: switching from N 6 for further information.
the lock button on the shift lever (Neutral) to R (Reverse) and/or D
and push the lever all the way (Drive) requires pressing the unlock D (Drive)
forward until it stops. When button. Switching to R (Reverse) This range should be used for most city
released, the lever will return to its starting from N (Neutral) is only and highway driving. It provides the
standard position; possible if the vehicle is moving smoothest upshifts and downshifts and
• with the brake pedal released, backwards, while switching to D the best fuel economy. The
verify that P (Park) position is (Drive) starting from N (Neutral) is transmission automatically shifts up
illuminated on the shift lever. and down through all gears.

182
 Driving
The D (Drive) position provides • When in D (Drive) mode, moving the To maximize fuel economy, the AWD
optimum driving characteristics under shift lever forward or backwards to vehicle automatically defaults to
all normal operating conditions of the the next step without pressing the Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) when road
vehicle. unlock button on the lever will cause and environmental conditions are such
• Vehicle stationary: switching from D the system to enter a temporary that wheel slip is unlikely to occur.
(Drive) to R (Reverse) and/or to P function and enable the manual When specific road and environmental
(Park) requires brake pedal and shift mode. This range is indicated conditions require increased levels of
unlock button pressed: reaching N with the symbols “+/-” on the right road traction, the vehicle
(Neutral) starting from D (Drive) is and left side of the “D” letter on the automatically shifts into AWD mode.
allowed by only pressing the unlock gear range field of the display. The Drive mode, RWD, or AWD, is
button on the shift lever. system will then switch back to displayed momentarily on the TFT
automatic mode according to time display. Refer to paragraph “TFT
• To enable special operations while
elapsed in “temporary” mode and Display” in chapter “Instrument
the car is moving at a low speed,
driving conditions. Cluster” of section 4 for further
such as getting out of a marsh or
At extremely cold temperatures (-23°F information.
snow, it is possible to run quickly
/ -30°C or below), transmission may be
from D (Drive) to R (Reverse), and
affected by the low temperature of 5
vice versa, by pressing the reset
the engine and transmission. Normal WARNING!
button on the gear shift lever.
operation will resume once the There may be a slight delay for AWD
• Vehicle moving: switching to N transmission temperature has risen to
(Neutral) from D (Drive) requires the engagement after a wheel slip
a normal level. condition occurs.
unlock button on the shift lever
pressed. All-Wheel Drive (AWD model only)
• From D (Drive) selected mode it is This vehicle is equipped with an active
always possible to switch to M on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
(Manual), by pressing the M system which provides available
(Manual) button: the Led indicator optimum traction for a wide variety of
beside the button will light up; to road surface and driving conditions.
return to D (Drive) position, the The system minimizes wheel slip by
same action should be performed as automatically redirecting torque to
the LED will turn off. the front and rear wheels as necessary.

183
 Driving
NOTE: Drive Mode The tables below summarizes the
If the “Service AWD System” warning adjustment of transmission and engine
message appears after engine start up, Keys (buttons) on the side of the shift parameters according to set drive
or during driving, it means that the lever only have two states: OFF and mode/s. is the only mode that does
AWD system is not functioning ON. The OFF state (button released) is not depend on the activation or
properly. If the warning message is the standard function mode. The ON deactivation of the other modes. The
often activated, it is recommended to state is activated by pressing the tables show the configurations with
go to the service. button, the dedicated LED will button NOT pressed and the
illuminate. It is necessary to press the button pressed.
button for at least 3 seconds.
The table shows the different drive
modes according to the state of the
keys.

Button OFF – Button released ON – Button pressed (LED ON)

Electronic Stability Control ESC Electronic Stability Control ESC
5 activated partially deactivated
M Autoshift Mode (Auto) Manual shift mode (Manual)
Increase Control Efficiency Increase Control Efficiency mode ON
ICE
mode OFF (*)
SPORT Normal drive mode (Normal) Sportier drive mode (SPORT)
WARNING!
(**) Soft suspensions setting (Soft) Hard suspensions setting (Hard)
When “Service AWD System” is
activated driver should be aware of (*) I C E (Increase Control and Efficiency) operates on engine supply in order to
different driving behavior and reduce reduce fuel consumption, exhausts, noisiness (efficiency) by dampen vehicle
speed. The “Service AWD System” also reactions (control). The current mode is also useful for low grip surfaces.
warns the driver not to drive into (**) Optional equipment for AWD model only.
cross country areas requiring AWD and
snow roads.

184
 Driving

Button NOT pressed

M M M M
ICE ICE ICE
Button pressed
SPORT SPORT

Setup Normal + Auto + Normal + Manual I C E + Auto + Soft Sport + Auto + Sport + Auto +
Soft suspensions + Soft suspensions suspensions Soft suspensions Hard suspensions
Stability control Active Active Active Active-Sport Active-Sport
Suspensions setup Normal Normal Normal Normal Hard
Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance
Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost
Low up to 3000 Low up to 3000
Exhaust sound Low Always High Always High
rpm rpm 5
Gear shifting point Normal - Comfort Performance Performance
Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong
Rev limiter 6200 rpm 6200 rpm 6000 rpm 6500 rpm 6500 rpm
Automatic
Normal Anti - Stall Comfort Performance Performance
downshift
Transmission speed Normal Rapid - Normal Comfort Sport Sport

185
 Driving

Button pressed
ESC OFF ESC OFF ESC OFF ESC OFF ESC OFF
M M M M
Button pressed ICE ICE ICE
SPORT SPORT

Setup Normal + Auto + Normal + Manual I C E + Auto + Sport + Auto + Sport + Auto +
Soft suspensions + Soft suspensions Soft suspensions Soft suspensions Hard suspensions
OFF - According
Stability control OFF OFF OFF OFF
to speed
Suspensions setup Normal Normal Normal Normal Hard
Engine control Normal Normal Comfort Performance Performance
5 Engine boost Normal boost Overboost Low boost Overboost Overboost
Low up to Low up to
Exhaust sound Low Always High Always High
3000 rpm 3000 rpm
Gear shifting point Normal - Comfort Performance Performance
Kick down Yes Yes Yes - Soft Yes - Strong Yes - Strong
Rev limiter 6200 rpm 6200 rpm 6000 rpm 6500 rpm 6500 rpm
Automatic
Normal Anti - Stall Comfort Performance Performance
downshift
Transmission speed Normal Rapid - Normal Comfort Sport Sport

186
 Driving

Activation/Deactivation of To activate button press the gear is displayed on the instrument

Drive Mode corresponding button for at least 3 cluster beside “M”.
seconds.
To insert a driving mode, briefly press
the corresponding button. The LED
beside the button will light along with
the indicator light on the display,
combined with a specific message for
5 seconds (see examples) or the
specific symbol of the set mode.

To disable the mode, press the button

again: the LED or symbol on the
cluster will turn off.
5
M (Manual) Drive Mode
In this mode, the transmission
interacts with the driver in order to
allow manual shift and ensure
increased control of the vehicle. The
current mode allows the gear system
to optimize the engine brake action, Using the shift paddles behind the
remove undesired shifting into a steering wheel (if present), the
higher and lower gears and improve corresponding icon will display beside
the overall performance of the the “M” indication and current shifted
vehicle. gear.
This mode allows you to move the Pull the right shift paddle (+) towards
shift lever step by step forward (-) or the steering wheel and release it to
backward (+) without pressing the enter the higher gear; do the same
lock button. The current transmission

187
 Driving
operation with the left shift paddle (-) selected by the driver by using the gear. If the vehicle speed is too low,
to enter the lower gear. shift lever, or shift paddles on the the system will ignore further
steering wheel (if present). The upshifts. Avoid using speed control
transmission remains in the engaged when the M (Manual) mode is
gear until the driver shifts into another engaged.
higher or lower gear, except in the
following cases. Gear Shift Indicator Light
• Lack of accelerator pedal activity will In order to improve fuel economy, we
cause the transmission to revert to recommend that you shift gears when
automatic operation. The the system prompts you to do so. This
transmission will also upshift will help reduce fuel consumption
automatically once maximum engine without significantly affecting vehicle
speed is reached. performance.
The indicator beside the displayed
• If in SPORT mode, the transmission
gear will light up just before reaching
will remain in the selected gear even
the required speed for gear change.
when maximum engine speed is
5 When the new gear is engaged, the
reached. The transmission will
indicator turns off. If the shift runs late
upshift only if enabled by the driver.
or is not performed at all, the indicator
Manual upshift or downshift will be
remains lit for a few seconds then
maintained as long as SPORT mode is
turns off. As soon as new conditions
selected, even by full stroke pedal
occur requiring further gear change,
press.
the indicator light will illuminate
• If in M (Manual) or in SPORT mode, again.
Manual mode can be activated at any the transmission will automatically
time, with no need to release the downshift as the vehicle slows to halt
brake pedal. (to prevent engine lugging) and the
Even if the release button is pressed current gear will display on the
and gear is shifted in R (Reverse), P instrument cluster. Shifting the gear
(Park) or N (Neutral), the selected lever backward (+) or moving the
manual mode will be maintained. right shift paddle (+) towards the
In Manual mode, the transmission will steering wheel when stationary, will
shift up or down (+/-) if manually cause the vehicle to start in second

188
 Driving

Transmission Malfunction and Transmission Oil Over Temperature

Overheating Conditions If the transmission oil temperature
exceeds the operating limit, the
Transmission Emergency Control amber light illuminates on the
Transmission function is monitored instrument cluster.
electronically to detect abnormal
conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission
damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this situation, the
transmission may operate only in
NOTE: certain gears, or may not shift at all.
The gearshift indicator will only work Vehicle performance may be severely
when the transmission is set in M degraded and the engine may stall. In
(Manual) mode. some situations, the transmission
system may be able to re-engage or
I C E Mode excluding ESC start the engine. The Malfunction In this case, slow down until the
Indicator Light may illuminate. temperature returns to normal level 5
To release the vehicle in low grip
A message in the instrument cluster (the light will turn off).
conditions (e.g.: snow, mud, sand, etc),
will inform the driver about the more If this is not sufficient, we recommend
it is possible to shift the transmission
serious transmission conditions, and you stop the vehicle, shift the lever to
feature in the specific driving mode as
indicate what actions may be position P (Park) or N (Neutral) and
required for these situations, by
necessary. keep the engine idle until the
pressing the I C E button and to
temperature warning light turns
exclude completely the yaw and
off and the message disappears from
spinning control system, by pressing
the display. Resume driving without
the button for two seconds .
demanding high engine performance.
If the warning light turns on again,
it is advisable to stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and wait for the
engine/transmission assembly to fully
cool down.

189
 Driving
NOTE: Parking Brake
Even if the transmission can be reset,
we recommend that you visit an The vehicle is equipped with an
Authorized Maserati Dealer at your electric automatic parking brake, also
earliest possible convenience, which called EPB (Electric Parking Brake).
has diagnostic equipment to It is automatically engaged when the
determine if the problem could recur. engine is turned off and disengaged
with engine running and driver’s door
Transmission Manual Release of P closed, while pressing the brake pedal
(Park) Position and operating the shift lever.
See chapter “Transmission Manual When the parking brake is applied, the
If the instrument cluster message
Release of P (Park) Position” in section warning light lights up on the
indicates that the transmission may
6. Rev Counter display and the related
not re-engage after engine shutdown,
message is displayed on the instrument
perform the following procedure
cluster for 5 seconds (see “Instrument
preferably at an Authorized Maserati
Cluster” in section 4).
Dealer.
5 In the event of a momentary problem,
the transmission can be reset to regain
all forward gears by performing the
following steps.
• Stop the vehicle.
• Shift the transmission into P (Park), if
possible.
• Turn the engine off.
• Wait approximately 30 seconds.
• Restart the engine. During engagement and
• Shift the transmission into D (Drive) disengagement procedures, the
and then into the desired gear warning light flashes until the
range. If the problem is no longer parking brake has reached its
detected, the transmission will return maximum activation force and is
to normal operation. respectively fully released.

190
 Driving
In the above mentioned conditions, simply by pulling the lever upward
the automatic engagement function within 3 minutes after turning off.
can be deactivated/activated by using WARNING!
the command “Vehicle settings” on • Always hold the brake pedal pressed
the main menu (refer to paragraph during engagement or
“Deactivating Automatic Operation” disengagement of the parking
in this chapter). brake.
• The EPB command activation while
Manual Engagement/ running, generates a deceleration of
Disengagement the vehicle with strong deceleration
The parking brake can also be (Dynamic Braking). It is therefore
manually engaged or disengaged recommended to use this feature
when the engine is running or the only in case of emergency. The
ignition switch is in the RUN position, stability of the car is guaranteed by
by pressing the brake pedal and the action of the activated ESC
raising the lever located behind the CAUTION! system.
The main function of the EPB is to
shift lever. 5
When the parking brake is applied, allow safe parking of the vehicle, Deactivating Automatic
the warning light lights up on therefore it must only be applied
Operation
the Rev Counter and the related when the vehicle is already stationary.
If the EPB is used while the vehicle is The automatic engagement function
message will be displayed for 5
moving and decelerating until a speed can be deactivated/reactivated by
seconds on the instrument cluster.
lower of 3 mph (5 km/h) and, in selecting the command “Vehicle
If you attempt to engage/disengage
particular, until complete stop settings” on the main menu, the
the parking brake without having
(typically in a sudden brake), it is command is reachable through the
pressed the brake pedal, a message
necessary to have the EPB system switch on the right-side of the
will be displayed, warning you to
checked by the Authorized Maserati steering wheel (refer to “Instrument
proceed.
Dealer. Cluster” in section 4.)
If the engine was turned off when the
Press and release the switch toward
automatic engagement device was
the arrow ► to select “Electric Park
deactivated (see “Deactivating
Brake”.
Automatic Operation” in this chapter)
it is possible to shift the parking brake

191
 Driving
to the previously selected item until a
new selection is made.
CAUTION!
• Under certain conditions when the
battery voltage is low, the electric
automatic parking brake system may
temporarily be deactivated for safety
reasons. Therefore, typically upon
starting the engine, when the
battery voltage drops, a message
Press and release the switch once may temporarily be displayed,
again toward the arrow ► to visualize indicating that automatic operation
the options connected to this function. is temporarily disabled.
“Setting Saved” Selection notification
• Auto Apply On; appears as a popup for 2 seconds then • In case of ripetitive requests to reset
the display will show again the the EPB through the messages shown
• Auto Apply Off (default setting).
modified function. on the TFT display, please contact the
5 Authorized Maserati Dealer.

Scroll with the switch toward the

arrow ▲ or ▼ through the In order to resume the automatic
programmable options. operation follow the same procedures
Press and release the switch toward and selecting “Auto Apply Off”
the arrow ► to set the selected option.
option. A check mark will remain next

192
 Driving

Failure Indication Parking When parking on hill roads, it is

important to turn the front wheels
In the event of electric parking brake Before leaving the vehicle, make sure toward the curb on a downhill grade
system failure, the warning light that the parking brake is fully applied and away from the curb on an uphill
on the display will light up and and place the shift lever in the P (Park) grade.
the related message will show for 5 position. Apply the parking brake before
seconds.
placing the shift lever in P (Park),
otherwise the load on the
WARNING! transmission locking mechanism may
WARNING! make it difficult to move the shift
• Always check that the vehicle is
In the event of an EPB failure, take locked before leaving it. lever out of P (Park).
your vehicle to the nearest Authorized In certain conditions, it is however
Maserati Dealer as soon as possible. • Never leave children unattended in
advisable to disengage the parking
the vehicle.
brake manually and slightly apply the
• Do not park the vehicle on paper, service brake for starting off. This is
grass, dry leaves or other flammable advisable when there are obstacles
materials. They could catch fire if very close to the vehicle in the
they come into contact with hot
5
direction in which you intend to move.
parts of the exhaust system.
• Do not leave the engine running
while the vehicle is unattended.

CAUTION!
Emergency Disengagement When you need to park the vehicle on
In case of brake lock with complete a steep slope, both with the engine on
electrical system failure, it is necessary and off, it is recommended not only to
to release the brake manually (see the engage the parking brake, but also to
complete procedure in “Emergency shift the shift lever to P (Park) before
Release of the Parking Brake” chapter leaving the vehicle.
in section 6).

193
 Driving

“Drive Away Inhibit” strategy

In order to avoid a dangerous
condition due to leave the vehicle not
“braked” with running engine and
without driver on board, “Drive Away
Inhibit” strategy alerts the driver with
messages on the instrument cluster
display and sounding chimes, then put
the transmission in P (Park).
The table shows the vehicle condition
and the action that the system runs to
exit the dangerous condition.

Vehicle condition Action of the driver

• Engine running and speed lower than
3 km/h (1.8 mph).
5 • Transmission in any position other P
The driver releases the brake pedal to
(Park).
get out of the vehicle. The system put the
• Driver safety belt unlocked.
• Driver door opened. transmission in P
• Brake pedal pressed. (Park) position
Warnings Warnings
• Slow continuous chime. • Fast chime.
• “Vehicle not in Park” message on the • “Secure vehicle to prevent
display. movement" message on the display.

194
 Driving

Brake and Stability • These systems cannot prevent tires and the road. Therefore, always
collisions, including those resulting keep a safe distance from the vehicle
Control System from excessive speed in turns, in front of yours and reduce your
The vehicle is equipped with an following another vehicle too speed when entering a curve.
Electronic Stability Control System (ESC), closely, or hydroplaning.
which helps to maintain directional • The capabilities of a vehicle NOTE:
control in the event of loss of traction of equipped with these systems must • When the vehicle's speed is higher
the tires. The system is able to detect never be exploited in a reckless or than 7 mph (11 km/h), you may also
potentially dangerous situations for the dangerous manner that could hear a slight clicking sound as well as
stability of the vehicle and automatically jeopardize the driver’s and the other motor noises. The system is
sets the brakes on all four wheels in a passenger’s safety or the safety of performing a self-check cycle to
differentiated manner, in order to others. ensure that the ABS is working
provide a torque stabilizing of the properly.
vehicle. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) • This self-check occurs each time the
ESC includes following subsystems: vehicle is started and accelerated
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
• EBD (electronic brake force provides increased vehicle stability and past 7 mph (11 km/h).
distribution); 5
brake performance under most ABS is activated during braking under
• ABS (anti blocking system); braking conditions. The system certain road or stopping conditions.
• TCS (traction control system); automatically “pumps” the brakes ABS-inducing conditions can include
• BAS (brake assist system); during severe braking to prevent ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
wheel lock-up. tracks, loose debris.
• HSA (hill start assist).
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution You may also experience the following
(EBD) prevents the rear wheels from when the brake system goes into Anti-
over-braking and provides greater Lock:
WARNING! control of available braking forces
• These systems cannot prevent the • The ABS motor running (it may
applied to the rear axle.
natural laws of physics from continue to run for a short time
affecting the vehicle, nor can it after the vehicle stops).
increase traction, braking or steering • The clicking sound of solenoid
WARNING!
efficiency beyond that afforded by valves.
The ABS helps prevent the wheels
the condition of the vehicle brakes • Brake pedal pulsations.
from locking, but it does not increase
and tires.
the physical grip limits between the
195
 Driving
• A slight drop or fall away of the (aquaplaning), acceleration on slippery Electronic Stability Control
brake pedal at the end of the stop. snow-covered or frozen surfaces, etc. (ESC)
These are all normal characteristics of Activating under slip conditions
ABS functioning. different control systems: This system enhances directional
control and stability of the vehicle
• if slippage affects both drive wheels, under various driving conditions. The
it reduces the power transmitted by ESC corrects over steering and under
WARNING! the engine; steering of the vehicle by applying the
• The ABS contains sophisticated • if slippage only affects one drive brake to the appropriate wheel.
electronic equipment that may be wheel, it brakes the slipping wheel Engine power may also be reduced to
susceptible to interference caused by automatically. assist in counteracting the conditions
improperly installed or high output of instability and maintain the right
radio transmitting equipment. This Brake Assist System (BAS) direction. The system is also able to
interference can cause possible loss This system completes the ABS system reduce the engine power.
of anti-lock braking capability. by optimizing the vehicle braking Through sensors fitted on the vehicle,
Installation of such equipment capacity during emergency brake the ESC system detects the driver’s
should be performed by qualified maneuvers. The system detects an chosen direction comparing it to the
5 Maserati personnel. emergency braking situation by one maintained while running. In case
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will sensing the rate and amount of brake of discrepancy between the required
diminish their effectiveness and may application and then applies optimum trajectory and the current one, the ESC
lead to a collision. Pumping brakes pressure to the brakes in order to help system brakes the appropriate wheel
makes the stopping distance longer. reduce braking distances. to counteract over or under steering.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal The quick brake coupling is optimal for • Oversteer - when the vehicle is
when you need to slow down or BAS performances. In order to fully turning more than appropriate for
stop. Do not pump brakes. exploit the system, apply continuous the steering wheel position.
brake pedal pressure during the entire
• Understeer - when the vehicle is
Traction Control System (TCS) vehicle stop sequence. Do not reduce
turning less than appropriate for the
brake pedal pressure earlier than
The current device is an integral part steering wheel position.
required. Once the brake pedal is
of the ESC system. It operates released, the BAS is deactivated.
automatically by reducing the power
transmitted by the engine in case of
slipping, loss of grip on wet floor

196
 Driving
The ESC system has two available NOTE: brake pressure proportionally to the
operating modes: • When in “ESC off” mode, the TCS amount of throttle/torque applied as
ESC on functionality of ESC is deactivated the vehicle starts to move in the
This is the normal ESC operating (except for the limited slip feature chosen direction.
mode. At each start-up of the vehicle, described in the TCS paragraph of HSA Activation Criteria
the ESC system is set in this mode and this chapter). All other stability The following criteria must be met in
should be used for most driving features of ESC function regularly. order for HSA to activate:
conditions. The ESC should only be • To improve the vehicle's traction
turned off for specific reasons as • vehicle is stationary.
when driving with snow chains, or
pointed out in the following when starting off in deep snow, • gear selection matches vehicle uphill
paragraphs. sand, or gravel, it may be desirable direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is
to switch to the “ESC off” mode by in forward gear; vehicle backing
ESC off
pressing the switch and remain in uphill is in reverse gear).
The “ESC off” mode is aimed for a
this operational mode no longer HSA will work in R (Reverse) and all
more spirited driving experience but
than needed. Once the situation forward gears when the activation
also purposeful for driving in deep
requiring “ESC off” mode is criteria have been met.
snow, sand, or gravel. The current
mode disables the TCS portion of the overcome, turn the ESC on again by The system will not activate if the gear 5
pressing the switch. This may also is placed in N (Neutral) or P (Park).
ESC and raises the threshold for ESC
activation, allowing higher wheel spin be performed while in motion.
than normally granted by the ESC
system. The switch is fitted beside Hill Start Assist (HSA)
the gear shift lever: to deactivate the The HSA system is designed to assist
system see“Drive mode” in the driver when starting a vehicle
“Automatic Transmission” in this uphill. HSA will maintain the level of
section. brake pressure applied for a short
period of time also after releasing the
brake pedal.
If the driver does not apply the
throttle during this short period of
time, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will start
sloping down. The system will release

197
 Driving

Using the Brakes excessive lining wear, and possible Use of the Engine
brake damage. In an emergency, full
braking capacity may be impaired. Breaking-In
CAUTION! Today's modern production methods
To obtain a good performance of Brake pads and brake discs are designed to provide extremely
brake pads and discs, avoid sudden Wear on the brake pads and brake precise construction and assembly of
braking during the first 190 mi discs depends to a great extent on the components. However, moving parts
(300 km). driving style and the conditions of use do undergo a settling process, basically
and therefore cannot be expressed in in the first hours of vehicle operation.
The pad wear limit is indicated by the actual miles driven on the road. Avoid exceeding 5,000 rpm for the first
illumination of the warning light , The high-performance brake system is 620 mi trip (1,000 km).
on the instrument panel. designed for optimal braking effect at After starting the vehicle, do not
In this event, please contact an all speeds and temperatures. exceed 4,000 rpm until the engine has
Authorized Maserati Dealer. Certain speeds, braking forces and warmed up sufficiently (coolant
ambient conditions (e.g. temperature temperature: 149-158°F / 65-70°C).
and humidity) can therefore cause the Do not drive keeping at a constant
5 brakes to “squeal”. high speed rate for a prolonged time.
While cruising, brief full-throttle
New brake pads and/or brake acceleration within the limits of local
discs traffic laws contributes to a good
New brake pads have to be “broken break-in of the engine. Wide-open
in”, and therefore only attain optimal throttle acceleration in low gear can
friction to the brake disc when the be detrimental and should be avoided.
vehicle has covered several hundred The engine oil installed in the engine
miles. at the factory is a high-quality energy
During this first period, the slightly conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
reduced braking ability must be should be consistent with anticipated
WARNING! climate conditions under which vehicle
compensated for by pressing the brake
Riding the brakes can lead to brake pedal harder. This applies whenever operations will occur. For the
failure and possibly an accident. the brake pads and/or brake discs are recommended viscosity and quality
Driving with your foot resting or replaced. grades, see “Maintenance Procedures”
riding on the brake pedal can result in in section 7.
abnormally high brake temperatures,
198
 Driving
A new engine may consume some oil transmission control systems. When
during its first few thousand miles of these systems are operating properly,
operation. This should be considered CAUTION! your vehicle will provide excellent
as a normal part of the break-in • Under normal conditions, all red performance and fuel economy, as
period and not interpreted as an warning lights on the instrument well as engine emissions well within
indication of an engine malfunction. cluster display should be off. When current local regulations of various
they come on, this indicates a countries.
While Driving If any of these systems require service,
malfunction. Refer to “Instrument
Never travel with the Rev Counter Cluster” in section 4. the OBD system will turn on the
indicator approaching the peak rpm, • Continuing to drive when a red malfunction indicator light (MIL).
not even downhill. When the Rev warning light is on could cause It will also store diagnostic codes and
Counter indicator is approaching the serious damage to the vehicle and other information to assist which the
peak rpm (red colored zone), take affect its performance. Authorized Maserati Dealer will use to
precautions to avoid exceeding that service your vehicle. Although the
limit. vehicle will still be drivable and not
need towing, contact an Authorized
WARNING! Maserati Dealer for service as soon as 5
Do not travel downhill with the possible.
engine off, as the servo brake will no
longer function due to the vacuum
decrease and thus after a few braking
attempts, the system becomes totally
inefficient. The power steering will
also lose its efficiency under these
conditions.
Ensure proper operation of different
devices checking their respective On Board Diagnostic System
control tell tales. Your vehicle is equipped with a
sophisticated onboard diagnostic
system called OBD. This system
monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic

199
 Driving

Electronic Cruise Control Controls

CAUTION! The electronic Cruise Control buttons
The electronic speed regulator (Cruise
are located on the left side of the
• Prolonged driving with the Control) enables the driver to maintain
steering wheel. Control buttons have
malfunction indicator light (MIL) the desired vehicle speed without
following functions:
on could cause further damage to pressing the accelerator pedal,
the emissions control system. It could reducing driving fatigue on highways, ON/OFF button:
also affect fuel economy and especially long trips, as the set speed is activation/deactivation;
drivability. The vehicle must be automatically maintained.
serviced before any emissions tests multifunction control:
can be performed. • RES (+), pushed up:
CAUTION! resume set speed (higher
• If the malfunction indicator light The device can only be switched on at speed);
(MIL) is flashing while the engine is speeds exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) • CANCEL, pushed: cancel
running, severe catalytic converter and it switches off automatically when set speed;
damage and power loss will soon the brake pedal is pressed. • SET (–), pushed down:
occur. Immediate service is required
setting speed (lower
5 at the Authorized Maserati Dealer.
speed).
• After the problem has been solved,
the Authorized Maserati Dealer WARNING!
personnel will perform specific tests The Cruise Control function must only
on the test bench for a complete be activated when traffic and the
check of the system and, if necessary, route allow maintaining a constant
also road tests, even on long speed safely for a sufficiently long
distances. distance.

200
 Driving
NOTE: the display returns to the previous Temporary Deactivation
In order to ensure proper operation, setting.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing
the electronic Cruise Control system the CANCEL switch, or normal brake
has been designed to shut down if pressure while slowing the vehicle will
multiple Cruise Control functions are temporarily deactivate the Electronic
operated at the same time. If this Speed Control without erasing the set
occurs, the electronic Cruise Control speed memory, which will appear
system can be reactivated by pushing above the white light (in the
the electronic Cruise Control ON/OFF example: 45 mph).
button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.

Activation The system must be turned off when

Push the ON/OFF button. The amber not in use.
light in sector 13 of the instrument Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning
cluster will illuminate and the related the ignition switch OFF erases the set
message pops up for 5 seconds. speed memory. 5

WARNING! The related message will pop up for 5

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control seconds on the instrument cluster and
system on when not in use is the display will return to the previous
dangerous. You could accidentally set setting, however, the white light
the system or cause it to go faster will turn on as the Cruise Control is
than you want. Always leave the still activated.
system OFF when you are not using it.

To turn the system off, push the

ON/OFF button a second time. The
amber light will turn off and a new
message pops up for 5 seconds, then

201
 Driving

Setting Desired Speed Resume Speed

Turn the electronic Cruise Control ON. To resume a previously set speed, push
When the vehicle has reached the the RES (+) switch upward and release.
desired speed (in the example: Resume can be used at any speed
51 mph), push the switch downward above 19 mph (30 km/h).
and release.
The green light will illuminate and Changing Speed Setting
the related message will pop up for 5 When the electronic Cruise Control is
seconds on the instrument cluster. set, you can increase speed by pushing
the switch upward. Keeping the switch
If the driver presses the accelerator pressed, the set speed will continue to
pedal while the Cruise Control is increase until the switch is released,
active, such as to overtake another then the new set speed will be
vehicle, and exceeds the speed limit, maintained and memorized.
the system will temporarily deactivate To decrease speed while the electronic
the speed regulator. A message pops Cruise Control is activated, push the
5 up for 5 seconds on the instrument switch downward. Keeping the switch
cluster to alert the driver. pushed in the downward position, the
set speed will continue to decrease
until the switch is released. Release the
Release the accelerator and the vehicle switch when the desired speed is
will operate at the selected speed. reached, and the new set speed will be
NOTE: maintained.
Pushing the switch upward or
The vehicle should be traveling at a
downward once will enable to increase
steady speed and on level ground
or decrease the set speed of 1.24 mph
before pushing the switch downward.
(2.0 km/h).
Each subsequent tap of the switch will
increase or decrease the speed of
When the accelerator pedal is 1.24 mph (2.0 km/h).
released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.

202
 Driving

Using Electronic Cruise Control Tires - General Tire Sizing Chart

on Hillsides Information EXAMPLE: P245/40 ZR20 (99Y) XL or
The transmission may be downshifted 245/40 ZR20 (Y99) XL
on hills to maintain the vehicle set Tire Safety Information Size Designation:
speed. The electronic Cruise Control Tire Markings
system maintains set speed up and P = Passenger car tire size based on
down hills. A slight speed change on U.S. design standards
moderate hills is normal. On steep “...blank...” = Passenger car tire
slopes, a greater speed loss or gain based on European design standards
may occur so we recommend to drive 245 = Section width in millimeters
without Electronic Cruise Control. (mm)
40 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) —
Ratio of section height to section
WARNING! width of tire
Electronic Cruise Control can be ZR = Construction Code
dangerous where the system cannot • Z: means a tire usable at speeds 5
maintain a constant speed. Your greater than 150 mph (240 km/h)
vehicle could go too fast for the 1. U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code • R: means radial construction
conditions, and you could lose control (TIN). 20 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
and have an accident. Do not use
2. Size Designation.
electronic Cruise Control in heavy
traffic or on winding, icy, 3. Service Description.
snow-covered or slippery roads. 4. Maximum Pressure and Maximum
Load.
5. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades (see
“Department of Transportation
Uniform Tire Quality Grades” in
this section).

203
 Driving
Look for the TIN on the outboard side Tire and Loading Information Label
Service Description: of black sidewall tires as mounted on The proper cold tire inflation pressure
99 = Load Index — A numerical code the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on is listed on the driver's side rear door
associated with the maximum load a the outboard side, then you will find it pillar.
tire can carry on the inboard side of the tire.
Y = Speed Symbol — A symbol
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0313
indicating the range of speeds at
which a tire can carry a load DOT = Department of Transportation
corresponding to its load index — This symbol certifies that the tire is
under certain operating conditions. in compliance with the U.S.
The maximum speed corresponding Department of Transportation tire
to the speed symbol should only be safety standards and is approved for
achieved under specified operating highway use.
conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle MA = Code representing the tire
loading, road conditions, and posted manufacturing location (two digits).
speed limits) This label tells you important
L9 = Code representing the tire size
5 information about the:
(two digits).
Load Identification: ABCD = Code used by the tire • Number of people that can be
manufacturer (one to four digits). carried in the vehicle.
“...blank...” = Absence of any text on
• Total weight the vehicle can carry.
the sidewall of the tire indicates a 03 = Number representing the week
Standard Load (SL) tire in which the tire was manufactured • Tire size designed for the vehicle.
(two digits). In this case, 03 means • Cold tire inflation pressures for the
XL = Extra Load (or reinforced) tire
the 3rd week. front, rear, and spare tires.
LL = Light Load tire
13 = Number representing the year Loading
in which the tire was manufactured The vehicle maximum load on the tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(two digits). In this case, 13 means must not exceed the load carrying
The TIN may be found on one or both the year 2013. capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
sides of the tire, however the date
You will not exceed the tire's load
code may only be on one side. Tires
carrying capacity if you adhere to the
with white sidewalls will have the full
loading conditions, tire size, and cold
TIN, including the date code, located
tire inflation pressures specified on the
on the white sidewall side of the tire.

204
 Driving
“Tire and Loading Information Label” • The resulting figure equals the NOTE:
and in the “Features and available amount of cargo and • The following table shows examples
Specifications” section. luggage load capacity. For example, on how to calculate total load,
if “XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs/635 cargo/luggage, and towing
NOTE:
kg and there will be five capacities of your vehicle with
Under a maximum loaded vehicle 150 lbs/68 kg passengers in your varying seating configurations and
condition, gross axle weight ratings vehicle, the amount of available number and size of occupants. This
(GAWRs) for the front and rear axles cargo and luggage load capacity is table is for illustration purposes only
must not be exceeded. 650 lbs/295 kg (since 5 x 150/68 = and may not be accurate for the
To determine the maximum loading 750/340, and 1,400/635 – 750/340 = seating and load carry capacity of
conditions of your vehicle, locate the 650 lbs/295 kg). your vehicle.
statement “The combined weight of • Determine the combined weight of • For the following example, the
occupants and cargo should never luggage and cargo being loaded on combined weight of occupants and
exceed XXX lbs/XXX kg” on the tire the vehicle. That weight may not cargo should never exceed
and loading information label. The safely exceed the available cargo 865 lbs/392 kg.
combined weight of occupants and and luggage load capacity calculated
cargo/luggage should never exceed in previous Step. 5
the weight referenced here. • If your vehicle will be towing a
Steps For Determining Correct Load trailer, load from your trailer will be
Limit transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
• Locate the statement “The combined reduces the available cargo and
weight of occupants and cargo luggage load capacity of your
should never exceed vehicle.
XXX lbs/XXX kg” on the vehicle's
label.
• Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in the vehicle.
• Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from
XXX lbs/XXX kg.

205
 Driving

Occupants Combined weight MINUS Combined Occupant's = AVAILABLE Cargo/

of Occupants and weight (1, 2, 3, etc.) Luggage and Trailer
Cargo from Tire Tongue weight
TOTAL FRONT REAR
Label
EXAMPLE 1 1: 200 lbs/91 kg
2: 130 lbs/59 kg
3: 160 lbs/72 kg
865 lbs/392 kg minus 4: 100 lbs/45 kg = 195 lbs/88 kg
5: 80 lbs/37 kg
5 2 3 TOTAL WEIGHT:
670 lbs/304 kg
EXAMPLE 2 1: 210 lbs/95 kg
2: 180 lbs/82 kg
865 lbs/392 kg minus 3: 150 lbs/68 kg = 325 lbs/147 kg
3 2 1 TOTAL WEIGHT:
5 540 lbs/245 kg
EXAMPLE 3 1: 200 lbs/91 kg
2: 200 lbs/91 kg
865 lbs/392 kg minus = 465 lbs/211 kg
TOTAL WEIGHT:
2 2 0
400 lbs/182 kg

206
 Driving
Tires Department of Transportation Traction Grades
Driving over rough or damaged road Uniform Tire Quality Grades The Traction grades, from highest to
surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and lowest, are AAA, A, B, and C. These
other obstacles can cause serious The following tire grading categories
were established by the National grades represent the tire's ability to
damage to wheels, tires, and stop on wet pavement, as measured
suspension parts. Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by under controlled conditions on
This is more likely to occur with specified government test surfaces of
low-profile tires, which provide less the tire's manufacturer in each
category is shown on the sidewall of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
cushioning between the wheel and may have poor traction performance.
the road. the tires on your vehicle.
Be careful to avoid road hazards and All passenger car tires must conform
reduce your speed, especially if your to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades. WARNING!
vehicle is equipped with low profile
tires. Treadwear The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
The Treadwear grade is a comparative braking traction tests, and does not
rating, based on the wear rate of the include acceleration, cornering,
WARNING! tire when tested under controlled hydroplaning, or peak traction 5
Overloading of your tires is conditions on a specified government characteristics.
dangerous. Overloading can cause tire test course. For example, a tire graded
failure, affect vehicle handling, and 150 would wear one and one-half Temperature Grades
increase the stopping distance. Use times as well on the government
The temperature grades are A (the
tires of the recommended load course as a tire graded 100. The
highest), B, and C, representing the
capacity for your vehicle. Never relative performance of tires depends
tire's resistance to the generation of
overload them. upon the actual conditions of their
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
use, however, and may depart
when tested under controlled
significantly from the norm due to
conditions on a specified indoor
variations in driving habits, service
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
practices, and differences in road
temperature can cause the material of
characteristics and climate.
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure.

207
 Driving
The grade C corresponds to a level of Radial tires fitted on the vehicle may • Always drive with each tire inflated
performance, which all passenger car look properly inflated even when they to the recommended cold tire
tires must meet under the Federal actually are under inflated. Do not inflation pressure.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. make a visual judgment when
109. Grades B and A represent higher determining proper inflation. Economy
levels of performance on the Three primary driving aspects are Improper inflation pressures may cause
laboratory test wheel, than the affected by improper tire pressure: uneven wear patterns to develop
minimum required by law. across the tire tread. These abnormal
Safety
wear patterns will reduce tread life
resulting in a need for earlier tire
WARNING! replacement. Under-inflation also
WARNING! increases tire rolling resistance
The temperature grade for this tire is • Improperly inflated tires are resulting in higher fuel consumption.
established for a tire that is properly dangerous and can cause collisions.
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive Ride comfort and vehicle stability
speed, under-inflation, or excessive • Under-inflation increases tire flexing Proper tire inflation contributes to a
loading, either separately or in and can result in tire overheating comfortable ride. Over-inflation
5 combination, can cause heat buildup and failure. produces a jarring and uncomfortable
and possible tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability ride.
to cushion shock. Objects on the
road and chuckholes can cause Tire Pressure Checkup
Tire Pressure
damage that results in tire failure. The proper cold tire inflation pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is is indicated on the driver's side rear
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires
essential for safety and best door pillar.
can affect vehicle handling and can
performance of your vehicle. The tire Inflation pressure specified on the
fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
pressure monitoring system “TPMS” label always refers to “cold tire
vehicle control.
setup on the vehicle (see “Tire Pressure inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation
Monitoring System” in this section) • Unequal tire pressures can cause
pressure is defined as the tire pressure
may alert the driver about insufficient steering problems. You could lose
after the vehicle has not been driven
tire pressure even though the driver is control of your vehicle.
for at least three hours, or driven less
responsible for checking regularly the • Unequal tire pressures from one side than 1 mi (1.6 km) after a three hour
tire pressure. of the vehicle to the other can cause period.
the vehicle to drift to the right or
left.

208
 Driving
Check tire pressures more often in Tread Wear Indicators
case of significant outside
Tread wear indicators are in the WARNING!
temperature changes, as tire pressure
original equipment tires to help you in Tires and the spare tire (if equipped)
varies according to temperature
determining when your tires should should be replaced after six years,
changes.
be replaced. regardless of the remaining tread.
The pressure should be checked and if
These indicators are molded into the Failure to follow this warning can
necessary adjusted; tire wear and
bottom of the tread grooves. They will result in sudden tire failure. You could
overall conditions should also be
appear as bands when the tread depth lose control and have a collision
checked monthly. Tire pressures
becomes 0.06 in (1.6 mm). resulting in serious injury or death.
change by approximately 1 PSI (0.07
When the tread is worn to one of the
bar) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
tread wear indicators, the tire should
change. Keep this in mind when Replacement Tires
be replaced.
checking tire pressure inside a garage,
In order to maintain high performance
especially in winter.
and safety level under all driving
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F
WARNING! conditions, Maserati strongly
(20°C) and the outside temperature =
recommends to use tires equivalent to
32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation The wet performance (aquaplaning
the originals in size, quality and 5
pressure should be increased by 3 PSI resistance) will decrease
performance when replacement is
(0.21 bar) for every 12°F (7°C) for this proportionally to the thickness of the
needed.
outside temperature condition. tread.
See the “Tire and Loading
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6
Information” label on the driver’s side
PSI (0.13 to 0.4 bar) during operation. Tires Durability rear door pillar for the size
DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
The service life of a tire depends on designation of your tire or see
build up or your tire pressure will be
various factors including, but not “Technical Data” in section 8.
too low. After inspecting or adjusting
limited to: The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
the tire pressure, always reinstall the
• driving style; your tire will be found on the original
valve stem cap. This will prevent
equipment tire sidewall.
moisture and dirt from entering the • tire pressure;
valve stem, which could damage the • distance driven.
valve stem and the TPMS sensor
connected to it.

209
 Driving
NOTE: the vehicle. This can cause
Maserati recommendes Maserati unpredictable handling and stress to
steering and suspension CAUTION!
Genuine Tires marked with “MGT”
components. You could lose control Replacing original tires with tires of a
logo specifically designed for its
and have a collision resulting in different size may result in false
models.
serious injury or death. Use only the speedometer and odometer readings.
It is recommended to replace the two tire and wheel sizes with load
front tires or two rear tires as a pair. ratings appointed for your vehicle. Winter Tires
Replacing just one tire can seriously
• Never use a tire with a smaller load These tires are specially designed for
affect your vehicle’s handling.
index or capacity, other than what driving on snow and ice and are fitted
If you ever replace a wheel assembly,
was originally equipped on your to replace the ones supplied with the
make sure that the wheel’s
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller vehicle. Winter or All season tires can
specifications (valve, TPMS sensor and
load index could result in tire be identified by the M+S (Mud &
tire) match those of the original
overloading and failure. You could Snow) or 3PMSF (3 Peaks Mountain
wheels. Failure to use equivalent
lose control and have a collision. Snow Flake) designation on the tire
replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your • Always check the maximum speed sidewall.
5 vehicle. rating on the tire sidewall on any Before mounting snow tires, contact
The Authorized Maserati Dealer is tire on the vehicle. the Authorized Maserati Dealer to
available to provide suggestions as to • Never exceed the maximum speed receive the technical information
the types of tires most suited to the rating of the tires. Risk of accident necessary to advise you on wheel and
use foreseen by the Customer. and serious pesonal injury due to tire compatibility.
excessive speed. Use snow tires only in sets of four.
As to the type of tires to use, inflation
• Failure to equip your vehicle with pressures and winter tires
WARNING! tires having adequate speed specifications, carefully follow the
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or capability can result in sudden tire indications as reported in the
rating other than that specified for failure and loss of vehicle control. “Technical Data” and “Tire Inflation
your vehicle. Some combinations of Pressure” chapters in section 8.
unapproved tires and wheels may The features of these tires are
change suspension dimensions and markedly reduced in winter when
performance characteristics, tread depth is less than 0.16 in (4 mm).
resulting in altered steering, In this case, they should be replaced.
handling, and braking operations of

210
 Driving
The specific features of winter tires Snow Chains • Avoid holes in the road, do not drive
lead to lower performance under over steps or sidewalks and do not
The use of snow chains is specified by
normal weather conditions or on long drive on long stretches without
local regulations of each country.
highway trips, compared to the snow. This will prevent damage to
Use snow chains of reduced
standard tires. Therefore, their use the vehicle and the roadbed.
dimensions, with a maximum
should be limited to the performance
projection of 0.23 in (6 mm) beyond
for which they have been NOTE:
the tire tread.
type-approved. Maserati provides on request spider
The chains may be fitted only on 18”
and 19” driving wheel tires. version snow chains especially
Check the chain tension after driving developed for this vehicle. This chains
WARNING! for a distance of about 55 yd (50 m) are easy to be fitted and can be
The standard tires profile and rubber with the chains fitted. removed quickly without damaging
mixture are optimized for wet and dry With the chains fitted, it is advisable the wheel rims. The Authorized
driving conditions. Standard tires may to deactivate the ESC system (see Maserati Dealer can provide you with
not prove favorable for snow chapter “Automatic Transmission” in all information about the “Maserati
conditions: install snow tires before this section). Spider Version Snow Chains”, available
driving in such conditions to avoid in the Genuine Accessories range. 5
risk of loss of control and damage to
the vehicle as well as serious personal CAUTION! Compact Spare Tire
injury. • Broken chains can cause serious The limited-use spare tire, or
damage. Stop the vehicle compact-spare tire, is for temporary
NOTE: immediately if noise occurs that emergency use only.
Snow tires should have the same load could indicate chain breakage. This tire is identified by a label
capacity as original equipment tires Remove the damaged parts of the indicating the driving speed
and should be mounted on all four chain before further use. limitations to comply with when using
wheels. • Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). the spare tire.
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe Keep it inflated to the cold tire
turns and large bumps, especially inflation pressure listed on your Tire
with a loaded vehicle. and Loading Information label located
on the driver’s side rear door pillar or
in the table “Tire Inflation Pressure” in
section 8.

211
 Driving
Mounting the spare tire affects vehicle Tire Pressure Monitoring maximum inflation pressure molded
handling. Replace (or repair) as soon as into the tire sidewall. Check “Tires –
possible the original equipment tire System (TPMS) General Information” in section 5 for
and reinstall it on the vehicle. Do not The Tire Pressure Monitoring System information on how to properly inflate
install more than one compact spare (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low the tires.
tire and wheel on the vehicle at a tire pressure according to the vehicle The tire pressure will also increase as
time. recommended cold pressure indicated the vehicle is driven - this is normal
on the label on the driver's side rear and there is no adjustment required
door pillar. when this occurs.
WARNING! The TPMS will warn the driver of a low
With these compact spare tires, do not tire pressure if the tire pressure falls
drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). below the low-pressure warning limit
Temporary use spares have limited for any reason, including low
tread life. temperature effects and natural
pressure loss of the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the
5 driver of low tire pressure as long as
the condition persists and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is equal or
above the recommended cold inflation
The tire pressure will vary with pressure. Once the low tire pressure
temperature by about 1 PSI (0.07 bar) warning light illuminates, you must
for every 12°F (7°C). This means that increase the tire pressure to the
when the outside temperature recommended cold inflation pressure
decreases, the tire pressure will in order for the TPMS light to turn
decrease. Tire pressure should always off. The system will automatically
be set based on cold inflation tire update and the TPMS light will turn
pressure. This is defined as the tire off once the system acquires the
pressure after the vehicle has not been correct tire pressure.
driven for at least three hours, or The vehicle may need to be driven for
driven less than 1 mi (1.6 km) after a up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
three hour period. The cold tire (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
inflation pressure must not exceed the

212
 Driving
acquire and process the updated sensor damage. Do not use
setting. aftermarket tire sealants or balance
For example: Your vehicle (stationary beads if your vehicle is equipped
for more than three hours) may have a with a TPMS, as damage to the
recommended cold inflation pressure sensors may result.
of 30 PSI (2.1 bar). If the ambient • The system can temporarily
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the experience radio-electric
measured tire pressure is 27 PSI (1.8 interference emitted by devices
bar), a temperature drop to 12°F (7°C) using similar frequencies.
will decrease the tire pressure to • After inspecting or adjusting the tire
approximately 23 PSI (1.6 bar). This pressure, always reinstall the valve
tire pressure is sufficiently low to turn stem cap. This will prevent moisture
ON the TPMS Light . Driving the WARNING! and dirt from entering the valve
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to The TPMS warns the driver that the stem and damage the TPMS internal
rise to approximately 27 PSI (1.8 bar), tire pressure has decreased. This sensor.
but the TPMS light will stay lit. In warning does not exempt the driver
this situation, the TPMS light will from periodically checking the tires 5
NOTE:
turn OFF only after the tires are and from complying with the
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended prescribed tire pressure levels. • Driving on a significantly
cold inflation pressure value. underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and may lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
CAUTION! fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
• The TPMS has been optimized for may affect the vehicle’s handling and
the original equipment tires and stopping ability.
wheels. TPMS pressures and warning • The TPMS is not a substitute for
have been established for the tire proper tire maintenance, and it is
size equipped on your vehicle. the driver’s responsibility to maintain
Undesirable system operation or correct tire pressure using an
sensor damage may occur when accurate tire pressure gage, even if
using replacement equipment that is under-inflation has not reached the
not of the same size, type, and/or (Continued)
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

213
 Driving
(Continued) will automatically update, the graphic
level to trigger illumination of the display in the instrument panel will
TPMS light . stop flashing, and the TPMS light
• Seasonal temperature changes will will turn off. The vehicle may need
affect tire pressure, and the TPMS to be driven for up to 20 minutes
will monitor the actual tire pressure above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
in the tire. the TPMS to acquire and process the
updated information.
Premium System “Service Tire Pressure System”
The TPMS system uses wireless Warning
technology with wheel rim mounted The instrument cluster will also display If a system fault is detected, the TPMS
electronic sensors to monitor tire a screenshot reporting the pressure light will flash for 75 seconds and
pressure levels. Sensors mounted to values of each tire with flashing low then remain lit followed by a beeping
each wheel as part of the valve stem pressure value. sound. Therewith, the instrument
transmit tire pressure readings to the cluster will display a "Service Tire
receiver module. Pressure System" message for a
5 The TPMS consists of the following minimum of five seconds and then
components: display dashes (- -) in place of the
• receiver module; pressure value to indicate which sensor
is ineffective.
• four TPMS sensors;
If the ignition switch is cycled, the
• various TPMS messages, which sequence will repeat, in case the
display on the instrument cluster; system fault still persists. If the system
• warning light . fault no longer exists, the TPMS light
Tire Pressure Low Warning will no longer flash, and the
Should this occur, you should stop as
"Service Tire Pressure System" message
The TPMS light will illuminate in soon as possible and inflate the tire/s
will no longer display, and a pressure
the instrument cluster and an acoustic with the low pressure (the one/s
value will display in place of the
signal will notify that tire pressure is flashing in the instrument panel
dashes.
low in one or more of the four tires. graphic) to the recommended cold
A system fault can occur due to any of
pressure inflation value indicated on
the following:
the label. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressure value, the system

214
 Driving
• Signal interference due to electronic sound. In addition, the graphic in
devices or driving next to facilities the instrument cluster will still
emitting the same radio frequencies display a flashing pressure value
as the TPMS sensors. corresponding to the compact tire
• Installing aftermarket window position.
tinting that contains materials that
may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped
with TPMS sensors.
The instrument cluster will also display
a "Service Tire Pressure System"
message for a minimum of five
seconds when a system fault related to • After driving the vehicle for up to 20
an incorrect sensor location fault is minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), 5
detected. In this case, the "Service Tire the TPMS light will flash for 75
Pressure System" message is then seconds and then remain lit. The
followed with a graphic display with instrument cluster will then display a
pressure values still shown. This "Service Tire Pressure System"
Vehicles with Compact Spare Tire
indicates that the pressure values are message for a minimum of five
still being received from the TPMS • The compact spare tire does not seconds and then displays dashes (--)
sensors but they may not be located in have a TPMS sensor. Therefore, the in place of the pressure value.
the correct vehicle position. The TPMS will not monitor the pressure
• Each subsequent ignition switch
system still needs to be serviced as of the compact spare tire.
cycle, will be followed by a beeping
long as the "Service Tire Pressure • If you replace a pneumatic having sound, the TPMS light will flash
System" message is displayed. pressure below the low-pressure for 75 seconds and then remain lit.
warning limit, with the compact The instrument cluster will then
spare tire, on the next ignition display a "Service Tire Pressure
switch cycle, the TPMS light will System" message for a minimum of
illuminate followed by a beeping five seconds and subsequently

215
 Driving
displays dashes (--) in place of the assemblies. After replacing all four minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
pressure value. wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) TPMS will chime, the TPMS light
with tires not equipped with Tire will flash for 75 seconds and then
Pressure Monitoring System sensors, turn off. The instrument cluster will
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above then display the “Service Tire Pressure
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will System” message. The instrument
chime, the TPMS light will flash on cluster will also display pressure values
and off for 75 seconds and then in place of the dashes (--). On the next
remain on and the instrument cluster ignition switch cycle the “Service Tire
will display the “Service Tire Pressure Pressure System” message will no
System” message and then display longer be displayed as long as no
dashes (--) in place of the pressure system fault exists.
values. Beginning with the next
• Once you repair, replace or reinstall a ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no
tire with the compact spare tire, the longer chime or display the “Service
TPMS will update automatically. The Tire Pressure System” message in the
TPMS light will turn OFF and the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
5 graphic in the instrument cluster will remain in place of the pressure values.
display a new pressure value instead
of dashes (--), as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four tires.
The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
acquire and process the updated
information.

TPMS Deactivation
The TPMS can be deactivated if To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four
replacing all four tire rims with wheel wheel and tire assemblies (road tires)
and tire assemblies free of TPMS with tires equipped with TPMS sensors.
sensors, such as winter wheel and tire Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20

216
 Driving

General Information Fuel Requirements Maserati recommends the use of

gasoline that meets the WWFC
This device complies with Part 15 of
The engines are designed to meet all specifications if they are available.
the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry
environmental regulations and Besides using unleaded gasoline with
Canada. Operation is subject to the
provide excellent fuel economy and the proper octane rating, gasoline
following conditions:
performance when using unleaded that contain detergents, anti-corrosion
• This device may not cause harmful premium gasoline with an AKI octane and stability additives are
interference. rating of 91 or above. AKI (Anti Knock recommended. Using gasoline that
• This device must accept any Index) is an average on the Research have these additives may help improve
interference received, including Octane Number, RON, and the Motor fuel economy, reduce emissions, and
interference that may cause Octane Number, MON (RON + MON/2 maintain vehicle performance.
undesired operation. gives you the AKI).
The TPMS sensors are regulated under Light spark knock at low engine
one of the following licenses: speeds is not harmful to your engine. CAUTION!
However, continued heavy spark The anti-pollution devices of the
United States MRXC4W4MA4
knock at high speeds can cause vehicle require unleaded fuel to be
Canada 2546–C4W4MA4 damage, and immediate service is used at all times. Under no
circumstance, not even in an
5
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause emergency, should leaded fuel be
problems such as hard starting, supplied to the fuel tank, not even a
stalling, and hesitation. If you minimum quantity. This would
experience these symptoms, try irreparably damage the catalytic
another brand of gasoline before converters. An inefficient catalytic
considering service for the vehicle at converter results in noxious exhaust
an Authorized Maserati Dealer. emissions which damage the
Over 40 auto manufacturers environment.
worldwide have issued and endorsed
consistent gasoline specifications (the Reformulated Gasoline
World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC)
Many areas of the country require the
which define fuel properties necessary
use of cleaner burning gasoline,
to deliver enhanced emissions,
referred to as “Reformulated
performance, and durability for your
Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
vehicle.

217
 Driving
contains oxygenates and are Problems that result from using Materials Added to Fuel
specifically blended to reduce vehicle gasoline containing Methanol or
All gasoline sold in the United States is
emissions and improve air quality. gasoline containing more than 10%
required to contain effective
Maserati supports the use of Ethanol are not the responsibility of
detergent additives. Use of additional
reformulated gasoline. Properly Maserati and may not be covered
detergents or other additives is not
blended reformulated gasoline will under warranty.
needed under normal conditions and
provide excellent performance and
durability of engine and fuel system MMT in Gasoline they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add
components. MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl
anything to the fuel.
Manganese Tricarbonyl) is a
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends manganese containing metallic Fuel System Warnings
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded additive that is blended into some
gasoline with oxygenates such as gasoline to increase octane.
Ethanol. Fuels blended with Gasoline blended with MMT provides
WARNING!
oxygenates may be used in your no performance advantage beyond
Follow these guidelines to maintain
vehicle. gasoline of the same octane number
your vehicle's performance:
5 without MMT.
Maserati recommends gasoline • The use of leaded gasoline is
CAUTION! without MMT to be used in your prohibited by Federal law. Using
DO NOT use gasoline containing vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline leaded gasoline can impair engine
Methanol or gasoline containing more may not be indicated on the gasoline performance and damage the
than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends pump; therefore, you should ask the emissions control system.
may result in starting and driveability gasoline station operator whether or • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel
problems, damage critical fuel system not the gasoline contains MMT. or ignition malfunctions can cause
components, cause emissions to exceed It is even more important to look for the catalytic converter to overheat. If
the applicable standard, and/or cause gasoline without MMT in Canada, you notice a pungent burning odor
the Malfunction Indicator Light to because MMT can be used at levels or some light smoke, your engine
illuminate (see “Instrument Cluster” in higher than those allowed in the may be out of tune or
section 4). Pump labels should clearly United States. MMT is prohibited in malfunctioning and may require
communicate if a fuel contains greater Federal and California reformulated immediate service. Contact an
than 10% Ethanol. gasoline. Authorized Maserati Dealer for
assistance.
(Continued)
218
 Driving
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are
the engine running for an extended Refueling
period. If the vehicle is stopped in
now being sold as octane enhancers, an open area with the engine To access the fuel filler neck, the filler
is not recommended. Most of these running for more than a short door must be unlocked. From outside
products contain high period, adjust the ventilation system the vehicle, this can only be done by
concentrations of methanol. Fuel to force fresh, outside air into the pressing the unlock or the lock
system damage or vehicle vehicle. button on the key fob RKE
performance problems resulting transmitter, in the same way as if
• Guard against carbon monoxide
from the use of such fuels or opening or closing the doors. If any of
with proper maintenance. Have the
additives is not the responsibility of the door lock controls is pressed from
exhaust system inspected every time
Maserati. inside the vehicle, the filler door will
the vehicle is raised. Have any
abnormal conditions repaired still remain open to allow refueling.
NOTE: promptly. Until repaired, drive with Once the fuel filler door is unlocked,
International tampering with the all side windows fully open. proceed as follows:
emissions control system can result in • Press the indicated area on the filler
civil penalties being assessed against door, which is located on the rear
you. left side of the vehicle: the filler 5
door will open completely.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper
door inside the filler seals the
system.
WARNING! • Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust filler – the nozzle opens and holds
gases is deadly. Follow the the flapper door while refueling.
precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They
contain carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas, which
can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and
never sit in a parked vehicle with

219
 Driving
NOTE: • To avoid the risk of inhaling noxious
Only the correct size nozzle opens the fumes, do not breathe close to the
fuel filler door, when opened. CAUTION!
latches allowing the flapper door on
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling,
the fuel filler to open. • Never have any smoking materials lit
do not “top off” the fuel tank after
in or near the vehicle when the fuel
filling.
filler door is open or the tank is
being filled. Emergency refueling funnel
• Never add fuel when the engine is A funnel is provided (in the trunk in
running. This violates most anti-fire the tool box container) for emergency
regulations and may cause the refueling with a gas can.
malfunction indicator light to
turn on (see “Instrument Cluster” in
section 4).
Fill the vehicle with fuel. Fuel tank
capacity is indicated in the “Refillings”
5 table in section 8.
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts
off, the fuel tank is basically full: it is
possible to further ensure refueling by
enabling the fuel nozzle additional
fuel supply until twofold clicks. After
the two additional clicks, the amount
of fuel allowed by the system is very
low, we recommend therefore not to
persist further.
Wait approximately 10 seconds before
removing the fuel nozzle in order to
ensure completed supply of residual
WARNING! fuel and restrict the risk of fouling the
• To avoid the risk of fire, do not fuel filler door area.
approach the filler with open flames Remove the fuel nozzle and close the
or cigarettes! fuel filler door.

220
 Driving
• Pull the release cable moderately to Driving Conditions
avoid its possible break. It's not
WARNING! possible to feel or hear the Before the Trip
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped unlocking of the fuel filler door
into a portable container that is inside Check the following at regular
actuator.
of a vehicle. You could be burned. intervals and always before long trips:
Always place gas containers on the • tire pressure and condition;
ground and outside the vehicle while • levels of fluids and lubricants;
filling.
• conditions of the windshield wiper
blades;
Emergency Fuel Filler Door • clean the glass on the external light
Release and all other glass surfaces;
If you are unable to unlock the fuel • proper operation of the warning
filler door using the key fob RKE lights and of the external lights.
transmitter, then use the fuel filler
door emergency release fitted in the • Then open normally the fuel filler
trunk. door. CAUTION! 5
It is however advisable to perform
• Open the trunk (see “To enter the
these checks at least every 600 mi
Trunk” in section 2).
(1,000 km) and always following the
• Lift the access cover on the left side maintenance schedule reported in
of the trunk compartment. section 7.
Before you drive:
• adjust seat position, steering wheel,
adjustable pedals (if equipped with)
and rear-view mirrors in order to
have the best driving position;
• ensure that nothing (mat covers,
etc.) is obstructing the pedals
movement;

221
 Driving
• carefully arrange and secure any Safe Driving the eyes. If they are too high, they
objects in the trunk, to prevent them may bother other drivers.
Although the vehicle is equipped with
to move forward in case of sudden • Use the high beams only outside of
active and passive safety devices, the
stops; densely-populated areas and when
driver's conduct is always a decisive
• avoid drinking alcohol. factor for road safety. you are sure that they will not
Some simple rules for traveling safely disturb other drivers.
in different conditions are listed • When another vehicle is
WARNING! below. Some of them will probably approaching, switch from high
Beyond being prohibited by law, it is already sound familiar but, in any case, beams (if on) to low beams.
extremely dangerous to ride inside the it would be useful to read them • Keep lights and headlights clean.
trunk or on the front lid. In the event carefully. • Beware of animals crossing the road.
of an accident, passengers sitting Driving at Night Driving in the Rain
there are more exposed to the risk of
serious injury. Passengers must only The main guidelines to follow when Rain and wet roads are dangerous. On
travel seated in the vehicle seats, with driving at night are set out below. a wet road all maneuvers are more
the seat belts fastened. Always check • Drive carefully. Night conditions difficult since wheel grip on the
5 that the driver and all passengers demands more focus and attention. asphalt is significantly reduced. This
have the seat belts correctly fastened. • Reduce your speed, especially on means that braking distances increase
roads with no streetlights. considerably and road grip decreases.
Some advice for driving in the rain are
• Stop at early signs of drowsiness.
listed below.
Continuing to drive would be a risk
for yourself and for others. Have a • Reduce your speed and keep a
rest before continuing your trip. greater safety distance from the
• Keep the vehicle at a greater vehicles in front of you. High speed
distance from vehicles in front of you may result in a loss of vehicle control.
than you would during the day: it is • When driving on wet or slushy roads,
difficult to assess the speed of other it is possible for a wedge of water to
vehicles when you only see the lights. build up between the tire and road
• Check that the headlights are surface. This is known as
correctly adjusted: if they are too aquaplaning and may cause partial
low, they reduce visibility and strain or complete loss of vehicle control
and stopping ability. To reduce this

222
 Driving
possibility: slow down if the road has difficult and braking distances are • When driving inside a tunnel in
standing water or puddles. extended. daylight turn on the low beams in
• Heavy rain substantially reduces • Keep a safe distance from the advance; avoid high beams and be
visibility. In these circumstances, even vehicle in front of you. aware of the rapid brightness
during the day, turn on the low • Avoid sudden changes in speed as change. Avoid abrupt maneuvers
beams, to be more visible to other much as possible. that could be dangerous for the
drivers. following vehicle.
• Whenever possible, avoid
• Set the air conditioning and heating overtaking. • Never coast downhill with the
system controls on the demisting engine off or in neutral.
• If you are forced to stop the vehicle
function, in order to avoid any (breakdowns, impossibility of • Remember that passing other
visibility problem. proceeding due to poor visibility, vehicles when driving uphill is slower
• Periodically check the conditions of etc.), first of all, try to stop off of the and thus requires more free distance
the windshield wiper blades. travel lane. Then turn on the hazard on the road. If you are being
• In low grip conditions use I C E warning flashers and, if possible, the overtaken on a hill, slow down and
driving mode (see chapter low beams. allow the other vehicle to pass.
“Automatic Transmission” in this • Sound the horn rhythmically if you Driving on Snow or Ice
section). 5
hear another vehicle approaching. Please consider some general advice
Driving in Fog for driving in these conditions, listed
If the fog is dense, avoid traveling if below.
CAUTION!
possible. Be aware that rear fog lights can • Maintain a very moderate speed.
When driving in mist, blanket fog or bother the drivers following your • Fit snow chains or snow tires if the
when there is the possibility of banks vehicle: when visibility is back to road is covered with snow: see the
of fog, please consider some advices normal, turn off these lights. paragraphs “Tires – General
listed below. Information” in this section.
• Keep a moderate speed. Driving in the Mountains • We recommend you to activate the
• Even in daytime, turn on the low Mountain roads usually have many I C E mode (see chapter “Automatic
beams, the rear fog lights. Do not narrow turns and curves, tunnels and Transmission” in this section).
use the high beams. steep uphill or downhill slopes: please • During the winter season, even
• Remember that fog creates consider some advices listed below. apparently dry roads can have icy
dampness on the asphalt and thus • Drive at a moderate speed, avoid sections. Be careful when crossing
any type of maneuver is more “cutting” corners. bridges, viaducts and roads that

223
 Driving
have little exposure to the sun and Driving through Flooded through it. Never drive through
are bordered by trees and rocks. Sections standing water that is deeper than
They may be icy. the bottom of the tire rims mounted
Driving through more than a on the vehicle.
• Keep an ample safe distance from
centimeter of deep shallow standing
the vehicles in front of you. • Determine the condition of the road
water section will require extra
• Avoid sharp braking, sharp changes or the path that is under water and if
caution to ensure passenger safety and
in direction and rapid acceleration. there are any obstacles in the way
prevent damage to your vehicle.
Rapid acceleration on snow covered before driving through the standing
or icy surfaces may cause the driving water.
wheels to pull erratically to the right • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
WARNING!
or left. This phenomenon occurs driving through standing water. This
when there is a difference in the Do not drive on or across a road or will minimize wave effects.
surface traction under the rear path where water is flowing and/or
• Driving through standing water may
(driving) wheels. rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
cause damage to your vehicle
water can wear away the road or path
drivetrain components. After driving
surface and cause your vehicle to sink
through standing water, do not drive
5 into deeper water. Furthermore,
WARNING! if you are not sure about drivetrain
flowing and/or rising water can carry
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces condition. Such damage is not
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
is dangerous. Unequal traction can covered by the New Vehicle
follow this warning may result in
cause sudden pulling of the rear Warranty.
injuries that are serious or fatal to
driving wheels. You could lose control you, your passengers, and others • Getting water inside your vehicle
of the vehicle and possibly have a around you. engine can cause it to lock up and
collision. Accelerate slowly and stall out, and cause serious internal
carefully whenever there is likely to be Although your vehicle is capable of damage to the engine. Such damage
poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, driving through shallow standing is not covered by the New Vehicle
loose sand, etc.). water, consider the following Caution Warranty.
and Warning before doing so. • After driving through standing water
always have the fluids (engine oil,
CAUTION! transmission oil, etc) checked for
contaminations at an Authorized
• Always check the depth of the Maserati Dealer.
standing water before driving

224
 Driving

WARNING!
• Driving through standing water
limits your vehicle traction
capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
• Driving through standing water
limits your vehicle braking
capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after
driving through standing water,
drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to
progressively dry the brakes discs
and pads. 5
• Getting water inside your vehicle
engine can cause it to lock up and
stall out.
• Failure to follow these warnings
may result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.

225
 Driving

226
6 – In an Emergency

Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
In the Event of an Accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
In case of a Punctured Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Emergency Release of the Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . 235
Transmission Manual Release of P (Park) Position . . . . 237
Freeing the Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Auxiliary Jump-Start Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Towing a Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

227
 In an Emergency

Tool Kit Hazard Warning Flashers

The tool kit and other first aid The hazard warning flasher switch is
equipment are relocated in the trunk located in the center of the dashboard
and are available by lifting the ground under the MTC display.
coverage. Press the switch to turn on the hazard
warning flashers to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. When these
lights illuminate, the turn signals, the
related warning lights on the
instrument cluster and the button start
Beside the tool kit the vehicle is also
flashing.
equipped with the following tools:
Press the switch a second time to turn
• compact spare wheel. The compact off the hazard warning flashers.
spare wheel is fully provided with This is an emergency warning system
electric compressor box, jack and and it should not be used when the
tools for fitting the compact spare vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
The tool kit includes following tools: wheel, located inside the compact vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
• 8/10 mm open end wrenches; spare wheel itself; safety hazard for other motorists.
• 13/17 mm open end wrenches; • funnel for emergency supply. When you must leave the vehicle to
6 • double slot + cross-head screwdriver;
seek assistance, the hazard warning
flashers will continue to operate even
• tow hook; though the ignition is placed in the
• pincer for wheel stud caps extraction OFF position.
(where provided);
• tool for electric parking brake
actuator release. CAUTION!
• When the hazard warning flashers
are activated, the turn signals control
is disabled.

228
 In an Emergency
(Continued)
• With extended use the hazard
In the Event of an ask people around you to put their
cigarettes out.
warning flashers may wear down Accident • To extinguish fires, even small ones,
your battery. use a fire extinguisher, blankets,
It is important always to keep calm.
sand or earth. Never use water.
• If not directly involved, stop at a safe
distance of at least ten meters away • In multiple accidents occurred on
from the accident area. highways, particularly where
visibility is poor, there is a high risk
• If on a highway, stop without
of being involved in other collisions.
obstructing the emergency lane and
Leave the vehicle immediately and
be especially careful if you need to
move away from the area.
exit the vehicle.
• Turn off the engine and switch on In case of Injured Persons
the hazard lights. • Never leave the injured person
• At night, illuminate the accident alone.
area with the headlights. • Do not crowd around injured
• Always act with caution to avoid the persons.
risk of being crashed into by other • Reassure the injured person that
drivers. help is on the way and stay close to
• Indicate that an accident has them to assist them to avoid possible
occurred by placing the emergency
6
panic attacks.
triangle (if foreseen) in a well visible • Release or cut the seat belts
position and at the prescribed restraining the injured persons.
distance.
• Do not give the injured persons
• Call the emergency services, anything to drink.
providing as much information as
• Never move an injured person.
possible. On the highway, use the
special call boxes. • Remove the injured person from the
vehicle only in an emergency
• Remove the ignition key (if present)
situation, e.g. if there is a risk of fire,
from the vehicles involved.
sinking in water or falling down into
• If fuel or other chemical products a pit.
can be smelled, do not smoke and

229
 In an Emergency
• When removing an injured person, standard electric torch can be Engine Overheating
do not pull his/her limbs, never bend included. It ensures an higher
his/her head and, as far as possible, effectiveness compared with To reduce potentially overheating of
keep his/her body in a horizontal conventional 10–kilo (22 lb) fire the engine in city traffic, while
position. extinguishers and preventing stationary, place the transmission in N
damage to hides and rugs. (Neutral), but do not increase the
Emergency Kit (for engine idle speed.
versions/markets where First Aid Kit
provided) NOTE:
For versions/markets, where provided, There are steps that you can take to
The Emergency Kit provides first aid in a first aid kit is available in the trunk. slow down an impending overheat
case of a car breakdown or any other This kit contains following: condition:
situation. The kit comes in a case on
the left side of the trunk. • sterile gauze to cover and clean the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on,
The kit includes the following wounds; turn it off. The A/C system adds heat
elements: • bandages of various sizes; to the engine cooling system and
• treated adhesive bandages of various turning the A/C off can help remove
• emergency triangle; this heat.
sizes;
• reflective emergency vest; • You can also turn the temperature
• an adhesive bandage strip;
• luminescent pipes providing chemical control to maximum heat, the mode
lights; • a pair of rounded-end scissors;
control to floor and the blower
6 • dynamo torch; • gloves; control to high. This allows the
• First Aid Kit; • rescue blanket. heater core to act as a supplement to
• gloves; the radiator and aids in removing
heat from the engine cooling system.
• ice scraper;
• box with spare lamps and fuses.
NOTE: CAUTION!
• The items inside the kit could change Driving with a hot cooling system
according to different countries' could damage your vehicle. If the
regulations. temperature gage reads “H” (refer to
• Upon request, a potassium-based fire “Instrument Cluster” in section 4), pull
suppressor same size and weight as a (Continued)

230
 In an Emergency
(Continued)
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
In case of a Punctured Tire • It is recommended that the wheels
of the vehicle be chocked, and that
vehicle with the air conditioner turned The vehicle is equipped with a no person should remain in a vehicle
off until the temperature gage drops compact spare wheel. that is being jacked.
back into the normal range. If the
Using the Compact Spare • If the vehicle has been stopped on a
temperature gage remains on the
Wheel slope or an uneven surface, place
“H,” turn the engine off immediately
chocks or other suitable items in
and contact the Authorized Maserati The compact spare wheel is stored in front of or behind the wheels to
Dealer. the trunk and is supplied deflated in stop the vehicle from moving.
order to limit the amount of space
• Never start or run the engine with
occupied. An electric compressor is
the vehicle on a jack.
also provided for inflating. In the
WARNING! event of a tire puncture, proceed as • No person should place any portion
You or others can be badly burned by follows. of their body under a vehicle that is
hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or supported by a jack.
steam from your radiator. If you see • Stop the vehicle in a place that does
or hear steam coming from under the not constitute a danger to traffic • Lift the ground coverage of the
engine lid, do not open it until the and where the wheel can be trunk.
radiator has had time to cool. changed safely. The vehicle must be
• Remove the tool kit.
Never try to open a coolant pressure level and on firm ground.
cap (refer to “Maintenance • Select the P (Park) mode and then
engage manually the electric
6
Procedures” in section 7) when the
radiator is overheated. parking brake and move the ignition
switch to OFF position.
• If necessary, turn the hazard warning
flashers on and place the warning
triangle at the required distance.

WARNING!
• The jack should be used on level and
firm ground wherever possible.

231
 In an Emergency
• Take the tools for changing the • a telescopic wrench with rubber
wheel from the container. coated handle for unscrewing/
tightening the wheel bolts;
• an adapter to be fitted to the
wrench for the wheel nuts;
• a jack.
• Lift the compressor cover and
remove the hose with the pressure
gage and the cable with a plug for
the power outlet.
• Unscrew the valve cap of the
compact spare wheel and screw the
CAUTION!
• Unscrew and pull out the locking fitting of the inflation hose onto the
wheel knob. valve. • In order to obtain a more accurate
• Insert the plug in one of the reading, the compressor should be
available power outlets fitted in the switched off when checking the tire
trunk or cabin. pressure of the compact spare wheel
• Turn the compressor on by pressing on the pressure gage.
the switch. • Do not run the compressor for more
6 • Stop the compressor pressing switch than 20 minutes: there is a risk it
again, when the pressure indicated could overheat. Also, prolonged
by the gage reaches the power absorption may discharge the
recommended level (see “Tire battery, subsequently preventing the
Inflation Pressure” in section 8) and engine from starting.
screw the cap on the compact spare • The compressor has been designed
• Take the container and the compact
wheel valve. exclusively to inflate compact spare
spare wheel out of the trunk.
wheels; do not use it to inflate air
Container inserted in the compact mattresses, dinghies etc.
spare wheel contains:
• an electric compressor, complete
with pressure gage and fitting for
inflating the compact spare wheel;

232
 In an Emergency
• Remove the center cover of the • Turn the jack lever until the wheel is • Fit the compact spare wheel with the
wheel rim (if foreseen) levering into raised a few centimeters off the valve stem facing outward, securing
the provided groove on the outer ground. it with the five bolts previously
ledge of the cover. • Completely unscrew the five bolts removed.
• Fit the adapter on the wrench. and remove the wheel. In case a • Turn the lever of the jack to lower
Extend the wrench as shown, then “Wheel Security Stud Bolt” is the vehicle and remove the jack.
loosen by approximately one turn, installed, it can only be removed by • Fully tighten the bolts, alternately
the five bolts on the wheel to be using the specific fitting wrench tightening diametrically opposite.
changed. provided with the “Wheel Security
Stud Bolt Kit”, available in the
Genuine Accessories range.

• Place the jack near the wheel to be 6

changed as illustrated.
• Make sure that the head of the jack
is correctly inserted in one of the
slots beneath the sole bar.

WARNING!
The lifted vehicle may fall and
damage the vehicle's body if the jack
is not positioned correctly.

233
 In an Emergency
holding and braking of the vehicle • Fully tighten the bolts, alternately
will be compromised. Avoid tightening diametrically opposite.
WARNING! accelerating to full speed, heavy
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle braking and fast cornering.
off the jack, do not tighten the wheel
• The compact spare wheel must be
bolts fully until the vehicle has been
inflated to the recommended tire
lowered. Failure to follow this
pressure (see “Tire Inflation
warning may result in personal injury.
Pressure” in section 8).
• For safety reasons, it is absolutely
forbidden to drive with more than
one compact spare wheel fitted on
the vehicle.
• Snow chains cannot be fitted on the
compact spare wheel.
• The spare wheel can travel a WARNING!
maximum of 1,800 mi (3,000 km). Observe the tightening torque for the
bolts securing the wheels (72.3 ±
To Refit the Standard Wheel with 7 lb/ft / 98 ± 10 Nm). This is equivalent
Repaired or Replaced Tire to a load of approximately 44 lb
6 • Following the procedure and the (20 kg) being placed on the handle of
caution described above, raise the the wrench supplied when extended
WARNING!
vehicle and remove the compact for use.
• The spare wheel is narrower than
spare wheel reusing the supplied
standard wheels and must only be • Reassemble the center cover (if
wrench with adapter, suitably
used to travel the distance required foreseen) on the wheel rim.
extended.
to reach a service station, where the Once finished:
punctured tire can be repaired or • Fit the standard wheel with repaired
replaced. or replaced tire. • completely deflate the compact
• Tighten the original bolts on the spare wheel by pressing on the valve
• Do not exceed a maximum speed of with the overhang of the valve cap;
50 mph (80 km/h) when using the wheel.
• Lower the vehicle and remove the • place the compact spare wheel and
compact spare wheel; when this
jack. tool container in the trunk;
limit is exceeded, the stability, road

234
 In an Emergency
• fix everything in place with the • reposition the tool kit; Emergency Release of the
locking knob; • lower the ground coverage at the
bottom of the trunk.
Parking Brake
In the event the electric parking brake
locks due to a total system failure (see
“Parking Brake” in section 5), you
need to release the parking brake by
following one of the two following
procedures in order to operate the
vehicle.

Manual Release
• place the compressor, the jack, the To manually release the parking brake,
wrench and the adapter in the it is necessary to use the special tool
container inside the compact spare provided with the toolkit placed in the
wheel; trunk (see “Tool Kit” in this section).
• place the compressor, the jack, the
wrench and the adapter in the
container inside the compact spare
wheel; 6

235
 In an Emergency
To release the brake manually, open
the trunk lid (see “To enter the trunk”
in section 2) and proceed as follows:
• Lift the front edge of the trunk
carpet releasing the two buttons
indicated and fold it back.

• Remove the rubber inspection cover • Insert the hex tip of the flexible part
by pulling its tab in order to locate of the special tool, inside the
the actuator that controls the lock disclosed section.
and unlock system of the parking • Turn the handle of the special tool
brake. clockwise until release.

• Lift the flap of the floor covering as

indicated.

• Remove the protective cap by • Remove the special tool from its seat
unscrew it counterclockwise using and seal with the cap.
the hexagonal socket end of the • Reassemble all parts removed for this
special tool. operation.
• Remove the underneath
sound-absorbing layer, leveraging
the two side grips.

236
 In an Emergency

Release after Battery Transmission Manual

Disconnection Release of P (Park)
The following maneuver does not
allow the full release of the parking
Position
brake but still allows for the vehicle to The manual disengagement of the
move, as e.g. to load it on rescue shift from P (Park) has the purpose to
vehicles. allow pushing or towing the vehicle if
• Within 3 minutes after power off not normally possible using the shift
(ignition device OFF), reconnect the lever (such as inability to start the
battery. engine).
The current device is exclusively • Slip the lace from its seat.
• Turn the ignition switch in RUN • With the tip of a screwdriver press
intended for emergency situations,
position. the clip shown in the picture box
but not for frequent use.
• Press the brake pedal by and lift the lace up to release the
simultaneously raising the EPB transmission from the P (Park)
control for 5 seconds: the brake position. The new position will allow
cables will loosen enabling the WARNING!
vehicle towing.
vehicle to be moved. Always secure your vehicle by fully
applying the parking brake, before • Release the parking brake only when
activating the manual park release. the vehicle is securely connected to a
Activating the manual park release tow vehicle. 6
WARNING!
will allow your vehicle to roll away if
After each emergency release, the it is not secured by the parking brake.
warning light and related Activating the manual park release on
break-down message will light up and an unsecured vehicle could lead to
display on the instrument cluster. The serious injury or death for those in or
electric parking brake system remains around the vehicle.
inefficient and must be repaired by
the Authorized Maserati Dealer to The lace that allows the emergency
resume operation. manual park release is located on the
left part of the driver’s foot well.
• Lift the mat on the driver side to
access the lace.

237
 In an Emergency

Freeing the Stuck Vehicle of AWD will happen immediately Auxiliary Jump-Start
when engaging a forward gear.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud, sand, or Procedure
snow, it can probably be moved by a If your vehicle has a discharged battery
simple rocking motion. CAUTION!
it can be jump-started using a set of
Steer the wheel right and left to clear Racing the engine or spinning the
jumper cables and a battery of another
the area around the front wheels. drive wheels may lead to transmission
vehicle or by using a portable battery
Shift then between D (Drive) or M overheating and failure. Allow the
booster. It is necessary to have proper
(Manual) and R (Reverse) (see chapter engine to idle with the shift lever in N
jumper cables in order to connect the
“Automatic Transmission” in section (Neutral) for at least one minute after
booster battery to the remote posts of
5). Shifting to M (Manual), try to free every five rocking-motion cycles. This
the discharged battery. Booster cables
the car starting in second gear. At low will minimize overheating and reduce
have usually positive and negative
speed motion of the vehicle, you can the risk of transmission failure during
terminal clamps and are identified by a
switch quickly from D (Drive) to R prolonged efforts to free a stuck
different from the sheath color (red =
(Reverse), and vice versa, just by vehicle.
positive, black = negative). Maserati
pressing the release button on the provides on request jumper cables
shift lever. created for its models and content in a
For more effectiveness press lightly on pratical case.
the accelerator pedal in order to avoid WARNING!
driving wheel slippage. Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. NOTE:
6 If unable to release the vehicle in one Forces generated by excessive drive The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
of the previously described ways, enter wheel speeds may cause damage, or provide you with information about
the low grip driving mode, by pressing even failure, of the drivetrain and the “Maserati Jumper Cables Kit”,
the I C E, and completely exclude the tires. A tire could explode and injure available in the Genuine Accessories
yaw and slip control system, by someone. Do not spin your vehicle's range.
pressing the button for 2 seconds. wheels continuously without stopping
Moving the shift lever between D when you are stuck and do not let Jump-starting can be dangerous if
(Drive) and R (Reverse) to start. anyone near a spinning wheel, no done improperly so please follow the
matter what the speed. procedures in this section carefully.
Notes for AWD vehicle model
On these vehicles slippage produced
by low grip conditions, automatically
activates the AWD mode. Using the
drive mode M (Manual), the insertion
238
 In an Emergency
NOTE: • Do not carry out this procedure if Battery Remote Posts Position
When using a portable battery you have not done it before:
For easier operation, remote battery
booster pack, follow the battery incorrect maneuvers can originate
posts for jumpstarting are located in
manufacturer’s operating instructions high electrical discharges and even
the engine compartment while the
and precautions. cause the battery to explode.
battery is stored in the trunk.
• To avoid the risk of explosion or fire, Open the engine lid (see “Open and
do not approach the battery with Close the Engine Lid” in section 2) the
CAUTION! open flames or cigarettes that could positive remote post (+) and the
generate sparks. negative remote post (-) are easily
• To jump start a vehicle do not use a
recognizable by the icons labeled on
portable battery booster pack or any NOTE: the integrated power module.
other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or If you need to disconnect the battery
damage to the battery, starter from the vehicle electrical system, see
motor, alternator or electrical system “Maintenance — Free Battery” in
of the vehicle with the dead battery section 7).
may occur.
• Do not use a battery charger for
emergency starting under any
circumstances. You could damage
the electronic systems, particularly 6
the control units managing the
ignition and fuel supply functions.

WARNING!
• Do not attempt jump-starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It could
rupture or explode during jump start
and cause personal injury.

239
 In an Emergency

Jump-Start Procedure • Connect one terminal clamp of the

positive jumper cable to the positive
(+) remote post of the discharged
vehicle after lifting the protection
WARNING!
cap of the cable indicated on the
• Stay clear of the radiator cooling fan
external side of the integrated
whenever the engine lid is raised. It
power module.
can start anytime the ignition switch
is on. You can be injured by the
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as
• Start the engine in the vehicle that
watch bands or bracelets that might
has the booster battery, let the
make an inadvertent electrical
engine idle a few minutes, and then
contact. You could be seriously
start the engine in the vehicle with
injured.
the discharged battery. If using a
• Do not allow the vehicles involved in portable battery booster, wait a few
the jumpstarting operation to touch seconds after connecting the cables,
each other as this could establish a before starting the booster vehicle.
ground connection and cause • Connect the opposite terminal clamp
of the positive (+) jumper cable to Once the engine is started, remove the
personal injury. jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
6 the positive (+) post of the booster
• Turn off the heater, radio, and all battery. • Disconnect one terminal clamp of the
unnecessary electrical accessories. • Connect one terminal clamp of the negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the
• Set the parking brake, shift the
negative (-) post of the booster vehicle with the discharged battery.
automatic transmission into P (Park)
and turn the ignition to OFF. battery. • Disconnect the opposite terminal
• Connect the opposite terminal clamp clamp of the negative jumper cable
• If using another vehicle to jumpstart
of the negative (-) jumper cable to from the negative (-) post of the
the battery, park the vehicle within
the remote negative (-) post of the booster battery.
the jumper cables reach and set the
parking brake and make sure the vehicle with the discharged battery • Disconnect one terminal clamp of the
ignition is OFF. as rendered. positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the booster
battery.

240
 In an Emergency
• Disconnect the terminal clamp of the Towing a Disabled Vehicle accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
positive jumper cable from the while being towed, the ignition
remote positive (+) post of the Proper towing or lifting equipment is must be in RUN position, do not use
discharged vehicle. required to prevent damage to your the ACC position.
vehicle. Use only towing bars and
NOTE: other equipment designed for the
If frequent jump-starting is required purpose, following equipment CAUTION!
to start your vehicle you should have manufacturer’s instructions. Your vehicle is equipped with tow
the battery and charging system Safety chains are mandatory. eyes, which are mounted in the front
inspected at an Authorized Maserati Securely attach a towing bar or other and the rear. Tow eyes are for
Dealer center. towing device to main structural emergency use only, for example to
members of the vehicle, not to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do
bumpers or associated brackets. not use tow eyes for tow truck
Make sure you comply with local hookup as you could damage your
towing regulations. vehicle.
• If the vehicle's battery is discharged,
refer to the following paragraph on Manual Release of
how to shift the automatic Transmission and Parking
transmission out of the P (Park) Brake
position and release the parking In order to push or tow the vehicle if
brake. 6
unable to shift the transmission out of
• If the vehicle battery is still charged, P (Park) (such as a discharged battery),
turn off the engine and disengage a manual park release is available. In
the parking brake manually (if this case it is necessary to manually
automatically engaged) by using the release the shift lever and the parking
command behind the shift lever (see brake by applying the emergency
“Parking Brake” chapter in section procedure (see “Parking Brake” in
5). Shift then manually the section 5).
transmission out of P (Park) as Follow the steps as indicated in
described in “Transmission Manual “Transmission Manual Release of P
Release of P (Park) Position” chapter (Park) Position” in this section to
of this section. If you need to use the manually disengage the transmission.

241
 In an Emergency

Vehicle Towing Conditions platform of a rescue vehicle, or with

the rear wheels raised using a wheel
Maserati does not recommend that
lift.
you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly as
vehicle damage may occur. Instead, it is
recommended to tow your vehicle CAUTION!
with all four wheels off the ground If you have to tow the RWD vehicle
using a flatbed. with 2 wheels raised, ensure that the
If flatbed equipment is not available, ignition switch is in the OFF position. If
and the transmission is still operable, a this is not observed, when the ESC is
RWD vehicle may be flat towed (with active, the ECU will store a
all four wheels on the ground) under NOTE:
malfunction and the relative warning
the following conditions. light will illuminate on the Maximum work angle of towing cable:
• The shift lever must be in N (Neutral). instrument cluster display. This 15°.
• The distance to be traveled must not requires the intervention of the
exceed 30 mi (50 km). Authorized Maserati Dealer to reset
the system.
• The towing speed must not exceed
30 mph (50 km/h).
Use tow hook of the tool kit
The tow hook is contained in the tool
6 CAUTION! kit (see “Tool Kit” in this section) and
AWD vehicle can be towed with both must be screwed in its seat accessible
axles on the ground without behind the front grille, right-hand
limitations, single axle towing is side.
forbidden as can seriously damage Carefully clean the threaded seat
torque driver of AWD system. before tightening the hook.
Screw the tow hook into its seat for
If the transmission is not operable, or approximately 11 turns.
the RWD vehicle must be towed faster
than 30 mph (50 km/h) or farther than
30 mi (50 km) (for example on a
highway), tow with the rear driving
wheels off the ground and on a

242
7 – Maintenance and Care

Scheduled Maintenance Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Scheduled Service Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
A/C System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Bodywork Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Interior Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Vehicle Stored for Long Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Battery Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

243
 Maintenance and Care

Scheduled Maintenance After the 6th Maintenance The indicator light on the
Service Instrument cluster flashes for
Service approximately 10 seconds displaying
After the 6th service, maintenance the “Oil Change Due” message backed
Correct maintenance is clearly the best
must be restarted with the operations by a beeping sound, indicating that an
way to ensure vehicle performance
scheduled for the 1st, 2nd and 3rd oil change is necessary.
and safety features, ensure respect for
service. The oil change indicator message will
the environment and low operating
costs. illuminate at approximately 11,900 mi
(19,200 km) after the last oil change
NOTE: CAUTION!
was performed.
The Scheduled Maintenance services
Also remember that the strict Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
are prescribed by the Maserati. Failure
observance of the maintenance possible, within 500 mi (800 km).
to have the services carried out may
procedures is essential for keeping
affect your warranty. NOTE:
your vehicle operating properly. Not
• The oil change indicator message will
adhering to the Maintenance Schedule The Scheduled Maintenance service is
not monitor the time (only mileage)
can impact your vehicle’s warranty. provided by the Authorized Maserati
elapsed from the last oil change.
Dealer. If further replacements or
Maserati has therefore provided for a Change your vehicles oil if it has
repairs are found to be necessary
series of checks and maintenance been 1 year since your last oil
when a service is performed in
operations involving the 1st service change, even if the oil change
addition to the scheduled operations,
when the vehicle mileage reaches indicator message will NOT display
these can be carried out only with the
12,500 mi (20,000 km) or after 1 year on the instrument cluster.
specific consent of the Customer.
of the vehicle's life, and subsequently • Change your engine oil more often if
every 12,500 mi (20,000 km) or every you drive your vehicle off-road for an
7 year. CAUTION! extended period of time or short
You are advised to notify the trips without reaching operation
Authorized Maserati Dealer of any temperature.
minor operating problem, without • Under no circumstances should oil
waiting for the next scheduled service. change intervals exceed 12,500 mi
(20,000 km) or at least after 1 year.
The oil change indicator system will
remind you of the deadline for the
maintenance program.

244
 Maintenance and Care
The Authorized Maserati Dealer will Scheduled Service Plan Maserati recommends that these
reset the oil change indicator message maintenance intervals be performed
after completing the scheduled oil The Scheduled Maintenance services at your selling dealer. The technicians
change. listed in this manual must be done at at your dealership know your vehicle
the times or mileages specified to best, and have access to factory-
protect your vehicle warranty and approved information, genuine
CAUTION! ensure the best vehicle performance Maserati parts, and specially designed
Failure to perform the required and reliability. electronic and mechanical tools that
maintenance items may result in More frequent maintenance may be can help prevent future costly repairs.
damage to the vehicle. needed for vehicles in severe
operating conditions, such as dusty
areas and very short trip driving.
Inspection and service should also be
done anytime a malfunction is
suspected.

Service coupons 1° 2° 3° 4° 5° 6°
Interval running coupons: every 12,500 mi (20,000 km)
Main operations
or 1 year
I R I
Belt for alternator, water pump, air conditioning compressor
and hydraulic steering pump Replace at least every 50,000 mi (80,000 km) or 4 years
and every time the part is removed
R R R R R R
Engine oil and filter 7
Replace at least every year
Cooling system connections and lines (check for leaks) I
Air filter R
Spark plugs R R
Hydraulic steering fluid level (bleed if necessary) I I I
Engine coolant level I I I

245
 Maintenance and Care

Service coupons 1° 2° 3° 4° 5° 6°
Interval running coupons: every 12,500 mi (20,000 km)
Main operations
or 1 year
Intercooler check for leaks I I I I I I
Brake fluid level I R I
Brake system: lines, calipers, connections - Efficiency of the I I I
dashboard warning lights - Handbrake operation
Wear condition of the braking parts (discs, pads) I I I
Pollen filter R R R
Controls and adjustment systems in general, hinges, doors, I I
front and rear lid
Headlight aiming I I I I I I
Condition of the leather interiors I
Vehicle road test I I I
Check with Maserati Diagnosis I I I I I I
I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation
R = Replace

246
 Maintenance and Care

Periodic Maintenance Heavy-Duty Vehicle Use • check and, if necessary, replace

pollen filter of the A/C system;
Every 600 mi (1,000 km) or before If the car is mainly used under one of
long journeys the following conditions: • check and, if necessary, replace air
Check: cleaner filter.
• off-roads;
• engine coolant; • short, repeated journeys (less than
• brake fluid; 4–5 mi / 7-8 km) at sub-zero outside CAUTION!
• windshield washer fluid level; temperatures; All maintenance operations for the
• engine often idling or driving long vehicle must be carried out by an
• tire inflation pressure and condition;
distances at low speeds or long Authorized Maserati Dealer. Do not
• operation of lighting system carry any operation on your own and
periods of idleness.
(headlights, direction indicators, contact an Authorized Maserati
You should perform the following
hazard warning flashers, etc.); Dealer.
inspections more frequently than
• operation of windshield recommended on the “Scheduled
washer/wiper system and wear of Service Plan”:
windshield wiper blades.
• check front disc brake pad
Every 1,900 mi (3,000 km) conditions and wear;
Check and top off, if required, the
• check cleanliness of hood and trunk
engine oil level.
locks, cleanliness and lubrication of
linkage;
• visually inspect conditions of:
engine, transmission, pipes and
hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes)
and rubber elements (boots - sleeves 7
- bushes - etc.);
• check battery charge;
• visually inspect condition of the
accessory drive belts;
• check and, if necessary, change
engine oil and replace oil filter;

247
 Maintenance and Care

On Board Diagnostic System — Emissions Inspection and

OBD II Maintenance Programs
CAUTION!
This vehicle is equipped with a In some localities, it may be a legal
• Prolonged driving with the on
sophisticated onboard diagnostic requirement to pass an inspection of
could cause further damage to the
system called OBD II. This system your vehicle's emissions control system.
emissions control system. It could
monitors the performance of the Failure to pass could prevent vehicle
also affect fuel economy and
emissions, engine, and automatic registration. For states that require an
driveability. The vehicle must be
transmission control systems. When Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this
serviced before any emissions tests
these systems are operating properly, check verifies the “Malfunction
can be performed.
your vehicle will provide excellent Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning
performance and fuel economy, as • If the is flashing while the and is not on when the engine is
well as engine emissions suited to engine is running, severe catalytic running, and that the OBD II system is
current government regulations. converter damage and power loss ready for testing.
If any of these systems require service, will soon occur. Immediate service at Normally, the OBD II system will be
the OBD II system will turn on the an Authorized Maserati Dealer is ready. The OBD II system may not be
“Malfunction Indicator Light” on required. ready if your vehicle was recently
the instrument cluster display (refer to serviced, recently had a dead battery
“Instrument Cluster” in section 4). The or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system stores as well diagnostic codes system should be determined not
and other information to assist your ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may
service technician by performing fail the test.
repairs. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
Although the vehicle will be drivable is ready, you must do the following:
7 and will not need towing, contact an 1. Press the ignition device to the
Authorized Maserati Dealer for service RUN position, but do not crank or
as soon as possible. start the engine.
2. As soon as you press the ignition
device to turn the engine On, you
will see the MIL remain
illuminated for 15 seconds, this is a
normal bulb check.

248
 Maintenance and Care
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, Spare Parts Dealer Service
one of two things will happen:
Use of genuine parts for The Authorized Maserati Dealer has
• The MIL will remain illuminated
normal/scheduled maintenance and the qualified service personnel, special
and a message error will appear
repairs is highly recommended to tools, and equipment to perform all
on your instrument cluster. This
ensure excellent performance. service operations in an expert
means that your vehicle's OBD II
Damage or failures caused by manner. Service Manuals are available
system is not ready and you
non-genuine spare parts used for which include detailed service
should not proceed to the I/M
maintenance and repairs will not be information for your vehicle. Refer to
station.
covered by the manufacturer's these Service Manuals before
• The MIL will turn Off. This
warranty. attempting any procedure yourself.
means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready and you can Intentional tampering with emissions
proceed to the I/M station. control systems may void your
warranty and could result in civil
If your OBD II system is not ready, you penalties being assessed against you.
should see an Authorized Maserati
Dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle
was recently serviced or had a battery WARNING!
failure or replacement, you may need
You can be badly injured working on
to do nothing more than drive your
or around a motor vehicle. Take your
vehicle as you normally would in order
vehicle to an Authorized Maserati
for your OBD II system to update. A
Dealer.
recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is
now ready. 7
Regardless of whether your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready or not, if the
MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have
your vehicle serviced before going to
the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on
with the engine running.

249
 Maintenance and Care

Maintenance Procedures 8 A/C pollen filter access cover.

The following pages contain the 9 Integrated power module
“required” maintenance standards (fuses).
determined by Maserati engineers. 10 Air cleaner filters.
Besides those maintenance items
specified in the “Scheduled Service
Plan”, there are other components
which may require service or
replacement in the future.
To perform most of the services, it is
necessary to open the engine lid (see
“Open and Close the Engine Lid” in
section 2).
The image shows the position of all
components involved in the
maintenance service.
1 Engine oil dipstick.
2 Engine oil filler neck.
3 Power steering fluid reservoir.
4 Engine coolant reservoir.
5 Coolant reservoir for
7 transmission and hydraulic
steering system.
6 Washer fluid reservoir.
7 Brake fluid reservoir access
cover.

250
 Maintenance and Care

Level Checks When adding engine coolant

(antifreeze) use pure water only such
CAUTION! as distilled or deionized water when
• Failure to properly maintain your ENVIRONMENTAL! mixing the water/engine coolant
vehicle or perform repairs and • The engine oils and fluids used (antifreeze) solution. The use of
service when necessary could result contain substances that are impure water will reduce the amount
in more costly repairs, damage to dangerous for the environment. For of corrosion protection in the engine
other components or negatively replacement you are advised to cooling system.
impact vehicle performance. contact the Authorized Maserati • Mix a minimum solution of 50%
Immediately have potential Dealer, where all the necessary engine coolant (antifreeze) and
malfunctions examined by the equipment is available to dispose of distilled water. Use higher
Authorized Maserati Dealer or a the used oil and fluids in compliance concentrations (do not exceed 70%)
qualified repair center. with the regulations in force and in if temperatures below –35°F (−37°C)
• Your vehicle has been equipped with an environment-friendly manner. are forecast.
improved fluids that protect the • All equipment used for fluids Please note that it is the owner's
performance and durability of your replacement (gloves, cloths, responsibility to maintain the proper
vehicle and also allow extended containers, etc) must be disposed in level of protection against freezing
maintenance intervals. Do not use compliance with the regulations in according to the temperatures
chemical flushes for washing as the force. occurring in the circulation area of the
chemicals can damage your engine, vehicle.
transmission, power steering or air Engine Coolant Level Check The coolant bottle provides a quick
conditioning. Such damages are not Your vehicle has been equipped with visual method to determine that the
covered by the New Vehicle Limited an improved engine coolant coolant level is adequate. As long as
Warranty. If a flush is needed (antifreeze) that offers high the engine operating temperature is 7
because of component malfunction, protection against corrosion, freezing satisfactory, the coolant bottle only
use only the specified fluid for the and allows extended maintenance needs to be checked once a month.
flushing procedure. intervals. To prevent reducing
extended maintenance periods, it is
important to use original engine
coolant (antifreeze) when adding
coolant throughout the life of your
vehicle.

251
 Maintenance and Care
With the engine off and cold, the level • If frequent engine coolant Brake Fluid Level Check
of the coolant in the bottle should be (antifreeze) additions are required, Check the fluid level immediately if
between the ranges indicated on the or if the level in the coolant recovery the brake system warning light
bottle and inside the filler neck. bottle does not drop when the and the related message turn on
engine cools, the cooling system indicating a low level of brake fluid.
should be pressure tested for leaks
by an Authorized Maserati Dealer. • Remove the brake fluid reservoir
access cover.
• Keep the front of the radiator and
the condenser clean.

WARNING!
• Never add engine coolant
(antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap of the engine
coolant bottle to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build
up in the cooling system. To prevent • Clean the top of the master cylinder
scalding or injury, do not remove the area before removing the cap.
pressure cap while the system is hot • Add fluid to bring the level up to the
or under pressure. “MAX” mark on the side of the
• When adding coolant do not use a master cylinder reservoir. Use only
7 pressure cap other than the one manufacturer's recommended brake
specified for your vehicle. Personal fluid (see “Refillings” in section 8).
• When additional engine coolant injury or engine damage may result. • Add enough fluid to bring it to the
(antifreeze) is needed to maintain “MAX” level marked on the brake
the proper level, it should be added fluid reservoir.
to the coolant bottle after removing
the cap. Do not overfill.
• Once the desired level is reached,
firmly close cap of the bottle.

252
 Maintenance and Care
• Once the correct level is reached, Adding Washer Fluid
firmly close the cap. During scheduled services or when the
WARNING!
message “Low Washer Fluid” appears
• To avoid contamination from foreign
together with the related telltale
materials or moisture, use only new
add more fluid as soon as possible:
brake fluid or fluid that has been in
the fluid reservoir will hold nearly 3
a tightly closed container. Keep the
Quarts/Litres of windshield washer
master cylinder reservoir cap
fluid.
secured at all times. Brake fluid in an
open container absorbs moisture • Remove the reservoir cap in the
from the air resulting in a lower engine compartment and lift the
boiling point. This may cause it to filler neck.
boil unexpectedly during hard or
The brake pads wear could cause the prolonged braking, resulting in
fluid level to fall. However, low fluid sudden brake failure. This could
level may be caused by a leak and a result in an accident.
requires accurate checkup of the
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
braking system.
can result in spilling brake fluid on
hot engine parts, causing the brake
CAUTION! fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can
The symbol on the reservoir cap also damage painted and vinyl
identifies the synthetic type of brake surfaces, make sure it does not spill
fluid, distinguishing it from the over these surfaces.
mineral type. Using mineral fluids • Do not allow petroleum based fluid 7
damages the special rubber linings of to contaminate the brake fluid.
the brake system irreparably. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could
result in an accident.

253
 Maintenance and Care
• Fill the reservoir with windshield • Remove the dipstick and clean it with
washer solvent (refer to “Refillings” a dry and clean cloth.
in section 8) and operate the system WARNING!
for a few seconds to flush out the • Commercially available windshield
residual water. washer solvents are flammable. They
• When refilling the washer fluid could ignite and burn you. Care must
reservoir, apply some washer fluid to be exercised when filling or when
a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper working around the washer
blades clean. This will help blade solution.
performance. • Do not drive with the windshield
To prevent freeze-up of your washer fluid reservoir empty: the
windshield washer system in cold action of the washer is essential for
weather, select a solution or mixture improving visibility when driving.
• Re-insert the dipstick completely and
that meets or exceeds the temperature
Engine Oil Level Check remove: the oil level should maintain
range of your climate. This rating
between the MIN and MAX
information can be found on most To assure proper lubrication of your reference ranges (SAFE range).
washer fluid containers. vehicle's engine, the engine oil must
NOTE: be maintained at the correct level.
If the warning light illuminates
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can and the related message of low oil
provide you with information about level displays, or during scheduled
the Maserati recommended services (see “Scheduled Maintenance
Windshield Washer Fluid with Service” in this section) it is necessary
antifreeze, available in the Genuine to check the engine oil level.
7 Accessories range. The best time to check the engine oil
level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off or
before starting the engine after it has
sat overnight. In both cases the vehicle
should be parked on level ground to
improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.

254
 Maintenance and Care
• If a refilling is necessary: unscrew the • Do not add any supplemental
filler neck cap. materials to the engine oil, other
than leak detection dyes. Engine oil
is an engineered product, and its
performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.

Engine Oil Filter Replacement

The engine oil filter should be
replaced with a new filter at every oil
change.
Contact the Authorized Maserati • Retighten the cap then unscrew it
Dealer to perform this service. again and check the level: it should
• Adding 1.1 Quarts (1 Litre) of oil match the “MAX” notch marked on
Automatic Transmission Oil Check
when the level is at the bottom of the dipstick. In hot oil conditions,
Contact the Authorized Maserati the level may even exceed the
the SAFE range will result in the
Dealer for the oil level check. “MAX” notch.
level being at the top of the SAFE
range. Power Steering Fluid Level Check
• Return the cap and dipstick to their With the vehicle on a level ground
position and wait for a few minutes and the engine cold, check the fluid
to allow the oil to reach the oil pan. level of the power steering reservoir.
• Check the level again. • To carry out the check, unscrew the
cap, clean the dipstick with a dry and
clean cloth.
CAUTION! 7
• Do not top up with oil with different
characteristics than the one in
engine (refer to “Refillings” in • If necessary, top up with fluid
section 8). making sure that it has the same
• Overfilling or underfilling the oil pan characteristics as the one already
will cause aeration or loss of oil used in the system (refer to
pressure. This could damage your “Refillings” in section 8).
engine.

255
 Maintenance and Care

Engine Air Filters Replacement • Unsnap both ends and lift the filter
access cover.
CAUTION! Contact the Authorized Maserati
Dealer to have the air filters replaced.
• Make sure that the power steering
fluid does not come in touch with A/C Air Filter Replacement
the engine hot parts as it is
This filter performs mechanic/
flammable.
electrostatic air filtering, provided that
• When the engine is running, do not windows and doors are perfectly
keep the steering wheel completely closed.
turned for longer than 8 seconds, The filter is located under the engine
unless absolutely necessary. This will lid in the external A/C system air inlet,
cause a noise and also the on the passenger side of the vehicle,
overheating of the hydraulic steering next to the windshield wipers. • Remove the used filter slipping it off
fluid and could damage the hydraulic To replace the filter during the from within the air intake.
steering system. scheduled maintenance services or • Install the new filter with arrows
after the vehicle has been heavily used pointing in the direction of airflow,
Coolant, Transmission and Hydraulic on dusty roads, proceed as follows:
Steering System Fluid Level Check which is toward the rear of the
• Remove the access door in the cowl vehicle (text and arrows on the filter
Contact the Authorized Maserati will indicate this).
screen by pressing the retaining clips
Dealer for this operation.
indicated.

256
 Maintenance and Care
• Close the filter access cover and any intervention on the wipers paragraph “Level checks” in this
reinstall the access door. blades. section) then check that the nozzles
are not clogged.
Windshield Wiper Maintenance
CAUTION! Blades Replacement
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies • Move the wiper arms into “Service”
Failure to replace the filter may
depending on the geographical area’s position, (see chapter “Windshield
considerably reduce the air
weather conditions where the car is Wipers and Washers” in section 3)
conditioning and heating system
used and frequency of use. Poor and lift them.
efficiency.
performance of blades may be present
• Press the indicated button, slip off
with chattering, marks, water lines or
Windshield Wiper Maintenance the blade support from the arm and
wet spots. If any of these conditions
and Blades Replacement replace it.
are present, clean the wiper blades or
When the wiper arms are in “Park” replace if necessary.
position it is not possible to check or Clean the rubber edges of the wiper
replace the blades as they remain under blades and the windshield periodically
the engine hood. To service the blades it with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild
is necessary to move the wiper arms in nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
“Service” position (see chapter accumulations of salt or road film.
“Windshield Wipers and Washers” in Operation of the wipers on dry glass
section 3). In this way it is possible to for long periods may cause
turn and lift the arms for the desired deterioration of the wiper blades.
intervention. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from • Return the blade to its original
a dry windshield. position on the windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to
7
WARNING! • Turn the multifunction lever to one
remove frost or ice from the of the automatic settings (see
It is dangerous to operate or service windshield. Keep the blade rubber out
the wiper blades with the wipers in chapter “Windshield Wipers and
of contact with petroleum products Washers” in section 3) and move the
an active position (different than such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
“OFF”) and with the ignition switch in ignition switch to the RUN position:
the RUN position. The rain sensors Spray nozzles the wiper arms will return to the
may suddenly activate the wipers. If the jet does not work, first check resting position.
Always use the “Service” position for that there is fluid in the pan (see

257
 Maintenance and Care
NOTE: Maintenance-Free Battery NOTE:
Due to the difficulty of this operation, Remote battery terminals for start are
we recommend that you contact the This vehicle is equipped with a sealed located in the engine compartment for
Authorized Maserati Dealer for type maintenance-free battery. You jump starting to be used with an
replacement of the blades. will never have to add water, nor is auxiliary battery or a battery from
periodic maintenance required. another vehicle (see “Auxiliary
Body Lubrication Jump-Start Procedure” chapter in
Locks and all body pivot points, WARNING! section 6).
including such items as seat tracks, • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid
door hinge pivot points and rollers, solution and can burn or injure eyes. To Disconnect the Battery
liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and Do not allow battery fluid to contact The battery is fitted on the inner right
hood hinges, should be lubricated your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not side of the trunk.
periodically with a lithium based lean with the face over a battery. If To access the battery it is necessary to
grease, to assure quiet, easy operation acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush lift the ground coverage of the trunk
and to protect against rust and wear. the area immediately with large and remove the access cover by
Prior to the application of any amounts of water. turning the release latch shown.
lubricant, the parts concerned should
• Battery gas is flammable and
be wiped clean to remove dust and
explosive. Keep flame or sparks
grit; after lubricating excess oil and
away from the battery. Do not use a
grease should be removed. Particular
booster battery or any other booster
attention should also be given to hood
source with an output greater than
latching components to ensure proper
12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps
function. When performing other
to touch each other.
7 underhood services, the hood latch,
release mechanism and safety catch • Battery posts, terminals, and related
should be cleaned and lubricated. The accessories contain lead and lead
external lock cylinders of the front compounds. Wash hands after
doors should be lubricated twice a handling the battery.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent
Apply a small amount of high quality hose that should not be disconnected
lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. and should only be replaced with a
component of the same type (vented).

258
 Maintenance and Care
positive (+) and negative (-) and are To Reconnect the Battery
identified on the battery case.
NOTE:
When the battery cables have been
disconnected and the trunk has been
locked, it is necessary to pull the
emergency release lever in order to
re-open it. To access the trunk and
operate the emergency release fold
the rear seatback (see “Cargo Area”
chapter in section 3).

CAUTION!
• Before disconnecting the battery, CAUTION!
open the trunk lid and lower the • It is essential when replacing the
windows a few centimeters. cables on the battery that the
• Never disconnect the battery from positive cable is precisely attached to
the electrical system when the the positive post (+) and the
engine is running. negative cable is attached to the
• To temporarily disconnect the vehicle negative post (–).
electrical system from the battery, • Cable clamps should be tight on the
simply remove the cable end with terminal posts and free of corrosion.
quick coupling from the negative
post (-) of the battery.
NOTE:
After the battery has been 7
• If the battery needs to be removed disconnected and re-connected and
After the battery is disconnected with before starting the engine it is
from its compartment, you must first
electric parking brake engaged, you necessary to proceed as follows:
detach the terminal clamp to the
can manually move the vehicle by
negative post (–) and then the other • Unlock and lock the doors using the
performing the procedure “Release
terminal clamp to the positive post Key fob RKE Transmitter.
after Battery Disconnection” in
(+), after removing the protection • Unlock the trunk lid with the key fob
chapter “Emergency Release of the
cover. Battery posts are marked RKE transmitter and then lock it
Parking Brake” of section 6.
manually.
259
 Maintenance and Care
• Initialize the climate control system We recommend you to have the
by activating the compressor (see battery charge condition checked,
chapter "Air Conditioning Controls" preferably at the beginning of the cold
in section 4). season, to prevent the electrolyte from
• Turn on the MTC and set the date freezing.
and time following the MTC This check should be carried out more
instructions manual. frequently if the vehicle is used mainly
• Lift, release and lift again the lever for short trips or if it is equipped with
located behind the shift lever to power absorbing devices that remain
inizialize the electric parking brake. permanently on even when the
In this way the warning light ignition switch is off. This applies
on the instrument panel will turn off. above all if these devices have been
retrofitted ("Aftermarket" services). CAUTION!
Useful Advice to Extend If the vehicle is not used for long
• When charging the battery with an
Battery Life periods of time, please see “Vehicle
external charger, to allow IBS to
Stored for Long Periods” in this
When parking the vehicle, make sure that measure charging current, the
section.
the doors, front, rear lids and flaps are negative terminal clamp of the
properly closed. All interior lights should Battery Recharge charger must NOT be connected
be off. When the engine is turned off, do directly to the negative post of the
The vehicle is equipped with a IBS
not keep the connected devices switched battery, because in this case charging
(Intelligent Battery Sensor) sensor able
on for a long time (such as radio, hazard current does not flow through IBS.
to measure charging and discharging
warning flashers, blower, etc.). • The negative terminal clamp of the
currents and to calculate the state of
charge and state of health of the charger MUST be connected just
7 CAUTION! battery. This sensor is located in after IBS: in this way charging
correspondence of the negative post current flows through IBS, and it can
If the battery charge remains below 50%
(-) of the battery. correctly measure it.
for a long period of time, it will be
damaged due to sulfation; its For a successful charge/recharge • Do not use a “fast charger” to
performance and starting power will be operation, the charging current must provide starting voltage.
reduced and it will be more subject to flow through the IBS sensor as shown
Recharge the battery slowly and at a
freezing (this can happen even at 14°F / in the picture.
low amperage with a suitable charger
-10°C). or use a charge maintainer device (for

260
 Maintenance and Care
further information refer to • Turn the charger on and follow the Fuse Replacement
“Maintaining Battery Charge” in instructions on its user manual to
chapter “Battery Statement”). completely recharge the battery. Used Fuses Characteristics
It is possible to recharge the battery • When the battery is recharged, turn When an electrical device is not
without disconnecting the cables of off the battery charger before functioning, check that the
the vehicle electrical system from it. disconnecting it from the battery. corresponding fuse is in proper
• To access the battery lift the ground • Disconnect first the terminal clamp working order (intact).
coverage of the trunk compartment of the charger black cable from the
A Fuse intact.
and remove the access cover as battery and then the terminal clamp
previously shown. of the red cable. B Fuse blown.
• Remove the protection cover and • Reassemble the protection cover on
connect the terminal clamp of the the battery positive post and the
charger positive cable (typically in access cover on the battery room.
red) to the positive post (+) of the
battery.
• Connect the terminal clamp of the
charger negative cable (typically in
black) to the nut located by the
negative post (-) on the battery,
indicated in the picture.

Replace the faulty fuse with a new

one featuring the same rating, by
using appropriate forceps added in 7
the integrated power module and
inside the cover of the rear power
distribution center.

261
 Maintenance and Care
They protect the motors that move the
seats: in case of failure of a seat,
extract the corresponding fuse and
then reinsert it. If the malfunction
persists, contact the Authorized
Maserati Dealer.
The table shows the match between
color and amperage of mini and maxi
fuses.

The color identifies the value of the CAUTION!

fuses in amperes which is also reported
on the them. • Never replace a blown fuse with
The vehicle is endowed mainly with anything other than a new and
mini-and maxi-fuses. In addition to suitable fuse (same rating).
these fuses there are some special • After replacing a fuse, if the fault
fuses (“Circuit Breaker” or recurs, contact the Authorized
“non-Cycling Breakers” identified with Maserati Dealer.
CB in the description) on which it is
not possible to visually detect the
status of “fuse blown”. These fuses
contained in the rear power
distribution center remain tripped as
7 long as there’s power to the circuit.

Type Color / Ampere

Mini Fuse Beige - 5 Brown - 7.5 Red - 10 Blue - 15 Yellow - 20 White - 25 Green - 30
Maxi Fuse Yellow - 20 Green - 30 Orange - 40 Red - 50 Blue - 60

262
 Maintenance and Care

Position of Fuses Integrated Power Module The table points out the position as
featured in the figure, the type and
The fuses are located in two parts of • To access the module it is necessary
function of the fuses included in the
the vehicle, namely: to lift the engine lid (see “Trunk
integrated power module.
• inside the integrated power module, Compartment Operation” in section
on the right hand side of the engine 2).
compartment; • To access the fuses remove the CAUTION!
• inside the rear power distribution module cover unhooking the lateral
• After replacement, refit the
center, behind the battery, on the locks as shown in the picture.
protective cover of the module.
right hand side of the trunk. • If you need to wash the engine
compartment, do not direct the jet
of water for too long directly on the
module.

Ref. Type Function

Electric Steering
10 Mini – 15A
Lock
11 Mini – 20A Horn relay input
AC compressor
12 Mini – 10A
relay input
14 Mini – 7.5A Alarm siren
Headlamp
19 Maxi – 30A washer relay
7
input

263
 Maintenance and Care

Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function

Rear Power Distribution Center
• To access the center it is necessary to
Wiper motor IPC Instrument
20 Maxi – 30A 28 Mini – 7.5A lift the ground coverage of the trunk
relay output Panel Control
and remove the access cover (refer
LH low beam 33 Mini – 10A HDLP Headlights “Maintenance-Free Battery” in this
21 Maxi – 20A
relay input section).
RH low beam • To access the fuses unhooking the
22 Maxi – 20A
relay input cover lock shown in picture.

• Lift the lid on the side of the latch and

push it toward the right side to release
the latches as indicated on the unit.

264
 Maintenance and Care
The table points out the position as
featured in the figure, the type and Ref. Type Function Ref. Type Function
function of the fuses on the rear area 6 Maxi – 20A Sunroof HVAC front
15 Maxi – 40A
distribution control unit. Driver door blower relay coil
7 Maxi – 30A
module Rear LH door
17 Maxi – 30A
Passenger door module
8 Maxi – 30A
module Rear RH door
18 Maxi – 30A
High Premium module
11 Maxi – 40A stereo amplifier LH front seat
31 CB – 25A
unit movement
37 Mini – 20A Radio
RH front seat
38 CB – 25A
movement
Internal mirror,
45 Mini – 10A
sunroof
46 Mini – 5A Rear camera
Front console
61 Mini – 25A power outlet and
cigar lighter
Rear sunshade
68 Mini – 20A
module
Rear console 7
69 Mini – 25A power outlet and
cigar lighter
HVAC module,
AFLM headlights
70 Mini – 10A
module, Parking
Aid Module PAM

265
 Maintenance and Care

Bulb Replacement 3 Turn signal LED. Tail-Light Clusters Light Bulbs

4 Side-marker LED. The taillight bulbs are arranged as
The signal failure of an external light
5 Side reflex-reflector. follows:
(turn signal, low beam and high beam,
number plate light, reverse light and 1 Position/parking light guide LED.
brake light) is communicated to the 2 Stop light LED.
instrument cluster that displays on the
3 Turn signal LED.
TFT screen in a graphical form and
with a text message which light is 4 Reverse light bulb (W16W).
faulty (see example in the figure). 5 Rear fog light bulb (W16W).

CAUTION!
Due to the complexity of the
operation, for the replacement of the
Front Headlights headlight clusters light bulbs, we
recommend that you contact an
The light bulbs of the headlight Authorized Maserati Dealer. If you are
clusters are arranged as follows: personally carrying out this operation,
7
1 Bi-Xenon low-beam/high-beam make sure that the corresponding fuse
bulb (25W-No AFS, 35W-With AFS). is intact before replacing the bulb. Use
2 Position/parking and DRL LED only genuine new light bulbs with the
lights. Except for Canadian same characteristics as the old one.
vehicles (always enabled) the
DRL lights can be deactivated
through the Multi Media System
(see “MTC Settings” in section 4).

266
 Maintenance and Care

Light Clusters Bulbs • Remove the cover on the fastening • Using an 8 mm Allen wrench, undo
Replacement screws by levering from below on and remove the light fastening nut.
the indicated point.

WARNING!
The headlamps are a type of high
voltage discharge tube. High voltage
can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch and the ignition
switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to replace a headlamp
bulb yourself, but take the vehicle to
an Authorized Maserati Dealer. • From behind the vehicle, separate
• Using a Torx T15 wrench, undo and the light cluster from the body by
Most of the lamps of the tailllight and remove the two indicated fastening gently pulling it out; do not tension
of the headlights and those integrated screws. the connecting cable.
in the exterior mirrors are LED
powered and cannot be replaced
individually. The only exceptions are
the reverse and the rear fog light
bulbs: for these last you find below
the replacement procedure. Contact
the Authorized Maserati Dealer to
locate the correct parts and replace 7
them.
Reverse Light
In order to replace the reverse light • Remove the inspection cover (if • Rotate the bulb holder
bulb (possible only on vehicles with foreseen) from the trunk anti-clockwise and extract it from
inspection cover), open the trunk lid compartment by levering on the the light cluster.
and proceed as follows: specific point.

267
 Maintenance and Care
• Extract the bulb from the bulb Rear fog light
holder and replace it with a In order to replace the rear fog light
corresponding one. bulb, open the trunk lid and proceed
as follows:
• Remove the access cover by rotating
the unlock device anti-clockwise as
shown in the picture.

License Plate Lights

To replace the license plate light bulb
(C 5W):
NOTE:
• use a screwdriver positioned at the
• The light cluster has two centering indicated point to lever out the light
pins, during re-assembly they must fixing frame;
be inserted in their respective seats
on the body. In this phase use • Rotate the bulb holder anti-clockwise
particular attention to prevent that and extract it from the light cluster.
the connecting cable remain pinched
• Extract the bulb from the bulb
between light cluster and body, as
holder and replace it.
this could cause electric interruption.
• To avoid damages to the light cluster, NOTE:
7 do not fasten too much the two Torx When refitting the access cover, insert
fastening screws. first the side tab in the trunk lid
opening indicated in the picture, and
then rotate the unlock device
clockwise.

268
 Maintenance and Care
• replace the pressure-fitted bulb; Courtesy Lights (below Door)
• refit the bulb holder inserting first To replace the bulb (W5W):
the electrical connector side and
then pressing on the other side to • use a screwdriver positioned at the
hook up the clip. indicated point to lever out the light
fixing frame;

• refit the bulb holder inserting first

the electrical connector side and
then pressing on the other side to
hook up the clip.

Interior Lights
• rotate the bulb holder and take it
out;
CAUTION!
Before replacing a bulb, ensure that
the matching fuse is intact. For
replacement, use only original new
light bulbs having the same rating as
the old one. 7
Lamps inside the glove box
compartments of the dashboard are
LED powered and cannot be replaced
by the owner. Contact the Authorized
• replace the pressure-fitted bulb;
Maserati Dealer to replace them.

269
 Maintenance and Care

Trunk Light • Refit the lens cover, inserting first the A/C System Maintenance
electrical connector side and then
To replace the bulbs (W5W) inside the For best performance, the air
pressing on the other side.
trunk, proceed as follows after trunk conditioning system should be checked
lid opening. and serviced by the Authorized
• Remove the light fixing frame by Maserati Dealer at the beginning of
levering it out gently at the indicated the warm season.
point with a screwdriver. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
During winter, the air conditioning
system should be operated at least
once a month for about 10 minutes.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals
• Raise the lens cover. can damage your air conditioning
components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

• Replace the pressure-fitted bulb.

270
 Maintenance and Care

Wheels Maintenance internal damage, which may even lead

to the tire destruction.
WARNING!
Tires Maintenance
• Use only refrigerants and
compressor lubricants approved by CAUTION!
the manufacturer for your air CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire
conditioning system. Some To obtain the best performances and pressure, always reinstall the valve
unapproved refrigerants are the longest mileage from the tires, stem cap. This will prevent moisture
flammable and can explode, causing take the following precautions during and dirt from entering the valve stem,
injuries. Other unapproved the first 310 mi (500 km): which could damage it.
refrigerants or lubricants can cause
• do not drive at the vehicle’s Impacts with curbs, holes, and
the system to fail, requiring costly
maximum speed; obstacles in the road, and prolonged
repairs.
• drive at low speed on curves; trips on rough roads can cause tire
• The air conditioning system contains damage which may not be visible to
refrigerant under high pressure. To • avoid sudden steering;
the naked eye.
avoid risk of personal injury or • avoid sudden braking;
Check your tires regularly for any signs
damage to the system, adding • avoid sudden acceleration; of damage (e.g. scratches, cuts, cracks,
refrigerant or any repair requiring • do not drive at high speeds for too bulges, etc.). If sharp objects penetrate
lines to be disconnected should be long. the tires, they can cause structural
done by an experienced technician. damage which is only visible when the
The tires inflation pressure must tire is removed.
correspond to the prescribed values In any case, any possible damage must
(see the chapter “Tire Inflation be inspected by an experienced tire
Pressure” in section 8) and should be fitter, as it may seriously reduce the
checked only when the tires have
7
tire life.
cooled down. In fact, the pressure Remember that tires deteriorate with
increases as the tire temperature time, even if used little or not at all.
progressively increases. Cracks in the tire tread and sides,
Never reduce the pressure if tires are alongside possible bulging, are a sign
hot (see “Tires – General information” of deterioration.
chapter in section 5).
Insufficient tire inflating pressure can
cause tire overheating and possible

271
 Maintenance and Care
make sure that the rolling direction Therefore, their use should be limited
corresponds to the one shown by to the situations and performance for
WARNING! the arrow. which they have been type-approved.
Driving over rough or damaged road The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
• During the tire life, the rolling
surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and provide all necessary information
direction used for the first fitting
other obstacles can cause serious about fitting winter tires on the
shall always be observed, also in
damage to wheels, tires, and vehicle.
case of “nondirectional” tires.
suspension parts. This is more likely to
occur with low-profile tires, which • Check the depth of the tire tread at Wheel Trims Maintenance
provide less cushioning between the regular intervals. The minimum
All wheel trims should be cleaned
wheel and the road. Be careful to allowed value is 0.06 in (1.6 mm) at
regularly with a mild soap and water.
avoid road hazards and reduce your that point the wear indicators on the
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive
speed, especially if your vehicle is tire will be visible (see “Tires –
brake dust, use a nonabrasive,
equipped with low-profile tires. general information” in section 5).
non-acidic cleaner.
The thinner is the tread, the greater
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
is the risk of skidding.
bristle brush, or metal polishes.
• Drive carefully on wet roads to Do not use oven cleaner that may
WARNING! decrease the risk of aquaplaning. involve and damage the brake calipers.
• Check the inflating pressure of the Avoid automatic car washes that use
tires when cold, at least every two Winter Tires acidic solutions or harsh brushes that
weeks and before long trips. These tires are specially designed for may damage the wheel trim protective
• Have the old tires inspected by an driving on snow and ice and are fitted finish.
experienced tire fitter, to make sure to replace the ones supplied with the
they can still be used safely. If the vehicle.
7 same tire has been on your vehicle The winter features of these tires are
for 4 or 5 years, have it inspected significantly reduced when tread
anyway by an experienced tire fitter. depth is less than 0.16 in (4 mm). In
• Never fit tires of uncertain origin. this case, they should be replaced.
The specific features of the winter tires
• “Directional” tires have an arrow on
lead to lower performance under
their side showing the rolling
normal environmental conditions or
direction. To keep the best
on long highway trips, compared to
performance when replacing a tire,
the standard tires.

272
 Maintenance and Care

Bodywork Maintenance wax products having high protective

power;
and Care • spraying of plastic materials, with a
Protection from Atmospheric protective function, in the most
exposed points: underneath the
Agents
doors, inside part of the mud guards,
The main causes of corrosion are: edges, etc.;
• atmospheric pollution; • use of ventilated box sections,
• salinity and humidity in the coated with protective wax products,
atmosphere (marine areas or a damp to avoid condensation and trapped
climate); water which could encourage the Normal paint maintenance consists in
formation of internal rust. washing, the frequency of which
• seasonal environmental conditions;
depends on the conditions of use and
• salt scattered on the roadbed to Useful Advice to Keep the of the environment. For example, if
melt ice and snow. Bodywork in Good Condition driving the vehicle in areas where
The abrasive action of wind-carried there is high atmospheric pollution or
Paint
atmospheric dust and sand, mud and the roads are spread with anti-freeze
stones should not be underestimated. The paintwork does not only have an
salt, it is advisable to wash the vehicle
On this vehicle, Maserati has adopted aesthetic function but also protects
more frequently.
the best technological solutions to the underlying Sheet metal. In the
protect the bodywork from corrosion. event of abrasions or deep scratches,
The main measures are: we recommend to have the necessary ENVIRONMENTAL!
touch-ups made immediately, to avoid Detergents pollute water. Therefore
• paint products and systems that give
any rust formation. Touch-ups do not the vehicle should be washed in areas
the vehicle particular resistance to 7
feature particular difficulties, even on equipped for the collection and
corrosion and abrasion;
metallic finishes. purification of the fluids used for
• use of galvanized (or pre-treated) For all paint touch-ups, use only washing.
metal sheets which are highly original products indicated on the
resistant to corrosion in the most plate applied on the trunk lid.
exposed parts;
• spraying of the underbody, engine
compartment, insides of wheel
housings, and other structures with

273
 Maintenance and Care
NOTE: External plastic parts must be cleaned NOTE:
The use of alcohol-based products for with the same procedure followed for If you wish to keep the RKE
cleaning the metal plates in the engine the normal washing of the vehicle. Transmitter with you or anywhere
compartment and/or the trunk may Avoid, as far as possible, parking the outside the vehicle while the car is
deteriorate the painted surface. It is vehicle under trees; the resinous being washed, it is advisable to disable
recommended to use water-based substances that very often drop from the Passive Entry from the MTC system,
products and neutral surfactants. the trees give the paint a dull for further information refer to
appearance and increase the possibility chapter “MTC settings” in section 4.
Car Wash of originating corrosive processes.
It is important that the drain holes in Pre-Short Drop Function
For correct washing:
the lower sides of the doors, rocker
• wet the bodywork with a low When in a car washing, if the driver
panels, and trunk bottom be kept clear
pressure water jet; keeps the RKE Transmitter in his/her
and open.
pocket, or in any place outside the
• pass a sponge with a light detergent
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) distance, the
solution over the bodywork,
CAUTION! front windows will perform a pre-short
frequently rinsing the sponge;
drop. This is a shorter drop compared
• rinse well with water and dry with an • Bird droppings must be washed off to the normal Short Drop performed
air jet or chamois leather. immediately and thoroughly, since by the Passive Entry function when you
When drying, take particular care with their acidity is particularly corrosive. grab the door handle to enter the
the parts that are less visible, such as • To provide better protection for the vehicle.
the door and lid bays, headlight edges, paint, polish the vehicle at intervals This prevents water to enter the
in which water can be trapped more with a suitable product leaving a vehicle between the upper edge of the
easily. protective film on the paint. glass window and the door trim.
You are recommended not to take the • If the vehicle is washed using
7 vehicle immediately into an enclosed NOTE:
high-pressure water jets or cleaners,
environment, but leave it in the open it is important that the nozzle of the When deactivating the Passive Entry,
air so as to allow the water to jet be kept at a distance of at least also the Pre-Short Drop function will
evaporate. 16 in (40 cm) from the bodywork to be disabled.
Do not wash the vehicle after it has avoid damaging it.
been left in the sun or when the
engine lid is hot: the paint gloss could
be affected.

274
 Maintenance and Care
Glass Surfaces Do not use abrasive cleaning Interior Maintenance and
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on components, solvents, steel wool or
other aggressive material to clean the Care
a regular basis with any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. lenses. Interior trim should be cleaned
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Engine Compartment starting with a damp cloth. Do not use
Use caution when cleaning the inside At the end of each winter season, harsh cleaners.
rear window equipped with electric carefully wash the engine The leather upholstery can be best
defrosters. Do not use scrapers or compartment, remembering to avoid preserved by regular cleaning with a
other sharp instrument that may directing the jet of water for too long damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
scratch the elements. on the electric parts. can act as an abrasive and damage the
When cleaning the rear view mirror, To perform this operation, you must leather upholstery and should be
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that contact the Authorized Maserati removed promptly with a damp cloth.
you are using. Do not spray cleaner Dealer. Stubborn soils stains can be removed
directly on the mirror. easily with a soft cloth and
Labels can be peeled off after soaking appropriate products. Avoid soaking
with warm water. the leather upholstery with any liquid.
Keep all objects a safe distance from Please do not use polishes, oils,
the window. cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents,
Cleaning Headlights or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that Application of a leather conditioner is
are lighter and less susceptible to not required to maintain the original
stone breakage than glass headlights. condition.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as Check at regular intervals that there is
glass and therefore different lens no water trapped under the mats (due
7
cleaning procedures must be followed. to drips off shoes, umbrellas etc.)
To minimize the possibility of which may cause the metal parts to
scratching the lenses and reducing oxidize.
light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by
rinsing.

275
 Maintenance and Care

Vehicle Stored for Long • Talc the windshield wiper blades and
raise them from the windshield.
CAUTION! Periods • Cover the vehicle with a long cloth in
Do not use alcohol, gasoline or breathable fabric (available from the
If the vehicle is going to be stored for
solvents to clean the instrument Authorized Maserati Dealer). Do not
over a month, follow the below
panel's transparent dome, the MTC use thick plastic sheets, which do not
precautions:
display and the leather upholstery. allow the humidity on the vehicle
• Wash and dry the vehicle thoroughly.
surface to evaporate.
Leather Upholstery Treatment • Store the vehicle in a covered, dry
• Inflate the tires up to a pressure
and, if possible, ventilated area.
Have the leather upholstery only which must be 14.5 PSI (1 bar) higher
treated, as provided in the Scheduled • Select P (Park) and turn off the than the normally prescribed one,
Service Plan, by the Authorized engine. and check it at regular intervals.
Maserati Dealer which has the • Disconnect the battery (refer to
“Maintenance-Free Battery” in this NOTE:
required specific products.
section) or connect a battery charger The Authorized Maserati Dealer can
Parts in Premium Quality Wood (refer to paragraph “Maintaining provide you with any information
Remove any dirt with a buckskin Battery Charge” in this section). about the available “Indoor and
leather or damp cloth. • Check the battery charge status. Outdoor Car Covers”, available in the
During garaging, this check must be Genuine Accessories range.
NOTE:
carried out every three weeks.
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can Recharge the battery if the no-load
provide you with any information voltage is less than 12.5 V.
about the Maserati approved “Car WARNING!
• Check that the parking brake is NOT
Care” products, available in the The tire pressure must be brought
7 engaged.
Genuine Accessories range. back to the prescribed value before
• Do not empty the engine cooling reusing the vehicle (see “Tire Inflation
system. Pressure” in section 8).
• Clean and protect the painted parts
applying protective wax.
• Clean and protect polished metal
parts with special products available
on the market.

276
 Maintenance and Care

Battery Statement conditioning system, the lights, Maintaining Battery Charge

windshield wipers, the audio system
When the vehicle is not going to be
Battery Status of Charge etc. In addition to this, even the traffic
used for one week or more, or if you
conditions you are driving in can
To avoid problems with ignition travel approximately 10 miles / 16 km
influence the amount of charge
and/or the electrical system in general per day and/or 4,000 miles / 6,000 km
produced: if, for example, you are
when you are driving, the battery per year, Maserati recommends
traveling on the highway, the
charge status is constantly maintained connecting the battery to a battery
alternator supplies more voltage to
and guaranteed by the vehicle's charger, to save you the trouble of
the battery, whilst in heavy traffic,
recharge circuit; the main component having to recharge the battery. The
where the vehicle is continually
of which is the alternator. This circuit battery charger will keep the battery
stopping and starting, the alternator
is only able to supply voltage to the charged properly and at the correct
provides less charge. This also applies
battery when the vehicle is traveling. voltage levels required by the systems
for the amount of electrical charge
The warning light on the and devices in the car.
stored in the battery to power other
instrument cluster, will indicate any Before using the battery charger,
electrical devices whilst the vehicle is
malfunctions in the recharge circuit or carefully follow the instructions
traveling.
an insufficient battery charge status provided. To connect the device to the
The vehicle is fitted with advanced
(shown in figure). battery, see “Battery Recharge” in
electronic systems, such as, for
“Maintenance-Free Battery” of this
example, the alarm system and various
section.
electronic control modules, which
If you do not use a battery charger to
consume power even when the
prevent the battery from going dead
ignition switch is in the OFF position
when you are not going to use the
and the vehicle is not being used.
vehicle for long periods of time, you
Therefore, it is fundamental that the
need to check and recharge the 7
battery is properly charged to ensure
battery at least once every three
that the engine starts properly and
weeks (or if you travel approximately
that all the electrical/electronic
10 miles / 16 km per day and/or 4,000
systems in the vehicle work efficiently.
miles / 6,000 km per year). Please note
The amount of voltage that is supplied that allowing the battery to go dead
to the battery to maintain the charge repeatedly can cause premature wear
status also depends on the amount of on the internal cells and greatly
charge absorbed by the systems used reduce their life, leading to problems
in the vehicle, for example: the air

277
 Maintenance and Care
with the ignition system and other • ensure that any sparks or open • Reconnect the battery after checking
electrical/electronic systems. flames are kept well away from the the charge status (refer to
The Authorized Maserati Dealer is battery while it is charging; “Maintenance-Free Battery” in this
available to advise you on how to • before using a charger to charge or section) and perform the initializing
recharge you battery correctly and maintain the battery charge status, procedure if applicable. You can
give you useful information on battery carefully follow the instructions consult the paragraph “Battery
care and maintenance. provided to ensure the charger is Reconnection” in this chapter for
connected to the battery safely and further information on this subject.
NOTE:
correctly. • With the transmission in N (Neutral),
The Authorized Maserati Dealer can let the engine idle for several
provide you with any information minutes.
about the Maserati approved “Battery Restarting the Vehicle
Charger and Conditioner”, available in Before restarting the vehicle after a
the Genuine Accessories range. long period of inactivity, we
recommend that you carry out the WARNING!
following operations. The engine idle must be performed
outdoors. Exhaust gases contain
• Check the tires for pressure and for carbon monoxide which is strongly
WARNING!
any damages, cuts or cracks. If this is toxic and potentially lethal.
The process of charging or recharging
the case, have them replaced.
the battery produces hydrogen, a
dangerous gas that can explode and • Do not dry-rub the external surface
cause serious injuries. When charging of the vehicle.
or recharging the battery, follow the • Visually inspect if there are any fluid
recommended precautions at all times: leaks (oil, brake and clutch fluid,
7 engine coolant etc.).
• always charge or recharge the
battery in a well-ventilated • Have the engine oil and filter
environment; replaced.
• never charge or recharge a battery • Check the fluid levels in the brake
that has frozen: it can explode due system, as well as the engine coolant
to hydrogen trapped inside the ice level.
crystals; • Check the air filter and have them
replaced if necessary.

278
 Maintenance and Care

Battery Reconnection
• Connect the battery (refer
“Maintenance-Free Battery” in this
section).
• Unlock and lock the doors using the
key fob.
• Initialize the climate control system
by activating the system and
pressing the AUTO control as
described in chapter "Air
Conditioning Controls" in section 4.
• Turn on the MTC and set the date
and time following the instructions
given in the dedicated manual.

CAUTION!
• Every time the battery is
reconnected, wait at least 30 seconds
with the ignition switch turned to
RUN before starting the engine, in
order to allow the electronic system
that manages the motor-driven
throttles to run a self-learning cycle.
7
At the same time, you can run the
date and time set up procedure for
the MTC.
• Every time the battery is
reconnected the warning lights
and flash for about 10
seconds and then go off.

279
 Maintenance and Care

280
8 – Features and Specifications

Refilling Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Fuel Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Tire Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

281
 Features and Specifications

Refilling Capacities
Capacities and Approved Fluids
NOTE:
Maserati reserves the right to change or revise specifications without prior notification.

Parts to be refilled Quantity Product specifications

Fuel tank 21 Gallons (80 litres) including Premium unleaded fuel with no less than 95 RON/85
4.2 Gallons (16 litres) of reserve MON (91 CLC or AKI).
Engine 7.6 Quarts (max)
7.2 litres (max)
(Difference among MIN and MAX Entirely synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 5W/40
level: 1.1 Quarts/1 litre) that meet API SL/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4
Engine 8.8 Quarts (max) specifications.
(AWD model) 8.3 litres (max) Recommended oil: Pennzoil Platinum Euro 5W-40.
(Difference among MIN and MAX
level: 1.1 Quarts/1 litre)
Mix of water and detergent fluid, in the proportions
indicated on the product package. If the temperature
is below –4°F (–20°C), use pure detergent fluid.
Windshield washer fluid
3.7 Quarts (3.5 litres) Detergent fluid: Mix of CUNA NC 956-II surfactants
tank
and alcohols.
Recommended fluid: Wuerth Windshield Washer
Fluid with antifreeze or Arexons DP1.

282
 Features and Specifications

Parts to be refilled Quantity Product specifications

Mixture of water and coolant, proportionally
50/50%.
Coolant: protective, antifreeze action and ethylene
glycol-based with organic inhibitors compatible with
regulations:
Engine cooling circuit 9.7 Quarts (9.2 litres) • ASTM D 3306, ASTM D 2570
• ASTM D 4340, ASTM D 2809
• SAE J 1034
• CUNA NC 956/16
• FGA 9.55523 or equivalent.
Recommended fluid: GlycoShell/GlycoShell Long Life.
Hydraulic power steering - Recommended oil: SHELL Spirax S1 ATF TASA.
(*) Automatic transmission 8 Quarts (7.6 litres) Recommended oil: SHELL ATF L- 12108.
(*) Differential 1.4 Quarts (1.3 litres) Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 – FE HYPOID
GEAR LUBRICANT.
(*) Front differential 0.47 Quarts (0.45 litres) Recommended oil: SHELL TF 0951.
(AWD model)
(*) Transfer case 0.65 Quarts (0.62 litres) Recommended oil: SHELL TF 0870.
(AWD model)
Braking system - Synthetic fluid: USA FMVSS n. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925
Class 4, JIS K 2233 Class 5, AS/NZ 1960 Class 3, SAE
J1704, CUNA NC 956-01.
Recommended fluid: PETRONAS Tutela Brake Fluid
TOP4.
8
CAUTION!
For each oil refilling and/or replacement, please contact the Authorized Maserati Dealer.

283
 Features and Specifications

Parts to be refilled Quantity Product specifications

Air conditioning system 26.1 oz +/-0.7 oz Coolant: r134a.
(740 gr +/-20 gr)
(*) No scheduled maintenance expected.

Engine Oil Identification Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE

Symbol Grade)
CAUTION!
To guarantee vehicle’s integrity and This symbol means that the oil SAE 5W-40 engine oil is recommended
maintain performance level always use has been certified by the for all operating temperatures.
genuine parts approved and American Petroleum Institute The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended by Maserati. (API). Maserati only recommended engine oil viscosity for
recommends API Certified engine oils. your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to
chapter “Maintenance Procedures” in
CAUTION! section 7.
Do not use chemical flushes in your Lubricants that do not have both the
engine oil as the chemicals can engine oil certification mark and the
damage your engine. Damage caused correct SAE viscosity grade number
by use of non-approved chemicals is should not be used.
not covered by the new Vehicle
Limited Warranty.

284
 Features and Specifications

Fuel Consumption
The fuel consumption values shown
(miles per gallon) are established
using EPA test guidelines.

Ghibli S Q4 (AWD model) Ghibli

City 15 MPG 15 MPG
Highway 25 MPG 25 MPG
Combined 18 MPG 19 MPG

CAUTION!
The type of route, traffic and weather
conditions, driving style, general
condition of the vehicle,
equipment/accessories in the vehicle,
use of the air conditioning system,
vehicle load and other items or
situations which may negatively affect
the vehicle aerodynamics or wind
resistance lead to consumption ratios
differing from the indicated ones.

NOTE:
The specifications described above can
change without prior notification. 8

285
 Features and Specifications

Technical data
Engine

Data Ghibli S Q4 (AWD model) Ghibli

Cylinder number and position 6 - 60° V 6- 60° V
Number of valves per cylinder 4 4
Bore x stroke 86.5 x 84.5 mm 86.5 x 84.5 mm
Total displacement 2,979 cm3 2,979 cm3
Compression ratio 9.7 : 1 9.7 : 1
Maximum power output (EC) 302 kW – 404 HP 257 kW – 345 HP
- corresponding RPM 5,500 g/min 5,250 g/min
Peak torque (EC) 406 ft-lb (550 N-m) 369 ft-lb (500 N-m)
- corresponding RPM 4,500 — 5,000 g/min 1,750 — 4,500 g/min
Overboost torque (EC) 406 ft-lb (550 N-m) 369 ft-lb (500 N-m)
- corresponding RPM 1,750 — 5,000 g/min 1,600 — 4,500 g/min

Properties
Timing The timing system uses two overhead camshafts with timing variator.
Timing system control Timing chain.
Supply Over-supplied with turbocompressor and related intercooler for each bank.
Injection – Ignition High pressure 2900 PSI (200 bar) direct fuel injection system. Static ignition with digital
electronic control system included and controlled by a single microprocessor ECU.
8

286
 Features and Specifications

Transmission Steering
ZF automatic transmission with 8 Hydraulic speed-sensitive steering with
gears, torque converter, lock-up clutch cooling exchanger system.
and anti-slip function. Steering diameter = 12.8 yd (11.7 m).
Sequential and traditional control No. of steering wheel turns = 1.37 (to
type. the left and right).
TRANSAXLE-type transmission.
Traction system equipped with rear
self-locking differential.

Brakes
Self-ventilating disc brakes on the four
wheels. The Electric Parking Brake
(EPB) acts on the rear wheels.

Ghibli S Q4 (AWD model) Ghibli

Front disc diameter 14 in (360 mm) 13.6 in (345 mm) (*)
Rear disc diameter 13.8 in (350 mm) 12.6 in (320 mm) (*)
(*) In option: 14 in (360 mm) front disc diameter and 13.8 in (350 mm) rear disc
diameter

Suspension
Front suspensions with double
wishbone independent wheels.
Multilink system rear suspensions on
independent wheels.
Skyhook shock absorber with 8
electronic controlled dampening
(optional on AWD model only).

287
 Features and Specifications

Wheels
NOTE:
• Maserati recommends Maserati Genuine Tires marked with “MGT” logo specifically designed for its models.
• In order to maintain high performance and safety level, Maserati recommends to use tires equivalent to the original size.
Only for front and rear mounting with the same tire 235/50 ZR 18:
• Front and rear rims are different and cannot be swapped.
• Both front and rear tires sized “235/50 ZR 18” can be swapped.

WARNING!
• The maximum speed reachable with the tires is indicated by the tire manufacturer. Always comply with the regulations
in force in the Country you are driving in.
• Never exceed the maximum speed indicated for the tires: failure to respect the max. speed may damage these tires.
Danger: risk of accident!

Allowed tires size with standard wheel rims Ghibli S Q4 (AWD model) Ghibli
Light alloy rims 18” x 8,5J (front) 18” x 7,5J (front)
18” x 10J (rear) 18” x 8,5J (rear)
- Front tires 235/50 ZR 18 (101Y) 235/50 ZR 18 (101Y)
- Rear tires 275/45 ZR 18 (107Y) 235/50 ZR 18 (101Y)
- Front winter tires 235/50 ZR 18 101V XL 235/50 ZR 18 101V XL
- Rear winter tires 275/45 ZR 18 107V XL 235/50 ZR 18 101V XL
Light alloy spare rim 18” x 6J 18” x 6J
8
- Spare tire 175/50 R 18 175/50 R 18

288
 Features and Specifications

Allowed tires size with optional wheel rims For all models
Light alloy rims 19” x 8,5J (front)
19” x 10J (rear)
- Front tires 245/45 ZR 19 (98Y)
- Rear tires 275/40 ZR 19 (101Y)
- Front winter tires 245/45 ZR 19 98V M+S
- Rear winter tires 275/40 ZR 19 101V M+S
- Front all-season tires 245/45 ZR 19 98V M+S (*)
- Rear all-season tires 275/40 ZR 19 101V M+S (*)
Light alloy rims 20” x 8,5J (front)
20” x 10,5J (rear)
- Front tires 245/40 ZR 20 (99Y) XL
- Rear tires 285/35 ZR 20 (100Y)
- Front winter tires 245/40 ZR 20 99V XL M+S
- Rear winter tires 285/35 ZR 20 100V M+S
Light alloy rims 21” x 8,5J (front)
21” x 10,5J (rear)
- Front tires 245/35 ZR 21 (96Y) XL
- Rear tires 285/30 ZR 21 (100Y) XL
- Front winter tires 245/35 ZR 21 96W XL M+S
- Rear winter tires 285/30 ZR 21 100W XL M+S
(*) Only for Ghibli S Q4 (AWD model)
8

289
 Features and Specifications

Performance

Ghibli S Q4 (AWD model) Ghibli

Maximum speed 176.5 mph (284 km/h) 166 mph (267 km/h)
Accelerations from 0 to 100 km/h 4.8 seconds 5.6 seconds

Weights

Ghibli S Q4 (AWD model) Ghibli

Unladen vehicle weight with tank and reservoirs 4,565 lb 4,400 lb
filled, tools and accessories (°)
Approved Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 5,573 lb 5,420 lb
(2,621 lb front axle – (2,468 lb front axle –
2,952 lb rear axle) 2,952 lb rear axle)
(°) Base configuration without options.

NOTE:
The specifications described above can change without prior notification.

290
 Features and Specifications

Dimensions

Wheel base 118 in (2,998 mm)

Total length 195.7 in (4,971 mm)
Width without mirrors 76.5 in (1,945 mm)
Width with mirrors 82.6 in (2,100 mm)
Front track 64.3 in (1,635 mm)
Rear track 65 in (1,653 mm)
Front overhang 36.8 in (935 mm)
Rear overhang 40.8 in (1,038 mm)
Height 57.5 in (1,461 mm)
Trunk volume 17.6 cu. ft. (500 l)

291
 Features and Specifications

Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure value under the following loading conditions listed in the table below:
• PLC (Partial Loading Condition): considering 2 passengers + luggage.
• FLC (Full Loading Condition): considering 4 or 5 passengers + luggage.

(*) Speed driving higher than

124 mph (200 km/h)
Load PLC FLC PLC - FLC
Wheel Front and rear Front and rear Front and rear
Pressure 32 PSI (2.2 bar) 38 PSI (2.6 bar) 38 PSI (2.6 bar)
Pressure (**) 33 PSI (2.3 bar) 39 PSI (2.7 bar) 39 PSI (2.7 bar)
Spare tire pressure 51 PSI (3.5 bar)
(*) Not for winter and all-season tires.
(**) Only for front and rear mounting with the same tire 235/50 ZR 18.

NOTE:
• The pressure values indicated in the table are also reported on the driver-side door pillar information label.
• For more information about the pressure check methods, see “Tires – General Information” in section 5.

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire overheating and failure.
8
• Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that
results in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)

292
 Features and Specifications
(Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
• Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to
wheels, tires, and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is
equipped with low-profile tires.

293
 Features and Specifications

294
9 – Index

295
 Index
ABS (Anti Lock Brake System). . . . .195 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 BeltAlert system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Accessories ALR (Automatic Locking Retractor). .55 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Aftermarket Parts and Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Accessories Statement . . . . . . . . .13 Assistance, if you need . . . . . . . .11 Bodywork Maintenance and Care . .273
Accident, in the event of . . . . . . . .229 ATC (Automatic Temperature Pre-Short Drop Function . . . . . .274
Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Protection from Atmospheric
Advanced Front Air Bag Audio Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Audio System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Useful Advice to Keep
Air Bag Deployment Result . . . . .63 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 the Bodywork in Good
Air Bag Deployment Sensors CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .178 Brakes
Air Bag System Components. . . . .58 Automatic Transmission Controls.179 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .195
Air Bag System Maintenance . . . .63 Automatic Transmission Range . .181 Brake and Stability Control
Air Bag Warning Light. . . . . . . . .77 Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 System (ESC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Front Air Bag Inflator Units . . . . .62 Gear Shift Indicator Light . . . . . .188 Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . .196
Passenger Air bag Labels . . . . . . .58 I C E Mode excluding ESC . . . . . .189 Brake Fluid Level Check . . . . . . .252
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Manual Release of Transmission .241 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Transmission Malfunction. . . . . .189 Manual Release of Parking
Supplemental Restraint System Aux and USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
(SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 AWD Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Supplemental Seat-mounted All-Wheel Drive, drive mode. . . .183 Using the Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Side Air Bags (SAB) . . . . . . . . . . .60 AWD Torque Distribution Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Supplemental Side Air Bag (AWD model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Courtesy Lights (Below Door) . . .269
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) . . . . . .60 Service AWD System Message Front Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Transport of persons with (AWD model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Trunk Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
disability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Air Conditioning System (A/C BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . .196 Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 CD / DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
A/C System Maintenance . . . . . .270 Battery remote Posts Position . . .239 CD / DVD Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . .168 Jump start Procedure. . . . . . . . .238 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Air Conditioning Distribution . . .128 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . .258 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . .65
9 Dual-zone Controls . . . . . . . . . .168 To disconnect the Battery . . . . . .258 Children too large for Booster
Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . .256 To reconnect the Battery . . . . . .259 Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

296
 Index
Infants and Child Restraints . . . . .65 Automatic Locking Doors . . . . . .39 Electronic Cruise Control. . . . . . . .200
Installing Child Restraint Systems Child Protection Door Lock Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
using the Vehicle Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Emergency Fuel Filler Door
equipped with ALR. . . . . . . . . . .67 Doors Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Lower Anchors and Tether for Doors Manual Lock. . . . . . . . . . .38 Emergency Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Children (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Front Doors Components . . . . . .82 First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Older Children and Child Lock/Unlock Door Flashlight . . . .32 Hazard Warning Light/Flasher . .108
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Manual Door Lock from Outside .42 In the Event of an Accident . . . .229
Tips on getting the most out Power Doors Locking/Unlocking . .38 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
of your child restraint . . . . . . . . .67 Rear Doors Components . . . . . . .82 Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Unlock Doors from the Driver Towing a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .241
Clock, analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Trunk Lid Emergency Release . . . .47
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Unlock Doors from Engine
Central Console the Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . .41 Engine Air Filter Replacement . .256
Components/Features . . . . . . . . .81 Unlock Driver Door/All Doors Engine Coolant Level Check . . . .251
Front Console Components . . . . .80 with Remote Key 1 Press . . . . . . .32 Engine Lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Power Outlet Inside the Central Unlock Power Doors and Trunk Engine Oil Level Check . . . . . . .254
Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Lid with Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . .230
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Unlock the Doors and Fuel Filler Engine Start Failure . . . . . . . . .177
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Engine Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 “Drive Away Inhibit” strategy . . . .194 Normal Starting of the Engine . .176
Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Driving Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Use of the Engine . . . . . . . . . . .198
Front Seats Cup Holders . . . . . .114 Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Engine Lid
Power Outlet Inside the Cup Driving in Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Open and Close the Engine Lid . .48
Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Driving in the Mountains. . . . . .223 Trunk and Engine Lid Ajar
Rear Seats Cup Holders . . . . . . .115 Driving in the Rain . . . . . . . . . .222 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Driving on Snow or Ice . . . . . . .223 EPB (Electric Parking Brake). . . . . .190
Dashboard Driving through Flooded ESC (Electronic Stability Control) . .195
Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Safe Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Filters
Data, Technical . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 DRL (Daytime Running Light) . . . .101 A/C System Air Filter
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 9
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 EDR (Event Data Recorder) . . . . . . .64 Engine Air Filter Replacement . .256

297
 Index
Fuel iPod connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Entry/Exit Illumination . . . . . . . .105
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . .219 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Jump Start Procedure . . . . . . . . . .240 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Hazard Warning Light/Flashers . .108
Emissions Inspection and Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Maintenance Programs . . . . . . .248 Key Fob Battery Replacement. . . .34 Headlights Leveling. . . . . . . . . .107
Fuel Consumption . . . . . . . . . . .285 Preventing Inadvertent Locking Headlights On With Wipers . . . .111
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . .217 of key fob RKE Transmitter Inside Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . .100
Fuel System Warnings . . . . . . . .218 the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 High Beam and Flashing . . . . . .104
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . .218 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Integrated External Rear View
Low Fuel Indicator . . . . . . . . . .149 Requiring and setting Additional Mirror Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Materials Added to Fuel. . . . . . .218 Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
MMT in Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . .218 Unlock Power Doors and Trunk Light Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . .217 Lid with Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Multifunction Lever. . . . . . . . . .103
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Keyless Ignition Device . . . . . . . . . .22 SmartBeam System . . . . . . . . . .101
Fuses Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Turn Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Fuses Replacement . . . . . . . . . .261 Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .119
Integrated Power Module . . . . .263 Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Loading with Rear Seatbacks
Brake Fluid Level Check . . . . . . .252 Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Coolant Transmission and Vehicle Load Carrying Capacity . .118
HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Hydraulic Steering System Fluid Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . .127 Engine Coolant Level Check . . . .251 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Engine Oil Level Check. . . . . . . .251 A/C System Maintenance . . . . . .270
HSA (Hill Start Assist) . . . . . . . . . .197 Steering Fluid Level Check . . . . .255 Air Bag System Maintenance . . . .63
Transmission Oil Check. . . . . . . .255 Bodywork Maintenance
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . .24 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Infotainment System. . . . . . . . . . .152 Adaptive Bi-Xenon Headlights . .101 Emissions Inspection and
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . .100 Maintenance Programs . . . . . . .248
Interiors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .266 Interior Maintenance and Care . .275
Interior Components . . . . . . . . . .80 Dimmer Controls. . . . . . . . . . . .106 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . .250
9 Interior Maintenance and Care . .275 Dome Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . .247
DRL Daytime Running Lights . . .101 Scheduled Maintenance Service .244

298
 Index
Scheduled Service Plan . . . . . . .245 Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . .155 Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . .174
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . .124 Safety and Driving Assistance . . .161 Phone/Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . .271 Sirius XM Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Maserati Roadside Assistance Steering Wheel Audio Controls .154 Power Outlet Inside
Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Tools and Hard Controls . . . . . .153 the Central Console . . . . . . . . .113
Messages (TFT Display) . . . . . . . . .137 Touch Screen Keys . . . . . . . . . .154 Power Outlet Inside
MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light). .133 the Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 On Board Diagnostic System . . . . .199 Power Outlet inside the Trunk . .113
External Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 On Board Diagnostic System —
Integrated External Rear View OBD II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Refillings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Mirror Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ORC (Occupant Restraint Refilling Capacities . . . . . . . . . .282
Internal Rear View Mirror . . . . . .97 Controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Mirrors Positioning. . . . . . . . . . .96 Remote Start System . . . . . . . . . . .36
Rear View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .95 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse . . . . . . . . .96 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . .65
MTC System (Maserati Touch Enabling and Disabling . . . . . . . .73 Occupant Restraint System . . . . .49
Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Servicing Park Assist System . . . . .73 RKE (Remote Keyless Entry)
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Audio Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Pairing Remote Keyless Entry
Audio System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Failure Indication . . . . . . . . . . .193 Transmitter to Seats Memory . . . .89
Auto-On Comfort and Remote Manual Engagement/ Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter .35
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Roadside Assistance Program . . . . .16
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Manual Release of Parking
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Customer Programmable ParkSense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . .65
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 ParkView (Camera) . . . . . . . . . . . .74 NHTSA Toll-free Auto Safety
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Passive Entry System . . . . . . . . . . .40 Hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Pedals, adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Occupant Restraint System . . . . .49
Engine Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Pets, transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Reporting Safety Defects. . . . . . .12
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Scheduled Maintenance Service . . .244
MTC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 Phone and Voice Controls on Scheduled Service Plan . . . . . . . . .245
MTC Side Audio Controls . . . . . .155 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .173 SD Memory Card and CD/DVD . . . .166 9
Phone/Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . .165 Phone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

299
 Index
Automatic Locking Retractor Seat Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Danger symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
(ALR) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Symbols of prohibitions and
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder SmartBeam system . . . . . . . . . . . .101 compulsory measures . . . . . . . . .14
System (BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Smoking Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Warning symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Passenger Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . .54 Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Seat Belt Reminder Light . . . . . .136 Spare parts service . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 TCS (Traction Control System). . . . .196
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women . .57 Genuine parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Seat Belts Pretensioners. . . . . . . .55 Scheduled maintenance. . . . . . . .13 Tell tales
Three-Point Seat Belts . . . . . . . . .51 SRS (Supplemental Restraint Tell tales on Rev Counter . . . . . .135
Three-Point Seat Belts Height System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 TFT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Main and Submenu . . . . . . . . . .138
Three-Point Seat Belts Untwisting Engine Start Failure. . . . . . . . . .177 Messages on Main Display Area .146
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Normal Starting of the Engine . .176 Tires
Three-Point Seat Belts Use Steering Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Change a Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . .211
Using the Seat Belt in Automatic Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . .93 Department of Transportation
Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode . . .55 Phone and Voice Controls on Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . .207
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Steering Wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . .173 General Information . . . . . . . . .203
Driver Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . .88 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .292
Easy Entry/Exit Seats . . . . . . . . . .89 Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Punctured Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Front Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . .86 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel . .92 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Front Power/Manual Seats . . . . . .85 Stored, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Snow Chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Front Power Seats. . . . . . . . . . . .83 Stuck Vehicle, freeing . . . . . . . . . .238 Tire Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Front Seats Cup Holders . . . . . . .114 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Tire Pressure Checkup . . . . . . . .208
Front Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . . .87 Closing Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Tire Pressure Low Warning . . . . .214
Pairing Remote Keyless Entry Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . .123 TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring
Transmitter to Seats Memory . . . .89 Power Sunroof with Sunshade . .122 System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Power Lumbar Seats . . . . . . . . . .84 Slide Opening Sunroof. . . . . . . .122 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . .209
Rear Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . .124 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Rear Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . .90 Venting Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Sunshades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
9 Rear Seats Cup Holders . . . . . . .115 Power Sunshades . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .241
Rear Side Heated Seats . . . . . . . .91 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Vehicle Towing Conditions . . . . .242

300
 Index
TPMS System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Tire Pressure Low Warning. . . . .214 Warranty Information. . . . . . . . .11
TPMS Deactivation . . . . . . . . . .216 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Transmission Manual Release Wheels Maintenance . . . . . . . .271
of P (Park) Position. . . . . . . . . . .237 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Transmitter, RKE Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . .43
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Auto-Up Feature with Anti-Pinch
of key fob RKE Transmitter Inside Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Radio Frequency RKE Transmitter .35 Power Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Trunk Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
To unlatch the Trunk. . . . . . . . . .33 Reset Auto-Up/Down . . . . . . . . .44
Trunk Compartment Operation . .46 Window and Sunshade Lockout
Trunk Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Trunk Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Windshield Wipers and Washers . .109
Trunk and Engine Lid Ajar Adding Washer Fluid. . . . . . . . .253
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Headlight On with Wipers . . . . .111
Trunk Lid Emergency Release Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . .110
from inside the Trunk . . . . . . . . .47 Windshield and Wiper
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . .111
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . .109
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .18 Wipers Blades Maintenance . . . .111
Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . .77
TFT Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Warning Lights on Analog
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Warnings when driving . . . . . . . . .15 9
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

301
Maserati S.p.A. & Maserati North America, Inc. reserve the right to make changes and/or modifications to the
content and all technical information and specifications without prior notification.

Therefore, the user is not entitled to any claims based on the contents (texts, data, illustrations, explanations and
regulations) in this manual, which are based on the data known at the time of going to print.

© 2014. Maserati S.p.A. All rights reserved.

Publication 910040524 - 1st Edition - 10/2014

This document may not be reproduced, printed or translated, even partially, without the written consent of MASERATI S.p.A.
WWW.MASERATI .COM

M A S E R AT I S PA · V I A L E C I R O M E N O T T I , 3 2 2 · I - 4 1 1 2 1 M O D E N A